Owner’s Manual
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the BOSS
BR-900CD Digital Recording Studio.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled:
• USING THE UNIT SAFELY (page 2–3)
• IMPORTANT NOTES (page 4–5)
These sections provide important information concerning
the proper operation of the unit.
Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a
good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit,
Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety. The manual
should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
■ Printing Conventions in This Manual
• Text or numerals enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicate buttons.
[PLAY]
[REC]
PLAY button
REC button
• Reference such as (p. **) indicate pages in this manual to which
you can refer.
Copyright © 2005 BOSS CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of BOSS CORPORATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
013
•
In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
•
107dNever handle the AC adaptor body, or its output
plugs, with wet hands when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
•
108bBefore moving the unit, disconnect the AC adaptor
..........................................................................................................
014
•
Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
and all cords coming from external devices.
..........................................................................................................
•
109bBefore cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
..........................................................................................................
015
•
unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet.
Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
..........................................................................................................
•
110bWhenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, disconnect the AC adaptor from the
outlet.
..........................................................................................................
111: Selection
•
If used improperly, batteries may explode or leak
and cause damage or injury. In the interest of
precautions (p. 23).
..........................................................................................................
016
•
Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” sheet.
• Carefully follow the installation instructions for
batteries, and make sure you observe the correct
polarity.
..........................................................................................................
• Avoid using new batteries together with used
ones. In addition, avoid mixing different types
of batteries.
019
•
Batteries must never be recharged, heated, taken
apart, or thrown into fire or water.
• Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to
remain unused for an extended period of time.
• If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth
or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the
discharge from the battery compartment. Then
install new batteries. To avoid inflammation of
the skin, make sure that none of the battery
discharge gets onto your hands or skin. Exercise
the utmost caution so that none of the discharge
gets near your eyes. Immediately rinse the
affected area with running water if any of the
discharge has entered the eyes.
..........................................................................................................
023
•
DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.
Damage to speakers or other system components
may result.
•
101bThe unit and the AC adaptor should be located so
• Never keep batteries together with metallic
objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces,
hairpins, etc.
their location or position does not interfere with
their proper ventilation.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
•
102dAlways grasp only the output plug or the body of
112
•
Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance
with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that
may be observed in the region in which you live.
the AC adaptor when plugging into, or
unplugging from, this unit or an outlet.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
•
103bAny accumulation of dust between the AC
•
118aShould you remove screws, keep them in a safe
adaptor and the power outlet can result in poor
insulation and lead to fire. Periodically wipe away
such dust with a dry cloth. Also, disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet whenever the
unit is to remain unused for an extended period of
time.
place out of children's reach, so there is no chance
of them being swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
120
•
Always turn the phantom power off when
connecting any device other than condenser
microphones that require phantom power. You
risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply
phantom power to dynamic microphones, audio
playback devices, or other devices that don't
require such power. Be sure to check the specifica-
tions of any microphone you intend to use by
referring to the manual that came with it.
(This instrument's phantom power: +48 V DC, 7
mA Max)
..........................................................................................................
104
•
Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106
•
Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
291a
In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 2–3, please read and observe the following:
Power Supply: Use of Batteries
Repairs and Data
301
452
• Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any
• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric
motor or variable lighting system).
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up on a memory
card/computer, or written down on paper (when
possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the
loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when
circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we
regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and
Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.
302
• The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long
hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a
cause for concern.
303a
• The use of an AC adaptor is recommended as the unit’s
power consumption is relatively high. Should you prefer
to use batteries, please use the alkaline type.
304a
Additional Precautions
• When installing or replacing batteries, always turn off the
551
power on this unit and disconnect any other devices you
may have connected. This way, you can prevent
malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of important data
you have stored in the unit’s memory on a memory card /
307
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
computer.
552
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
Placement
351
of data that was stored in the unit’s memory or a memory
card once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or
liability concerning such loss of data.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
move it farther away from the source of interference.
352a
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
• This device may interfere with radio and television reception.
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.
554
352b
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices,
556
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit.
Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or
while conversing. Should you experience such problems,
you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
558a
greater distance from this unit, or switch them off.
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
354a
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
559a
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
355b
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
• When moved from one location to another where the
temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.
561
• Use only the specified expression pedal (Roland EV-5 or
BOSS FV-300L; sold separately). By connecting any other
expression pedals, you risk causing malfunction and/or
damage to the unit.
562
• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using
some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
Maintenance
401a
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor-
mation on cable specifications, contact the manufac-
turer of the cable.
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a
mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe
the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind,
to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
Handling CD-ROMs
Copyright
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public
performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part,
of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public
performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a
801
851
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded
surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may
not be read properly. Keep your discs clean using a
commercially available CD cleaner.
third party is prohibited by law.
853
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a
Before Using Memory Cards
(CompactFlash)
copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsi-
bility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of
third-party copyrights arising through your use of this
unit.
Using Memory Cards
704
• Carefully insert the Memory card all the way in—until it is
firmly in place.
705
• Never touch the terminals of the Memory card. Also,
avoid getting the terminals dirty.
707
• This unit’s memory card slot accepts CompactFlash
memory cards. Microdrive storage media by IBM are not
compatible.
708
204
• CompactFlash cards are constructed using precision
*
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
components; handle the cards carefully, paying particular
note to the following.
*
206eScreen shots in this documents are reprinted with
• To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity,
be sure to discharge any static electricity from your
own body before handling the cards.
permission from Microsoft Corporation.
*
206j Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft®
Windows® operating system.”
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with
the contact portion of the cards.
207
*
Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or
vibration.
209
*
MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles,
or other such locations (storage temperature: -25 to 85°
C).
220
*
All product names mentioned in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
• Do not allow cards to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify the cards.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Using CD-R/RW Discs
Two different types of recordable disc can be used with the
BR-900CD—namely, CD-R discs and CD-RW discs.
●
Do not touch the lens.
●
When the lens is dirty, clean the lens with a commercial
lens blower.
What is a CD-R disc?
CD-R (Compact Disc Recordable) is a CD to which data can
be written. It is not possible to erase or move the data that
has been written.
●
If a write error occurs, carry out cleaning using a
commercially available CD-RW drive lens cleaner.
*
Note that some commercially available cleaners are intended
for CD-R drives, while others are intended for CD-RW drives.
Be sure to select a cleaner for CD-RW drives.
This type of disc should be used to create audio CDs that will
be played on standard CD players. Playback of CD-RW discs
will not be possible on this type of equipment. In addition,
even if you have created an audio CD using a CD-R disc,
playback will only be possible on players that support the
playback of recordable discs.
*
*
Never use commercially available cleaner intended for
standard CD players. This type of cleaner cannot be used to
clean the BR-900CD's write lens.
Even if the recommended type of CD-R/RW disc is used in a
perfectly normal CD-R/RW drive, the possibility of write
errors cannot be completely eliminated. Please be aware that
this type of problem can still occur as a result of variations in
CD-R/RW drives and CD-R/RW disc manufacturing
differences.
What is a CD-RW disc?
CD-RW (Compact Disc ReWritable) is a CD that can be
written and erased. As a result, this type of recordable disc
can be used again and again.
While you can create audio CDs using CD-RW discs, it will
not be possible to play these CDs on a standard CD player.
(You will, however, be able to play these discs using the BR-
900CD's CD-R/RW drive.)
Handling CD-R/RW discs
*
In addition to the following precautions, please also read the
instructions provided with the CD-R/RW discs.
Handling the CD-R/RW disc drive
●
DO NOT play a CD-R/RW disc (CD-R/RW disc on
which song data has been backed up) on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a level
that could cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to
speakers or other system components may result.
When you use the CD-R/RW drive, you must use only the
supplied AC adaptor.
The CD-R/RW drive cannot be used while running on
battery power.
●
Upon handling the discs, please observe the following.
●
Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free
from vibration. If the unit must be installed at an angle,
be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible
range.
❍
❍
❍
Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc.
Do not use in dusty areas.
Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an
enclosed vehicle.
●
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been
moved to a location with a level of humidity that is
greatly different than its former location. Rapid changes
in the environment can cause condensation to form
inside the drive, which will adversely affect the
operation of the drive and/or damage CD-R/RW discs.
When the unit has been moved, allow it to become
accustomed to the new environment (allow a few hours)
before operating it.
●
Keep the disc in the case.
Compatibility of CD-R/RW discs
and drives
●
Ensure that the recommended type of CD-R/RW discs
are always used. Failure to observe this precaution can
lead to an increase in the frequency of write errors.
●
Even when the recommended type of disc is used, there
is still a possibility that write errors can occur. Please be
aware that this type of problem can still result from
variations in CD-R/RW drives and CD-R/RW disc
manufacturing differences.
●
Avoid using the CD-R/RW drive in locations with high
temperatures. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in the drive becoming unable to operate correctly
or in write errors. In addition, this type of environment
can also reduce the lifespan of the CD-R/RW drive.
●
The usage of discs with printable labels is not
recommended, even if these discs are of the
recommended type. Certain storage conditions can cause
discs with printable labels to warp, and write errors can
occur as a result.
●
Remove any disc from the drive before powering up or down.
●
To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert
only CD-R/RW discs into the disc drive. Never insert
any other type of disc. Avoid getting paper clips, coins,
or any other foreign objects inside the drive.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes When Using Mics
When you insert a CD-R/RW disc
to built in CD-R/RW drive...
When you insert a CD-R/RW disc to built in CD-R/RW
drive, lock the CD-R/RW disc at correct position according
to “Insert a CD-R/RW disc” below. Please be careful to lock a
CD-R/RW disc correctly. Unless, it is possible that the disc
tray is stuck and unable to remove a CD-R/RW disc.
Removing a CD-R/RW disc
1. Hold the stopper downward and remove a CD-R/RW
disc from outer rim.
fig.CD eject
Inserting a CD-R/RW disc
1. Press the eject button and open a disc tray.
2. Pull out a disc tray.
3. Locate the position of center hole of CD-R/RW disc at
stopper of CD-R/RW drive.
If a disc tray does not open
If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive (such
as due to a power failure), the disc tray cannot be opened by
pressing the eject button. In this case, you can insert a piece
4. Press the CD-R/RW disc downward. The CD-R/RW
disc will be locked by 3 clips of the stopper.
fig.CD set
of wire to force the tray open.
fig.Hole
Emergency eject hole
Make sure the BR-900CD’s power has been turned OFF
before attempting to use the emergency eject hole. If you
insert something while the power is on, the disc could get
damaged, or unexpected problems may occur.
*
As a certain amount of force must be applied for insertion,
always confirm that the CD-R/RW disc has been correctly
inserted. Failure to properly and fully insert a disc can result
in an inability to carry out writing correctly.
5. Press disc tray until it is locked in the BR-900CD.
Notes When Using Mics
Always be sure to switch the phantom power off except when connecting condenser mics requiring a phantom power supply.
Supplying phantom power to dynamic mics, audio playback equipment, and other devices that do not use phantom power may
cause damage to your equipment.
For mic specifications, please refer to the owner’s manual for whatever model of mic you are using.
*
BR-900CD Phantom Power: +48 V DC, 7 mA Max.
Phantom power is supplied to the XLR connectors for MIC 1 and MIC 2 simultaneously. The phantom power cannot be switched
on or off for each connector individually.
If simultaneously using mics that require phantom power with those that don't, then connect any mic that does not need phantom
power to one of the 1/4” phone jacks. Phantom power is supplied only to the XLR connectors, not to the 1/4” phone jacks.
To connect mics to the 1/4” phone jacks, use a commercially available XLR-to-phone adapter cable or other form of adapter.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
(5) Using Insert Effects..............................................35
Switch effect patches ...........................................35
Recording without insert effects........................36
(6) Using the Rhythm................................................37
Playing the Rhythm.............................................37
Changing arrangements......................................37
Changing patterns ...............................................38
USING THE UNIT SAFELY ...................2
IMPORTANT NOTES ..........................4
Before Using CD-R/RW Discs.............6
Notes When Using Mics....................7
Introduction to the BR-900CD..........14
Features.......................................................................14
Memory Cards Supported by Your BR-900CD.....16
How to remove the card protector....................16
patterns..................................................................38
Front Panel..................................................................17
Rear Panel...................................................................22
Inserting Batteries......................................................23
arrangements or patterns....................................38
(7) Basic Recording....................................................39
Selecting the recording track..............................39
About the recording (REC) modes....................39
Procedure ..............................................................40
(8) Playing Back Recorded Music............................41
(Track Mute) .........................................................41
Connecting Peripheral Devices........26
Inserting a Memory Card.........................................27
(Recording an additional performance while
listening to an existing performance) .....................41
Turning On the Power..............................................28
Turning Off the Power..............................................28
(10) Adjusting the Sound for Each Track ...............42
Setting the positioning (pan) of the sound.......42
Adjusting the tone (Track EQ) ...........................43
Adding width to the sound (Loop Effect)........43
(11) Bouncing (Putting multiple tracks together) ..... 45
(12) Turning Off the Power ......................................45
(13) Removing the Memory Card............................45
Selecting a song (Song Select) ............................29
Playing back a song .............................................29
Changing the current position...........................30
Recording/Playing Back a Song .....31
(1) Preparing the Memory Card..............................31
(2) Turning On the Power ........................................31
Formatting the memory card (Initialize)..........31
(3) Selecting the Song to Record..............................32
Recording a new song (Song New)...................32
(4) Connecting Instruments .....................................33
instrument.............................................................33
instrument that you want to record..................34
Turning on the internal microphone.................34
Adjusting the input sensitivity ..........................35
Adjusting the input level ....................................35
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Recording Track .................................48
Changing V-Tracks....................................................49
Changing the Position of the Input Sound (Pan).......49
Recording Operations...............................................50
Registering a Locator Point......................................64
Moving to the Locator Point ....................................64
Deleting a Locator Point ...........................................64
(Scrub/Preview) .............................65
Setting the Repeat Portion........................................51
Setting the Repeat Portion with Accurate Timing.....52
Scrubbing to Find the Music Starting/Ending Point..... 65
Changing the Scrub Points.......................................66
and [FF] .......................................................................66
(Punch-in/out) ................................53
(Track Editing)................................67
Manually Punching In/Out.....................................53
Manually punching in and out using [REC]........53
Copying Data (Track Copy).....................................67
Copying the repeated portion (AB)...................67
Copying by specifying the time (TME/MES)...... 68
Copying a complete track (ALL) .......................69
Moving Data (Track Move)......................................70
Moving the repeated portion (AB) ....................70
Moving by specifying the time (TME/MES)....... 71
Moving a complete track (ALL).........................72
Erasing Data (Track Erase).......................................73
Erasing the repeated portion (AB).....................73
Erasing by specifying the time (TME/MES)........ 74
Erasing a complete track (ALL) .........................75
Exchanging Data (Track Exchange)........................76
a foot switch..........................................................54
Auto Punching In and Out.......................................54
Specifying the area for auto punching in/out .....54
Erasing a registered auto punch in/out location..... 55
How to record ......................................................55
(Loop Recording).......................................................56
Setting the portion to be repeated .....................56
How to record ......................................................56
Reversing the Last Operation (Undo) ....................57
Canceling the Undo (Redo)......................................57
Recorded........................................77
(Bounce).........................................58
Copying a Song (Song Copy)...................................77
(Direct CD Bounce) ...................................................59
Erasing Songs (Song Erase)......................................77
Recording to a CD-R/RW ........................................60
(Song Optimize).........................................................78
Naming Songs (Song Name)....................................78
Protecting a Song (Song Protect) .............................79
Saving the Current Settings to the Song (Song Save) .... 79
BR-864/BR-532..............................61
Loading Songs Created with the BR-864................61
Loading Songs Created with the BR-532................61
(Analog Connection).................................................80
Time.............................................................................62
Recording to a Digital Recorder (Digital Connection)... 80
Disabling digital copying (Digital Copy Protect)..... 80
Displaying the Memory Card Usage......................62
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equalizer................................................................96
Flanger...................................................................96
Foot Volume .........................................................96
Lo-Fi Box ...............................................................96
Noise Suppressor .................................................97
Octave....................................................................97
Phaser.....................................................................97
Pitch Shifter...........................................................98
Preamp...................................................................98
Ring Modulator....................................................99
Slow Attack...........................................................99
Speaker Simulator..............................................100
Tremolo/Pan ......................................................100
Voice Transformer .............................................100
Wah ......................................................................101
Effect Patches and Banks..........................................84
Editing Insert Effect Settings....................................85
Saving Insert Effects Settings (Write) .....................86
According to the Mode.............................................87
Algorithm List............................................................88
BANK: GUITAR ........................................................88
1. COSM GTR AMP.............................................88
2. ACOUSTIC SIM ...............................................88
3. BASS SIM ..........................................................89
4. COSM COMP GTR..........................................89
5. ACOUSTIC GTR ..............................................89
6. BASS MULTI ....................................................89
7. COSM BASS AMP ...........................................90
8. COSM COMP BSS............................................90
BANK: MIC ................................................................90
9. VOCAL MULTI................................................90
10. VOICE TRANS...............................................90
11. COSM COMP VCL........................................91
BANK: LINE...............................................................91
12. STEREO MULTI.............................................91
13. LO-FI BOX.......................................................91
BANK: SIMUL ...........................................................92
14. VO+GT AMP..................................................92
15. VO+AC.SIM....................................................92
16. VO+ACOUSTIC.............................................92
Parameter List ............................................................93
Acoustic Guitar Simulator..................................93
Acoustic Processor...............................................93
Bass Simulator......................................................93
Chorus ...................................................................94
Compressor...........................................................94
COSM Comp (compressor)/Limiter.................94
De-esser .................................................................95
Defretter ................................................................95
Delay......................................................................95
Doubling................................................................95
Enhancer................................................................95
Editing the Mastering Tool Kit Settings ...............103
Saving the Mastering Tool Kit Settings (Write)....... 104
Functions......................................105
Algorithm..................................................................105
Parameter List ..........................................................105
Equalizer..............................................................105
Bass Cut Filter.....................................................106
Enhancer..............................................................106
Input.....................................................................106
Expander .............................................................106
Compressor.........................................................107
Mixer....................................................................107
Limiter .................................................................107
Output .................................................................107
Selecting the Loop Effect ........................................108
Adjusting How the Loop Effect is Applied .........109
Setting the Track EQ................................................110
Parameter List ..........................................................111
CHORUS/DELAY/DBLN (Doubling)...........111
REVERB...............................................................111
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note concerning creation of patterns..............126
Creating Patterns in Realtime Recording.............126
Rehearsing recordings.......................................128
Deleting unneeded drum sounds....................129
Changing the metronome volume...................129
Creating Patterns in Step Recording.....................130
Changing the velocity .......................................132
Deleting unneeded drum sounds....................132
Naming Patterns......................................................132
Copying Patterns .....................................................133
Erasing Patterns .......................................................133
Parameter List ..........................................................112
(Pitch Correction) ..........................113
The Pitch Correction ...............................................113
Makeup of the Pitch Correction ............................113
Pitch Correction Patches.........................................113
Precautions for Pitch Correction Usage ...............113
Using the Pitch Correction.....................................114
(Pitch Correction Edit) ............................................115
Saving the Pitch Correction Settings (Write).......115
(Correction Event Map)..........................................116
Performing the Drums............................................134
Selecting Drum Kits.................................................134
Creating Original Drum Kits (Tone Load)...........135
Loading from the tracks....................................135
Copying drum sounds from other drum kits.... 137
Changing the position (pan) of the drum sounds.. 138
About the Patterns...................................................120
Types of patterns................................................120
About the Arrangements........................................120
Types of arrangements......................................120
Switching the Rhythm Mode.................................121
Recording Rhythm Performances.........................121
Performing Arrangements and Patterns..............121
Selecting arrangements.....................................121
Performing arrangements.................................121
Selecting patterns...............................................122
Performing patterns...........................................122
patterns................................................................122
arrangements or patterns..................................122
Inserting a Step ........................................................124
Erasing a Step...........................................................124
Naming Arrangements...........................................124
Copying Arrangements..........................................125
Erasing Arrangements............................................125
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive.....139
Precautions ...............................................................140
Setting the Time Between Songs (Pre-Gap).........140
Writing Songs to Discs............................................140
What is MIDI? ..........................................................156
MIDI Connectors .....................................................156
MIDI Channels.........................................................156
MIDI Implementation Charts ................................156
Audio CDs................................................................142
Module ......................................................................157
Playing Back Audio CDs........................................142
Enabling Playback on CD Players (Finalize).......143
Synchronizing Playback with a MIDI Sequencer.... 158
as the master .......................................................158
Data.............................................145
Setting the MTC offset.......................................159
Using MMC ..............................................................160
(Backup)....................................................................145
BR-900CD............................................................160
time (Song Backup)............................................145
a CD-R/RW disc (All Backup).........................146
Loading Saved Songs to a Memory Card (Recover).... 147
time (Song Recover)...........................................147
Compatible OS .........................................................162
Composition of Data on Memory Cards..............162
Connecting a Computer..........................................163
Notes on Using USB................................................163
(All Recover).......................................................147
Copying and Writing Waveform Data.................148
audio tracks (WAV/AIFF Import) ..................148
Backing Up the BR-900CD’s Data .........................164
(WAV/AIFF Export) ...............................................165
(Tone Load).........................................................149
(WAV/AIFF Import)...............................................167
computers (WAV/AIFF Export)......................150
Importing SMFs and Creating Patterns................169
Using SMF ................................................................151
(Tone Load) ..............................................................171
(SMF Player) .......................................................151
Using the BR-864 / BR-532’s Data.........................173
(SMF Import)........................................................152
Backing Up the BR-900CD’s Data .........................175
Erasing Data from a CD-RW Disc (CD-RW Erase).... 153
(WAV/AIFF Export) ...............................................176
Tracks..........................................154
(WAV/AIFF Import)...............................................178
Importing SMFs and Creating Patterns................179
(Tone Load) ..............................................................181
Using the BR-864 / BR-532’s Data.........................183
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Convenient Functions .185
Expression Pedal..........................187
Preset Arrangement List.........................................206
Preset Pattern List....................................................207
When Using a Foot Switch.....................................187
When Using an Expression Pedal .........................187
Changing to the Tuner............................................188
tuning...................................................................188
Tuning.......................................................................189
Setting the Reference Pitch of the Tuner..............189
BR-900CD (Audio Sub Mix)...........190
(Phantom Power) .........................191
(Phrase Trainer)............................192
Slowing Down the Speed (Time Stretch) .............192
Canceling the Center Sound (Center Cancel)......192
Initializing All the BR-900CD’s Settings ..............194
Initializing the System Settings .............................194
Initializing the Effect Settings................................195
Drum Kits .................................................................195
Initializing the Memory Card................................196
(Power Save)................................197
Deactivating the power save function ............197
About the System Parameters ...............................198
About the Sync Parameters....................................198
About the Scrub Parameters ..................................199
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to the BR-900CD
Features
Simple operation
230), which you make copies of, and fill in when
recording music to V-Tracks.
The BR-900CD is designed to be operated as easily as a
cassette tape recorder, even by beginners.
The BR-900CD allows anyone to readily enjoy the benefits of
digital recording as soon as it’s taken out of the box. So,
you’ll surely have listened to the demo songs, if not gone
ahead and produced an entire audio CD, all on your first day
with your new unit.
Equipped with CD-R/RW Drive
The BR-900CD features a CD-R/RW drive capable of both
reading and burning CD-R and CD-RW discs, making it easy
to produce audio CDs of the performances you record.
In addition, it comes equipped with a CD-R/RW drive,
making it easy to keep recorded works stored on audio CDs.
In addition, you can back up performance data stored on
memory cards to CD-R/RW discs for even more efficient and
effective use of your memory cards.
Digital audio workstation
All processes are fully digital
When you use the CD-R/RW drive, you must use only the
supplied AC adaptor.
In addition to a digital mixer and digital recorder, the BR-
900CD contains five digital effects processors.
The CD-R/RW drive cannot be used while running on
battery power.
It is possible to perform all steps needed for recording, including
editing, bouncing tracks, using effects, and mixing down,
entirely within the digital realm, so there is no deterioration in
the signal quality.
Rhythm function
The “Rhythm function” makes it easy to capture phrases or
musical ideas that come to mind. Simply select an
appropriate Rhythm pattern, and set the tempo.
Using the USB connector also allows you to save the song
data you create to a computer.
In addition to the internal preset Rhythm patterns already
provided, you can also create your own original Rhythm
patterns. By recording using the Rhythm function, editing
one measure at a time is greatly simplified.
Equipped with V-Tracks
The BR-900CD has eight audio recording tracks, which
provides for simultaneous recording on two tracks, or
simultaneous playback from eight tracks.
Moreover, each track incorporates eight virtual tracks, called
“V-Tracks,” for a total recording capability of 8 x 8 = 64
tracks! This increased versatility allows you to do things such
as record numerous takes of a guitar solo, which you can
later choose from when putting it all together. Also, while
playing back eight tracks, you can use the bounce mode to
bounce to a V-Track and perform stereo bouncing without
needing to erase any data.
“Section 4 Using the Rhythm” (p. 119)
Five versatile digital effects processors
The BR-900CD comes with five different types of effects
processors. These systems, including recording effects (Insert
effects), send/return (Loop Effects), tone adjustment (Track
EQ), vocal pitch correction (Pitch Correction), and mastering
effects (Mastering Tool Kit) can be used independently for
each application as needed. This enables high-quality song
production in a single device, with no need to connect any
external effects.
What are V-Tracks?
Each track consists of eight virtual tracks, and you can
choose any one of these tracks for recording or playback.
This means that you can record to up to a maximum of
64 tracks, and then select any eight of them to play back.
These virtual tracks that make up the actual tracks are
The BR-900CD has many built-in simulations and effects,
including amp modeling with COSM for a wide variety of
insert effects. Many effects for vocal, keyboard, and guitar
tracks are also included for a vast array of applications.
called “V-Tracks.”
fig.00-101
The loop effects include spatial effects such as chorus and
reverb, which are vital for proper stereo mixdown.
V-Track1
V-Track2
V-Track3
V-Track4
V-Track5
V-Track6
V-Track7
V-Track8
The Track EQ is a built-in, two-band EQ whose utility is most
fully exhibited in making tone adjustments during mixdown.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to the BR-900CD
The Pitch Correction feature allows you to freely adjust the
pitch of vocals, assuring that you can obtain reliable, high-
quality performances.
Phrase Trainer function
When you play back a song you have recorded from the CD
player or the MD player, you can slow down the tempo
without changing the pitch. Also, you can remove the sound
the song. (p. 192)
The Mastering Tool Kit allows you add compression to songs
that have been mixed down and provides a variety of other
effects.
Full complement of input connectors
(jacks)
“Mastering” (p. 102)
Your BR-900CD is equipped with the input jacks shown below.
GUITAR/BASS:
What is COSM (Composite Object Sound Modeling)?
This high-impedance input jack allows you to directly
connect your guitar or bass (accepts 1/4” phone plugs).
Technology that virtually reconstructs an actually
existing structure or material using a different means is
called “modeling” technology. COSM is proprietary
Roland technology that creates new sounds by
combining various sound modeling technologies.
MIC1:
These jacks allow a mic to be connected. Both a TRS phone
jack and an XLR jack are provided. Connect your mic here if
recording vocals or narration.
A built-in microphone is also included, so you can perform
recordings with the BR-900CD even when you don’t have a
microphone connected.
Editing functions
With the BR-900CD, you can perform editing operations such
as copying, moving, and erasing, which cannot be done with
multitrack recorders that use tapes. This means operations
such as copying and repeating a multiple-bar phrase, moving
a multiple-bar phrase to another track, and erasing the data
of a track, whole or in part, can be performed with ease.
*
*
The built-in microphone can be turned on or off (p. 34).
Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector (p. 191).
MIC2:
This is XLR-type microphone input connector. If recording
using two mics, with one mic connected to the MIC 1 input,
connect the second mic here.
Non-destructive editing
Being a digital recorder, the BR-900CD offers non-destructive
editing. With non-destructive editing, after performing any
editing and recording operations, you can still return your
data to its previous state (undo and redo functions).
*
Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector (p. 191).
LINE:
These jacks accept stereo input from keyboards, CD players,
and other devices at line level (RCA phono jacks).
“Canceling an Operation (Undo/Redo)” (p. 57)
The LINE OUT jacks (stereo RCA phono jacks) are also
provided for output.
Quick movement to a point
You can assign a marker to any point in a track that you wish
(locator function). If you assign markers to locations such as
the end of the opening or the beginning of a solo, you will be
able to move instantly to the point where you wish to begin
listening.
USB:
Connecting your computer here allows you to exchange data
between the BR-900CD and a computer.
Two-way power supply allows
you to record anywhere
“Registering Time (Locator)” (p. 64)
You can use the BR-900CD powered by batteries (six size AA
dry cells) or with the AC adaptor.
Equipped with chromatic tuner
(A0 to B6 sound range)
And, thanks to its built-in microphone, you can make
recordings anywhere and anytime you desire.
Your BR-900CD is also equipped with a chromatic tuner so
connected to the BR-900CD (p. 188).
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to the BR-900CD
How to remove the card
protector
To prevent theft of the memory card (CompactFlash), the BR-
900CD is shipped from the factory with a card protector.
fig.00-103
Memory Cards Supported by
Your BR-900CD
The BR-900CD uses CompactFlash cards as the storage
media for recording and playback.
The BR-900CD uses 32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash cards with
a 3.3 V power supply.
Card Protector
For more on supported memory cards (CompactFlash) for
the BR-900CD, refer to “About Memory Cards” (separate
sheet).
Card Cover
CompactFlash Type II cards are not compatible.
To remove the card protector, use the following procedure.
1. Make sure the card cover is closed, then the BR-900CD
CompactFlash cards are available at your nearest computer
or digital camera shop.
over.
*
When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of
newspapers or magazines, and place them under the four
corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and
controls. Also, you should try to orient the unit so no buttons
or controls get damaged.
Formatting the memory card
(CompactFlash)
CompactFlash cards bought at a computer shop, or ones
previously used with a digital camera cannot be used as is
with the BR-900CD.
*
When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid
dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
These CompactFlash cards must first be initialized for use
with the BR-900CD.
2. Using a coin or
flathead screwdriver,
unscrew and remove
the coin screw from
the bottom panel.
For more details regarding initializing, see p. 31, p. 196.
234
* CompactFlash and
are trademarks of SanDisk Corpo-
3. Pull out the card
cover in the direction
indicated by the
arrow.
ration and licensed by CompactFlash association.
2*35BOSS Corporation is an authorized licensee of the
CompactFlash™ and CF logo (
) trademarks.
4. To prevent loss of the
card protector after it
is removed, place it as
shown in the figure.
Insert the card
protector in the slot as
indicated by the
arrow.
5. Turn the BR-900CD
back over to its
original position.
Should you remove the screws, make sure to put them in a
safe place out of children’s reach, so there is no chance of
them being swallowed accidentally.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Front Panel
5
6
11
1
10
8 7
9
2
13
3
4
12
[LINE]
1
Input section
For selecting the LINE jack (stereo) for the line inputs, such
as keyboards or CD players.
SENS knob
SIMUL
Use this knob to adjust the sensitivity at the input jacks (e.g.,
GUITAR/BASS, MIC1, MIC2, and LINE).
By pressing [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] and [MIC]
simultaneously, you can record from both inputs at the same
time.
PEAK indicator
This indicator shows how strong the input level is at the
various input jacks (e.g., GUITAR/BASS, MIC1, and MIC2).
This indicator lights at a level -6 dB lower than where sound
distortion occurs. Adjust the input sensitivity with the SENS knob
so that this indicator lights only occasionally, at those moments
when you play your guitar (or other instrument) at its loudest.
*
bank (p. 35, p. 84) changes automatically.
INPUT LEVEL knob
Use this knob to adjust the volume of the input source for
recording.
INPUT SELECT buttons
*
If you use the INPUT LEVEL knob to turn down the volume
of the input source during recording, the sound will be
recorded in the audio track at a low volume, so that noise will
be more apparent when you raise the volume of the audio track
for playback.If you want to lower the sound of the input source
that you are monitoring, lower the volume with the MASTER
fader. To change the volume of the music being played back,
use the TRACK fader for the respective tracks.
Use these buttons to select the input source (input jack) that
you wish to record. The indicator of the selected button will
light. You can mute (silence) the input sound by pressing a
button that is lit.
[GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]
For selecting either guitar or bass use of the GUITAR/BASS
jack, or the MIC 2 jack.
[TUNER]
[MIC]
Use this button to turn on and off the tuner (p. 188).
For selecting either the MIC1 jack, or the internal
microphone.
This allows you to tune your instrument connected to the
GUITAR/BASS jack.
*
You can turn on and off the internal microphone. (p. 34)
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
[FF]
2
The song will fast-forward while you hold down the button.
[EFFECTS]
[REPEAT]
84) or call up the screen for editing the various settings.
repeatedly (p. 51).
This button is used to make settings for the Mastering Tool
Kit.
until you are satisfied or use the phrase trainer (p. 192) to try
to copy a difficult phrase recorded from a CD or the like.
3
REC/PLAY section
[STOP]
AUTO PUNCH
Stops recording or playback of the song.
This button is used to make settings for the automatic punch
in/out function.
[PLAY]
Plays back songs. When [REC] is pressed and the REC
indicator is flashing, press [PLAY] to start recording. During
recording or playback, the indicator on the button lights in
green.
[ON/OFF]
This turns the auto punch-in/out function on/off. When this
is on, the button indicator will light.
[IN]
[REC (Recording)]
For setting the auto punch-in location. Press this button to set
the punch-in point. When set, the indicator on this button
will light. After the punch-in location is set, you can press
this button to automatically move to the punch-in location.
This is the Record button. In addition to the Recording
operation, it is also used for manual punch-in/out. While in
recording standby, the indicator on this button flashes in red,
and during recording, it lights in red.
*
Press this button while holding down [ON/OFF] to clear the
set punch-in location.
4
Track/Fader section
[OUT]
For setting the auto punch-out location. Press this button to
set the punch-out location at the current location in the track.
When set, the indicator on this button will light. After the
punch-out location is set, you can press this button to
automatically move to the punch-out location.
TRACK MIXER fader 1–6, 7/8
For controlling the volumes of each track during playback.
*
Hereafter, the TRACK MIXER faders shall be referred to as
the “TRACK faders.”
RHYTHM fader
*
Press this button while holding down [ON/OFF] to clear the
set punch-out location.
Adjusts the volume of the Rhythm.
[LOCATOR]
MASTER fader
Use this button to store any location that you desire. Then, by
pressing this button, you can automatically move to that
location.
Controls the overall volume of the BR-900CD.
[V-TRACK]
Use this button to call up the screen for selecting a V-Track.
When a location is set, the indicator on this button will light
and you will jump to the location each time this button is
pressed.
“What are V-Tracks?” (p. 14)
“Changing V-Tracks” (p. 49)
*
Press this button while holding down AUTO PUNCH [ON/
OFF] to clear the set location.
REC TRACK (Recording Track) buttons 1–6, 7/8
[ZERO]
Use these buttons to select to which track you will record.
The button of the track selected will flash in red and then
light in red when recording begins. When recording is
finished, the button of the selected track will light alternately
in orange and green.
Moves you to the time location 00:00:000.0.
[REW]
The song will rewind while you hold down the button.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
The relationship between the indicator and the track
conditions is given below.
[UNDO/REDO]
For undoing the last-performed recording or editing
operation and returning the data to its previous state. By
canceled recording or re-execute the editing operation (p. 57).
Off:
This track contains no recorded data.
Green:
[
EXIT/NO]
An audio track that contains recorded data.
Press this button to return to the previous screen or cancel
Flashing in red:
the last entry.
The track is selected as the recording destination, and is in
recording standby.
[
ENTER/YES]
Press this button to confirm a selection or a value being entered.
Red:
This track currently being recorded.
CURSOR buttons
Press these buttons to move the cursor within the screen.
Lighting alternately in orange and green:
This track contains recorded data and is selected for recording.
6
During creation of Rhythm patterns (p. 126), a rhythm
instrument is assigned to each button.
[CD-R/RW]
The BR-900CD uses this drive unit to read from, write to, and
play CD-R/RW discs.
[TAP (TEMPO)]
By tapping this button, you can set the tempo for the
Rhythm.
7
Rhythm section
[DELETE/MUTE]
Here you can make settings for the Rhythm function.
By holding down this button and pressing a REC TRACK
button whose indicator is lit in green and orange alternating
regardless of the position of its TRACK fader (p. 41).
When you repeat the same action, muting will be defeated.
While muted, the REC TRACK button of that track will flash
in green and orange alternating.
[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF]
Pressed to cycle the Rhythm function through the available
selections: Arrangement → Pattern → Off.
[EDIT]
This calls up the screen for programming arrangements and
patterns.
*
If a recording track was muted, muting will be defeated when
recording ends.
[RHYTHM PAD]
This button switches the TRACK button functions to Rhythm input.
During creation of Rhythm patterns (p. 126), you can delete
rhythm sounds you have input by holding down this button
and pressing the REC TRACK button.
“Section 4 Using the Rhythm” (p. 119)
8
5
[PHRASE TRAINER]
Use this button to perform the settings for the phrase trainer
TIME/VALUE dial
You can use this dial to shift the current position within a
song (e.g., fast forwarding and rewinding). It is also used to
change the values of the various function settings.
function.
When using the phrase trainer, you can turn on or off the
center cancel function (for removing vocals at the center), or
the time stretch function (for slowing down playback).
[UTILITY]
This button calls up various functions offered by your BR-
900CD, such as track editing, song management, and
memory card operations.
“Slowing Down the Speed (Time Stretch)” (p. 192)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
9
12
[PAN/EQ]
MIC (Internal microphone)
Pressed to access a screen where you can set the pan (left/
for the input sound (p. 42, p. 49).
This microphone can be used for recording with the BR-
900CD.
p. 110).
want to record” (p. 34)
“Turning on the internal microphone” (p. 34)
[
LOOP EFFECTS]
of each track respective to the loop effects (p. 43, p. 108),
switching between reverb and chorus, setting the various
parameters, and more.
Headphones jack (
)
Headphones (sold separately) are connected here. When
headphones are connected, the same output as that from
LINE OUT can be heard from the headphones.
*
The headphone volume is adjusted with the MASTER fader.
“Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ” (p. 108)
“Loop Effect Parameter Functions” (p. 111)
13
MEMORY CARD slot
[PITCH CORRECTION]
fig.00-202
Use this button to turn on and off the Pitch Correction. This
function adjusts the pitch of recorded vocals.
Eject button
“Using the Pitch Correction” (p. 114)
10
This slot is where memory cards (CompactFlash) are inserted
when you want to save data. You cannot record unless you
have a memory card inserted here.
[REC MODE (Recording Mode)]
This button is used for selecting the recording mode.
Eject button
Basic recording (p. 39, p. 48)
Press this button to eject the memory card.
“Mastering” (p. 102)
11
MEMORY CARD indicator
This indicator will light up whenever data is being read from
or written to a memory card.
Never turn off the power while the indicator is lit. This may
corrupt the data on the memory card, possibly rendering the
card unusable.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
CD-R/RW drive
1
2
3
4
Before you use the CD-R/RW drive, it is important that you first of all read “Before Using CD-R/RW Discs” (p. 6).
1. Disc tray
Place the CD-R/RW discs on this tray.
If excessive force is used to extract a disc, you risk causing
damage to the drive.
2. Access indicator
This indicator will light up whenever data is being read from
or written to a CD-R/RW disc.
4. Emergency eject hole
This hole is used when the disc tray must be opened in an
emergency.
3. EJECT button
It must not, therefore, be used on a regular basis and should
ejected in any other way (p. 7).
Press this button to eject a CD-R/RW disc from the drive
unit. Note that it will only be possible to eject the CD-R/RW
disc while the BR-900CD is powered up.
Display
fig.00-203d
4. FRAME
Displays the frame number of the current position of the
song.
1
2
At the factory settings, one second is set to 30 frames (non-
drop). This is one type of a specification known as MTC
(MIDI Time Code), and when you use the BR-900CD to play
in synchronization with another MIDI device, you will need
to set both devices to the same MTC type.
3
4
6
5
Displays the menu screen, parameter setting screen, or other
information, depending on the type of settings being made.
“Synchronizing Playback with a MIDI Sequencer” (p. 158)
Contrast” (p. 186).
5. REC MODE
The recording mode is indicated here.
1. MEAS (MEASURE)
6. Level Meter
Displays the current position within the song. Indicated from
left to right are the measure, beat, and clock.
During play mode, the volume levels of instruments being
input, and volume levels of each track are displayed.
2. TEMPO
The levels displayed are the levels after the adjustments are
made with the INPUT LEVEL knob and TRACK fader (i.e.,
post fader). You can select the level meter to display each
type of level being set.
The Rhythm tempo is indicated here.
3. TIME
Displays the time of the current position of the song (hours-
minutes-seconds).
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Rear Panel
fig.00-204
9
8
7 6
5 4
3
2
1
13
12
11 10
14
1. GUITAR/BASS jack
8. FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL jack
High-impedance input jack to directly connect your guitar or
bass.
This is an input jack for connecting a separately sold foot
switch (BOSS FS-5U, Roland DP-2) or expression pedal
(BOSS Roland EV-5, BOSS FV-300L).
2. MIC2 jack (XLR types)
By using this FOOT SW jack, you can start/stop playback,
punch in/out, and more.
These jack allows a mic to be connected. XLR jack is
provided.
When an expression pedal is used, you can control the depth
of insert effects with your foot.
microphone connected to this connector (p. 191).
*
If the connection has been made to the GUITAR/BASS and the
MIC2 jacks, the GUITAR/BASS jack is given priority.
“Using a Foot Switch or Expression Pedal” (p. 187)
9. MIDI OUT connector
3. MIC1 jacks (TRS/XLR types)
Connector for sending MIDI data.Connect it to the MIDI IN
connector of an external MIDI device (rhythm machine or
sound module).
jacks (p. 26) and XLR jacks are provided.
microphone connected to this connector (p. 191).
10. POWER switch
This is the power switch. It turns the power of the BR-900CD
on/off.
*
If microphones are connected to both jacks, the TRS jack is
given priority.
11. DC IN (AC Adaptor) jack
4. LINE IN jacks
Connect the supplied AC adaptor (PSC-series) to this jack.
These are input jacks for analog audio signals.These jacks are
used to connect CD players and other audio devices and
keyboards, rhythm machines, and other external sound
modules.
You must use only the PSC-series AC adaptor. Use of any
other adaptor may cause overheating or malfunctions.
5. LINE OUT jacks
12. Cord Hook
These are output jacks for the analog audio signal. You can
connect tape recorders, or other recording devices to record
the output analog signal from the BR-900CD.
Wrap the cable around this hook so that the AC adaptor
cable is not pulled out accidentally.
*
If the AC adaptor is disconnected during operation, your
important recorded data may be lost.
6. DIGITAL OUT connector
Optical connector for outputting digital audio signals. The
same sound that is output from LINE OUT is also output
from DIGITAL OUT. You can connect a DAT recorder or CD
recorder to this connector and make digital recordings of the
BR-900CD’s output.
13. Security Slot (
)
http://www.kensington.com/
7. USB connector
This is the connector for connecting your computer to the BR-
900CD with a USB cable.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Descriptions
Inserting Batteries
1. Make sure that the power of the BR-900CD is turned
Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup,
you may experience a discomforting sensation, or
perceive that the surface feels gritty to the touch when
you touch this device, microphones connected to it, or
the metal portions of other objects, such as guitars.
off.
2. Remove the battery cover on the rear panel.
*
When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of
newspapers or magazines, and place them under the four
corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and
controls. Also, you should try to orient the unit so no buttons
or controls get damaged.
This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge, which is
absolutely harmless. However, if you are concerned
about this, connect the ground terminal (rear panel: see
figure
14
) with an external ground. When the unit is
*
When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid
dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
grounded, a slight hum may occur, depending on the
particulars of your installation.
If you are unsure of the connection method, contact the
nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” sheet.
3. Being careful not to reverse the polarity (+/-), insert six
AA dry-cell batteries into the battery compartment.
*
*
BOSS recommends using longer-life alkaline batteries.
Unsuitable places for connection
Do not mix new batteries with partially used batteries, and do
not mix batteries of differing types.
• Water pipes (may result in shock or electrocution)
• Gas pipes (may result in fire or explosion)
*
Do not use rechargeable batteries.
• Telephone-line ground or lightning rod (may be
dangerous in the event of lightning)
4. Close the battery cover.
fig.00-205
When the battery power becomes low, “Battery Low!”
appears in the display. When this message appears, replace
the existing batteries with new ones as soon as possible.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Peripheral Devices
Make connections as shown in the diagram below. When making any connections, make sure that all devices are turned off.
fig.00-301
Mic
Electric Guitar
or
Electric Bass
CD Recorder etc.
Rhythm Machine etc.
AC Adaptor
(PSC-series)
CD Player etc.
Foot Switch
(FS-5U etc.)
Audio Set etc.
Expression Pedal
(Roland EV-5 etc.)
Keyboard etc.
●
Feedback could be produced depending on the location
of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the
power on all devices before making any connections.
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from
speakers.
●
To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your
unit (should the plug be pulled out accidentally), and to
avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack,
anchor the power cord using the cord hook, as shown in
the illustration.
3. Lower the volume.
*
Two types of MIC inputs are included, TRS phone type jacks
compatible with balanced input, and XLR type connectors.
The pin assignment for the MIC jack is as shown below. Before
making any connections, make sure that this pin assignment is
compatible with that of all your other devices.
fig.00-302
fig.00-303
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Peripheral Devices
*
When using the FS-5U foot switch (sold separately), set the
polarity switch as shown below. If the polarity switch is not set
correctly, the foot switch may not operate properly.
fig.00-304
Polarity Switch
*
*
You can also use an FS-6 (optional) for the foot switch. If
using an FS-6, connect to only one of the FS-6's jacks, either
the A or B jack. Additionally, set the polarity switch to “FS-
5U.” The A&B jack cannot be used.
If using an expression pedal (EV-5 or FV-300L), set the MIN
volume level to “0.”
Inserting a Memory Card
Insert the memory card (CompactFlash) with the gold-
colored contacts facing downward (the side without contacts
should be facing upward).
*
Carefully insert the memory card all the way in-until it is
firmly in place.
*
Do not touch the contacts of the memory card or allow them to
become dirty.
fig.00-305
Before inserting the memory card, be sure to first turn off the
BR-900CD. If a memory card is inserted when the power is
turned on, the data in the memory card may be destroyed, or
the memory card may become unusable.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On / Off the BR-900CD
Turning On the Power
Turning Off the Power
Once the connections have been completed, turn on power to
your various devices in the order specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction
and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
1. Make sure that playback of the song is stopped.
Always make sure that the recorder is stopped before
turning off the power to the BR-900CD. Turning off the
power while recording or playback is in progress may result
in the deletion of (song) data, mixer settings, and/or effect
patch data.
1. Before you turn the power on, make sure of the
following points.
❒
❒
Are all external devices connected properly?
Is the volume on the BR-900CD and all other devices
completely lowered?
2. Turn off the power to each device in the reverse order
used for powering up.
❒
Is the memory card inserted?
3. Turn the BR-900CD’s POWER switch off.
*
The BR-900CD is shipped with a memory card already
inserted in the slot.
Play Screen
The Play screen is the most fundamental screen of the
2. Lower the MASTER fader on the BR-900CD.
fig.00-306
BR-900CD, and is the first screen that appears when the
BR-900CD is turned on (see below).
fig.00-308d
3. Turn on the devices connected to the input jacks (i.e.,
GUITAR/BASS, MIC 1, MIC 2, or LINE IN).
4. Turn on the POWER switch located on the rear panel.
fig.00-307
*
*
Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before
switching on power. Even with the volume all the way down,
you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on,
but this is normal, and does not indicate a malfunction.
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval
(a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will
operate normally.
5. Turn on the device connected to the output jack (i.e.,
LINE OUT or DIGITAL OUT).
If you are using the AC adaptor, make sure that the AC
adaptor does not become unplugged during operation. If the
AC adaptor becomes unplugged accidentally, the recorded
data may become damaged.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to a Demo Song
■
If you have changed the recording or editing
Selecting a song (Song Select)
Upon power-up, the song that was selected before the power
was turned off is selected, and the data of that song is loaded.
As soon as the data has been loaded, the Play screen appears
in the display.
Since the BR-900CD automatically updates the recorded data
and operation content if the recording or editing have been
changed, you do not need to perform any special operations
for saving.
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper
line of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
To listen to a demo song, follow the procedure given below.
fig.00-312
1
*
If you try to record or edit data using a protected demo song,
“Protected!” appears.
3
Playing back a song
1. Move the TRACK faders 1–6, 7/8 and the RHYTHM
2,4
2
fader to the positions shown in the figure below, and
lower the MASTER fader.
fig.00-315
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SEL,”
and press [ENTER].
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.00-313d
2. Press [PLAY].
fig.00-316
The song starts. Slowly increase the MASTER fader and
adjust the volume to the desired level.
Use of the demo song supplied with this product for any
purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law.
Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a
secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the
copyright holder.
3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “01: SOLOBANG.”
Title
Composer
Copyright
Copyright © 2005
BOSS Corporation
SOLOBANG!
Yutaka Nakano
By adjusting the TRACK faders, you can listen to the
individual sounds recorded to each track one at a time or
listen to them at the balance you desire.
4. Press [ENTER].
Press [FF] to fast-forward the song and press [REW] to
rewind the song. Press [ZERO] to move to the time
location 00:00:00-00.0.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to a Demo Song
In addition to the procedures given above, you can also
change your current position in the song using the
procedures given below.
Moving through a song using hours,
minutes, seconds, frames, or sub
frames
Press [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to hours, minutes,
seconds, frames, or sub-frames display, and turn the TIME/
VALUE dial to change the current time in the song.
Changing the current position
Elapsed time display
The value given at “TIME” in the display shows the elapsed
time into the song using MTC (MIDI time codes) and is
expressed as follows: hours-minutes-seconds-frames-sub
frames.
Moving through a song in measures or
beats
The current position’s measure– beat–clock are displayed at
the location “MEAS” (measure) in the display.
The time code specifications can differ depending on the
device. To synchronize operation with another device using
MTC, you will first need to match the time code
*
For the demo songs, a Arrangement (p. 37, p. 120) has already
been created and it is set so that measure, beat, clock, and song
is properly synchronized.
second is set to 30 frames (non-drop) (p. 158).
Press [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “measure” or “beat”
display, and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
current measure or beat in the song.
Moving to the start of a play
To move to the time where the first sound of a song is
*
You cannot move the cursor to Clock (cannot be altered).
recorded, press and hold [STOP] and press [REW].
Each V-Track of the selected track is checked and you move
to the time of the first recorded sound for the song.
Press [ZERO] to move to the time location 00:00:00-00.0.
Moving to the end of a play
To move to the time where the last sound of a song is
recorded, press and hold [STOP] and press [FF].
Each V-Track of the selected track is checked and you move
to the time of the last recorded sound for the song.
fig.00-317
TIME
00:00:00-00.0
23:59:59-29.9
Section of the song recorded
[
] + [ ]
[
]
[
] + [ ]
STOP FF
ZERO
STOP REW
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
fig.00-401
(1) Preparing the Memory Card
The BR-900CD writes the recorded data directly to the
inserted memory card. Therefore, for recording or playback,
the memory card must be inserted.
1 4
2,3,4
2,3
“Memory Cards Supported by Your BR-900CD” (p. 16)
Inserting the memory card
Before inserting the memory card (CompactFlash), be sure to
first turn off the BR-900CD. If a memory card is inserted
when the power is turned on, the data in the memory card
1. Press [UTILITY].
may be destroyed, or the memory card may become
unusable.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “INI,”
1. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot.
and press [ENTER].
fig.00-402d
The supplied memory card still has some remaining
space; however, for extended recording, you will need to
erase some of the demo song or prepare a new memory
card (64 MB or greater is recommended).
*
The demo songs are protected.
To delete the demo songs, first remove the protections, then
carry out the deletion.
“Erasing Songs (Song Erase)” (p. 77)
(2) Turning On the Power
28).
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“CARD,” and press [ENTER].
“Are you sure?” appears.
fig.00-403d
Formatting the memory card
(Initialize)
*
This is not necessary for memory cards that have already been
used with the BR-900CD.
Newly purchased memory cards, or memory cards that have
been used previously with a computer will need to be
prepared so they can be used with the BR-900CD.
Carry out the following steps in the order given to complete
the procedure (this preparation process is called
“Initializing”).
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
4. To continue with the initializing, press [ENTER] (YES).
To cancel the operation, press [EXIT] (NO) (or
[UTILITY]).
(3) Selecting the Song to Record
When the memory card contains more than one song, the
song that was recorded last is automatically selected.
When [ENTER] (YES) is pressed, initializing begins.
To record a new song, follow the procedure given below.
When the initializing has been completed, “Completed!”
appears in the display.
Recording a new song (Song New)
About data types
When you record a new song, the BR-900CD allows you to
set the data type. This enables you to select the combination
of audio quality and recording time that is most suitable for
the material you are recording. The following data types can
be selected.
“Keep power on! Song creating...” then appears in the
display, and a new song is automatically created.
In this case, the data type selected is HiFi (MT2).
When creation of the song is finished, the play screen
returns to the display.
*
Depending on the capacity of the memory card, initializing
may take more than ten minutes to complete. This is not a
malfunction. The progress of the initializing is shown in the
display. Do not turn off the BR-900CD until the initializing
has been completed.
*
The data type of a song cannot be changed after it is created.
HiFi (MT2) (multitrack 2):
For high-quality recordings. This data type is recommended
when you will be doing a lot of track bouncing. Normally
you should select this type. Use this type for most of your
recordings.
Do not remove the memory card or turn off the BR-900CD
while the display shows “Keep power on!” Doing so can
destroy the data on the memory card and/or render the
memory card itself unusable.
STD (LV1) (live 1):
For recordings that will take longer than what can be
provided with the MT2 data type. This is the most suitable
setting for recording live performances.
LONG (LV2) (live 2):
Of the three data types, this provides the longest recording
time. This is convenient when the card has little recording
capacity.
Recording time
The recording times possible for each data type on one
memory card are given below (when recording one track).
Recording time (times approximate)
Data type
HiFi (MT2)
16 min.
32 min.
STD (LV1)
19 min.
39 min.
LONG (LV2)
24 min.
49 min.
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
65 min.
78 min.
98 min.
130 min.
260 min.
520 min.
156 min.
312 min.
624 min.
196 min.
392 min.
784 min.
*
The recording times shown above are approximate. Depending
on the number of songs, the allowable recording time may
decrease.
*
The recording times shown above are for when only one track
is used. For example, if you record on all eight tracks, the
recording time for each track will be 1/8th of the time shown
above.
*
The CompactFlash memory cards supported by your BR-
900CD are 32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash cards for use with a
3.3 V power supply voltage.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
fig.00-405
(4) Connecting Instruments
1
Choose which jack you will use
to connect your instrument
3
Your BR-900CD is equipped with a number of input jacks to
2,4,5
match the type of instrument that you will connect. Select an
instrument appropriate for your purposes.
fig.00-408
2
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “NEW,”
GUITAR/BASS:
and press [ENTER].
An electric guitar or bass can be connected to this jack. Since
this is a high-impedance input, a guitar or bass can be
connected directly.
“Type” appears in the display.
fig.00-406d
MIC1:
These jacks allow a mic to be connected. Both standard TRS
and XLR jacks are provided.
The standard TRS type allows for both balanced and
unbalanced connections.
*
*
If both jacks are being used, the TRS jack is given priority.
If you are recording an electric acoustic guitar using a shielded
connection, use the GUITAR/BASS jack.
191).
MIC2:
3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired data
This jack allows a mic to be connected. XLR jack is provided.
type.
*
If the connection has been made to the GUITAR/BASS and the
MIC2 jacks, the GUITAR/BASS jack is given priority.
*
The BR-900CD uses a sample rate of 44.1 kHz. It is not
possible to change the sample rate.
191).
4. Press [ENTER].
“Are you sure?” appears.
fig.00-407d
LINE:
When connecting to the output of a CD player, cassette
player, or other audio device, or to a rhythm machine,
external sound module, keyboard, or other sound source, use
the stereo input jacks.
5. Press [ENTER].
When the new song is ready, you are returned to the
Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
Press the INPUT SELECT button of the
instrument that you want to record
Turning on the internal microphone
fig.00-410
1–3
2
Select the input source to record. The indicator of the selected
button will light.
fig.00-409
[GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]
Select to record the instrument connected to the GUITAR/
BASS jack or MIC 2 jack.
[MIC]
1. In the Play screen, press the [MIC] INPUT SELECT
Select to record the signal from a microphone connected to
button.
the MIC1 jack or from the internal microphone.
The Mic Select screen appears while [MIC] is held down.
fig.00-411d
When the MIC indicator for the INPUT SELECT button is lit,
you can use both the microphone connected to the MIC1 jack
and the internal microphone simultaneously.
*
Your BR-900CD is shipped with its internal microphone
turned off. When not using the internal microphone, be sure to
turn it on (see next section).
[LINE]
2. While still holding down [MIC], use the TIME/VALUE
Select this when you wish to record the sound of an
dial to select “ONBRD+EXT.”
instrument or CD player connected to the LINE jacks.
ONBRD+EXT:
[SIMUL]
The built-in mic is switched on, and the input is a mix of
the sounds from the internal mic and the external mic
connected to MIC 1.
To record the vocal and guitar at the same time, press
[GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] and [MIC] simultaneously. Both
indicators light, telling you that simultaneous recording is
now possible.
EXTERNAL:
The built-in mic is switched off, and the input consists
only of the sounds from the external mic connected to
MIC 1.
You can select the source even when you have two mics
connected simultaneously to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 inputs.
When two recording tracks are selected, the GUITAR/BASS/
MIC2 is recorded to Track 1, 3, 5, 7, and the MIC1 is recorded
to Track 2, 4, 6, 8.
3. Release [MIC].
The internal mic is switched on.
When one recording track is selected, the GUITAR/BASS/
MIC2 and MIC1 are mixed and then recorded.
*
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
Parameter List” (p. 198).
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
Adjusting the input sensitivity
When input from GUITAR/BASS/MIC2 or MIC1 is selected,
(5) Using Insert Effects
The BR-900CD comes with five onboard effects processors:
an insert effect, loop effects, track EQ, pitch correction and
mastering tool kit. Below is an explanation of the operations
related to the insert effects.
adjust their input sensitivity with the relevant SENS knob.
fig.00-412a
What is an insert effect?
An effect added directly to a specific signal (with the BR-
900CD, this refers to the instrumental sounds from an INPUT
jack) is called an “insert effect.” The effect pedals that a
guitarist connects between his guitar and amp are a type of
insert effect. Loop effects, on the other hand, are effects
devices. (refer to p. 43)
In order to record at a good sound level, you should adjust the
input levels so that the PEAK indicator lights momentarily
when a guitar is strummed strongly or vocals are sung loudly.
Adjusting the input level
Adjust the volume of the input source for recording.
1. Lower the MASTER fader.
Switch effect patches
The BR-900CD provides numerous effects for vocals, guitar,
etc., and two or more of these effects can be used
simultaneously. Such a combination of effects (i.e., the types
of the effects used and the order in which they are connected)
is called an “algorithm.”
2. Turn the INPUT LEVEL knob to its center position and
then slowly increase the MASTER fader.
ig.00-421b
Each effect in an algorithm offers a certain number of parameters,
which allow the sound to be altered (similar to tweaking the knobs
on a stomp pedal). The algorithm and its parameter settings are
bundled into units called “effect patches.”
At this time, use the INPUT LEVEL knob to adjust the
input level so that the level changes in the -12 (between
-24 and -6)–0 dB range of the “IN” level meter.
By changing the effect patch, you can simultaneously change
the stored effect combinations, their on/off status, and the
parameter settings, and completely change the sound.
The volume level is adjusted with the MASTER fader
and INPUT LEVEL knobs.
Level meter display
1. Press [EFFECTS] to display the currently selected effect
This shows the volume levels for each track.
patch.
fig.00-413d
fig.00-414d
P: Preset / S: Song / U: User
Algorithm
Bank
Number Patch Name
Name
IN:
The level meter shows the input from INPUT.
Your BR-900CD allows you to automatically select the
most suitable “banks” by pressing an INPUT SELECT
button.
1–8:
The level meter shows the output of Tracks 1–8.
RHYTHM:
The level meter shows the output of Rhythm.
For example, pressing the [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]
INPUT SELECT button changes you to a guitar bank
patch, and pressing [LINE] changes you to a line bank
patch.
LR:
The Level meter shows the post-MASTER fader output level.
When monitoring the sound with headphones, use the
MASTER fader to adjust the volume to the level you desire.
Banks are a collection of effect patches.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
GTR:
Effect patches for use with guitars.
Some effect patches are particularly effective for stereo
recording.
MIC:
track” (p. 39).
Effect patches for use on the sound from the MIC input
(i.e., vocals).
LIN (LINE):
“Algorithm List” (p. 88)
Effect patches for use on the sound from CDs, MDs, and
other external devices from the LINE input.
SML (SIMUL):
Recording without insert effects
Press [EFFECTS] repeatedly to turn off the insert effects.
The indicator goes out, and the sound will be recorded
without insert effects.
Effect patches for recording vocals and a guitar together.
“Effect Patches and Banks” (p. 84)
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to align the cursor up with
the effect patch, and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the effect patch.
Selecting “INPUT <REC DRY>” as the point to which the
insert effects are connected allows you to record the sounds
without the insert effects while listening to the sounds with
the insert effects applied.
Preset patches (P)
The preset patches contain preset data. Their settings can
be changed, but you cannot create a new preset patch.
Mode” (p. 87)
User patches (U)
User patches can be rewritten, and are stored in internal
memory. If you have created a patch that you would like
to use for other songs as well, it is convenient to store it
as a user patch.
Song patches (S)
Like user patches, song patches can be written; however,
the data for song patches are stored along with the song
data to the memory card. This is convenient when you
have created a patch for a specific recorded performance,
and would like to store that patch together with the
song.
fig.00-415
Memory Card
BR-900CD
Song
Preset
Patch
User
Patch
Song
Patch
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to align the cursor up with
the patch number, and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the patch number.
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
“Using the Insert Effects” (p. 84).
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
Playing the Rhythm
Each time you press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] of the
Rhythm, the status changes as shown below.
fig.00-417
(6) Using the Rhythm
What is the Rhythm?
When you record, it is convenient to use the built-in Rhythm.
The “Rhythm” is a dedicated Rhythm track that can not only
play back Rhythm sounds as a guide during recording, you
can also use it to play internal Rhythm patterns and original
user-created Rhythm patterns and to play and record these
patterns as your own Rhythm part performances.
ARRANGE: Lit (Arrangement Mode)
When you press [PLAY] to start playback or recording the
Rhythm arrangement. When [STOP] is pressed, the Rhythm
arrangement stops as well.
By using the Rhythm during recording, you can use the track
editor to edit in units of measures, synchronize outputs with
MIDI Sequencer” (p. 158).
PATTERN: Flashing (Pattern Mode)
When you press [PLAY] to start playback or recording the
Rhythm pattern. When [STOP] is pressed, the Rhythm
pattern stops as well.
(p. 119).
No sound plays if “BREAK” is selected for the pattern (p. 207).
OFF: Unlit
The Rhythm is turned off.
The Rhythm features two modes, “Pattern mode” and
“Arrangement mode.”
*
When you adjust the volume of the Rhythm, use the Rhythm fader.
Pattern Mode
fig.00-418a
You can perform patterns and create your own original
patterns.
Arrangement Mode
You can perform arrangements and create your own original
arrangements.
Patterns and arrangements are composed as shown below.
Changing arrangements
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator lights up.
fig.00-418
Pattern
These are drum performance phrases from one to several
measures in length.
Internal patterns (preset patterns) include prepared patterns
for intros, verses, fill-ins, and endings.
Arrangement
Patterns arranged in the order they are performed (for
example, intro, verse, fill-in, and ending) and played at the
2. Select an arrangement.
selected tempo comprise a song.
fig.00-416
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
fig.00-419d
Intro
Verse
Fill
Verse Ending
P: Preset / S: Song
Number
Arrangement Name
The Rhythm is preset with a wide variety of arrangements,
including the sound of a normal metronome. For more
“Arrangement / Pattern List” (p. 206).
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
Preset Arrangements (P)
Changing the tempo of the
arrangements or patterns
You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or
pattern being played by carrying out the following
procedure while the Play screen is displayed.
The preset arrangements contain preset data.
Their settings cannot be changed, and you cannot create
a new preset arrangement.
Song Arrangements (S)
Song arrangements can be written; however, the data for
song arrangements are stored along with the song data
to the memory card.
*
The arrangement’s tempo setting is temporarily disabled.
1. Use [CURSOR] and align the cursor up with “TEMPO”
fig.00-420
in the display.
Memory Card
BR-900CD
2. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the tempo.
Song
Preset
Arrangement
fig.00-421d
Song
Arrngement
Tempo
3. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
Changing patterns
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.00-420a
*
*
of the arrangements or patterns” (p. 122).
Tempos cannot be saved to patterns.
2. Select a pattern.
Tapping to change the tempo of
the arrangements or patterns
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
fig.00-420bd
You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or
pattern by the timing with which you press [TAP].
P: Preset / S: Song
Number
Pattern Name
Tap on [TAP] four or more times to change the tempo of the
arrangement or pattern. The tempo becomes that in which
you tapped.
*
The arrangement’s tempo setting is temporarily disabled.
fig.00-422
Preset Patterns (P)
The preset patterns contain preset data.
Their settings cannot be changed, and you cannot create
a new preset pattern.
*
*
of the arrangements or patterns” (p. 122).
Song Patterns (S)
Song patterns can be written; however, the data for song
patterns are stored along with the song data to the
memory card.
Tempos cannot be saved to patterns.
fig.00-420c
Memory Card
BR-900CD
Song
Preset
Pattern
Song
Pattern
3. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
fig.00-425
(7) Basic Recording
(Recording in Mono)
Selecting the recording track
1. Press either [1]–[7/8] at REC TRACK to select the
recording track.
If the button flashes in red, that track is ready for
(Recording in Stereo)
recording.
fig.00-423
If INPUT SELECT [LINE] or [SIMUL] are lit
The status of each track can be determined from the
indicator on the button.
fig.00-426
Off:
Green: Recorded data exists on the track.
Red: The track is selected for recording.
No recorded data exists on the track.
or
If a track with existing data is selected for recording, the
indicator will light alternately in orange and green.
Since the input is stereo, the recording is normally performed
on two tracks. Press either REC TRACK [1] or [2] to select
tracks 1 and 2, or [3] or [4] to select tracks 3 and 4.
If INPUT SELECT [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]
or [MIC] are lit
However, if you want to mix together the left and right
channels being input onto one track, with tracks 1 and 2
selected, press REC TRACK [1] again to select track 1. Using
the same procedure, you can select any track 1 to 6 to be the
track to which to record.
fig.00-424
or
In addition, Tracks 7/8 are stereo tracks, so they always
produce stereo recordings.
Since the input is mono, the recording is normally performed
as a mono recording onto one track. Press one of TRACK [1]–
[6] at REC TRACK to select the one track to which to record.
About the recording (REC) modes
Recording on the BR-900CD is separated into three main
However, if you want to record in stereo to increase the effect
of insert effects, you can simultaneously press the [1] and [2],
[3] and [4] or [5] and [6], REC TRACK buttons for stereo
recording onto two tracks.
modes.
Use whichever mode is suitable in the course of bringing
your song to completion.
fig.00-427
In addition, Tracks 7/8 are stereo tracks, so they always
produce stereo recordings.
MASTERING
INPUT
BOUNCE
Guitar
Bass
L
L
1
2
1
2
1
2
R
R
3
.
Vocal
Mixing down
to two tracks
Finishing the song
with levels optimized
.
.
Keyboard
8
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
INPUT:
Only the instrument sounds or other input sources are
recorded to the tracks. Sounds played back from other tracks
are not recorded.
Procedure
fig.00-428a
1
BOUNCE:
As the sounds on different tracks are played back, they are
recorded together onto another track. In Bounce mode, you
can play back eight tracks simultaneously and record them
all to a single, separate V-Track.
When the input source is selected with INPUT SELECT, you
can also include those sounds in the recording.
You can further include the sounds from the Rhythm in the
recording as well.
4 3 2
destination (p. 59).
1. Press [REC MODE] repeatedly until “INPUT” is
indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.
fig.00-428d
MASTERING:
Here, you apply the “Mastering Tool Kit” to the two tracks to
which other tracks have been bounced to finish up with a
song with levels (volume) optimized.
*
The Rhythm cannot be used in this mode.
What is a Mastering Tool Kit?
When creating an audio CD from your recorded songs, or
recording to an MD or similar media, the overall volume
needs to be restrained, so that even the loudest portions of the
songs are handled appropriately on the CD or MD. However,
this often results in an overall lowering of the volume,
resulting in a CD or MD that lacks excitement and impact.
2. Press [REC].
[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the
recording standby state.
fig.00-429
Flash
Moreover, in the low-frequency range, to which the human
ear is not very sensitive, the sound actually produced might
be perceived as being somewhat low in volume, even though
the meter shows that it’s at the maximum level. This also
makes it difficult to create powerful sounds.
3. Press [PLAY].
The [REC] and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red
and instead light solidly, and recording starts.
With the “Mastering Tool Kit,” however, you can smooth out
the differences in volume that occur over the course of a
song, while also correcting the balance in the low end.
We recommend mastering with the Mastering Tool Kit in the
final stage of creating songs.
fig.00-430
Lit
4. When you finish recording, press [STOP].
The REC TRACK button lights alternately in orange and
green, indicating that track contains recorded data.
“Mastering” (p. 102)
“Mastering Tool Kit Patch List” (p. 205)
*
*
You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one
second.
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
(9) Overdubbing
(Recording an additional performance
while listening to an existing performance)
How the Tracks Are Organized
The tracks for which the REC TRACK button is lit in green
(or alternately in orange and green) are tracks that already
have data recorded on them.
The BR-900CD features eight audio tracks that can be
used for recording and playback. Tracks 1 through 6 are
independent mono tracks. Tracks 7 and 8 are linked as
stereo tracks.
The process of listening to a previously recorded
performance while you record additional material on
another track is called “overdubbing.” By recording the bass,
guitar, and vocals on different tracks, you can then adjust the
volumes of each instrument with respect to one another,
change the left-right sound balance, exchange data, and
Tracks 7 and 8 are fixed as left and right tracks,
respectively, while fader movements, Loop Effects, and
other processes are applied in common to both tracks.
destination (p. 58).
perform other operations.
fig.00-434a
during mastering (p. 102).
In addition to, and separate from the audio tracks, the
playback of the internal rhythms (p. 37).
(8) Playing Back Recorded Music
1. Press [ZERO] to move to the time location 00:00:00-00.0.
fig.00-431
5 4 3
1
2
1. Press one of REC TRACK [1]–[7/8] to select the track to
which to record.
2. Press [PLAY].
By selecting a different track to record from the track
that you previously recorded, you can record a new part
while listening to the previously recorded part.
Use the TRACK faders to adjust the volume separately
for each track.
The status of each track can be determined from the
indicator on the button.
Silencing the sound of specific
tracks (Track Mute)
During playback, hold down [DELETE/MUTE] and press a
REC TRACK button that is lit in green and orange alternating
or green.
Off:
Green: Recorded data exists on the track.
Red: The track is selected for recording.
No recorded data exists on the track.
If a track with existing data is selected for recording, the
indicator will light alternately in orange and green.
The REC TRACK button will change to blinking in orange or
green, and the sound of that track will be muted (silenced).
*
If you choose a track to record that already contains data
(where the REC TRACK button is lit in green), the indicator
lights alternately in orange and green, and the new music
overwrites the previously recorded data.
If you repeat the same operation, the button will return to its
previous lit state and the sound of that track will once again
be heard.
fig.00-433
2. Adjust the faders so the tracks being played back are at
a suitable level.
3. Press [REC].
[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the
recording standby state.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
4. Press [PLAY].
(10) Adjusting the Sound for
Each Track
You can adjust the tone, panning, and volume balance for
each track individually.
The [REC] and REC TRACK button indicators change
from flashing in red to being continually lit and
recording begins.
[PLAY] lights up.
Only what you are currently playing is recorded to the
new track. The music that is being played back is not
recorded.
Setting the positioning (pan) of the sound
1. Press [PAN/EQ].
fig.00-434b
*
If you use the INPUT LEVEL knob to turn down the volume
of the input source during recording, the sound will be
recorded in the audio track at a low volume, so that noise will
be more apparent when you raise the volume of the audio track
for playback.If you want to lower the sound of the input source
that you are monitoring, lower the volume with the MASTER
fader.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “PAN,”
and press [ENTER].
To change the volume of the music being played back, use the
TRACK fader for the respective tracks.
The Pan settings screen appears.
fig.00-434d
5. When you finish recording, press [STOP].
*
You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one
second.
Some tips for overdubbing
When you record new material while listening to a
recorded performance, your playing may tend to be
buried in the existing performances, making it difficult
for you to play. In this case, you can slightly lower the
faders of the playback tracks, or pan the playback tracks
to left (or right) and the sound you are playing to right
(or left) to make it easier to hear yourself.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and turn the TIME/VALUE
dial to change each track pan settings.
*
Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track
corresponding to the button pressed.
“Changing the Position of the Input Sound (Pan)” (p. 49)
*
Pressing [ENTER] sets this to “C00” (Center).
4. Press [EXIT] (or [PAN/EQ]) to return to the Play screen.
Tracks 7 and 8 are stereo tracks, and any pan settings that are
made apply to both of the tracks as a pair.
• When set to C00: Track 7 is panned left, and Track 8 is
panned right.
• When set to L50: Both Track 7 and Track 8 are panned
left.
• When set to R50: Both Track 7 and Track 8 are panned
right.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
Adjusting the tone (Track EQ)
“Track EQ” is an independent two-band equalizer featured
on each track that allows you to adjust the high- and low-
frequency tonal qualities separately.
Adding width to the sound (Loop Effect)
The BR-900CD features chorus, delay, and doubling (any one
of these three can be selected at any one time) as loop effects,
and includes reverb as well. Effective use of these allows you
to add greater breadth to the sound.
1. Press [PAN/EQ].
fig.00-435a
What is a loop effect?
Effects connected to the send and return of mixer effects are
called “loop effects.” You can adjust the depth of the effect by
changing the send level of each mixer channel (equivalent to
the tracks of the BR-900CD).
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EQ,”
Since the send levels for each track are separate, you can
change the depth individually. This allows you to, for
example, have a deep reverb on the vocals and slight reverb
on the drums, or any such combination.
and press [ENTER].
The EQ settings screen appears.
fig.00-435d
Opposed to insert effects (p. 35), which are applied to specific
sounds, loop effects are applied to the complete track.
*
You cannot use chorus, delay, and doubling simultaneously.
Any one may be selected while loop effects are in use.
1. Press [LOOP EFFECTS].
fig.00-437a
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “CHO/
DLY” or “REV,” and press [ENTER].
fig.00-437d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and turn the TIME/VALUE
dial to turn each Track EQ on or off.
*
Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track
corresponding to the button pressed.
4. When changing the EQ settings, press CURSOR [
]
repeatedly to display the parameter screen, then use the
[CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
setting’s value.
fig.00-436d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] until “FX Type” or “Type” is
displayed, then turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
loop effect.
Parameter Functions” (p. 112).
5. When you have finished making the settings, press
[EXIT] (or [PAN/EQ]) to return to the Play screen.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
When using CHO/DLY
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
Select from “CHORUS,” “DELAY,” or “DBLN” (doubling).
fig.00-438d
adjust each track’s send level.
*
Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track
corresponding to the button pressed.
The “send level” is the volume level of the signal sent
from each respective track to each effect, and you can
change the amount of effect applied by adjusting the
send level.
When using REV
The send level for each track is also indicated in the
lower row of the display.
Select from “HALL” or “ROOM.”
fig.00-439d
fig.00-443d
Send level of the each tracks
4. If you want to change the settings for the selected
effect, press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the parameter,
then change the setting’s value with the TIME/VALUE
7. After you have completed adjusting the send level,
press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen
dial.
fig.00-440d
You can switch screens in the following sequence, with the
screen cycling to the next screen each time [LOOP EFFECTS]
is pressed.
Loop Effects selection screen → Send Level screen →
Type screen → Play screen
Parameter Functions” (p. 111).
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to display the Send Level
settings screen.
When using CHO/DLY
fig.00-441d
When using REV
fig.00-442d
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording/Playing Back a Song
4. Press [PLAY].
(
11) Bouncing
The [REC] and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red
and instead light solidly, and recording starts.
(Putting multiple tracks together)
fig.00-444a
fig.00-447
Lit
1
2
2
5. When you finish recording, press [STOP].
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
To prepare for further recording after the bouncing has been
completed, the BR-900CD automatically switches to an
empty V-Track at the bounce destination.
5 4 3
1. Press [REC MODE] repeatedly until “BOUNCE” is
indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.
fig.00-444d
After bouncing down to two tracks, you can use the
“Mastering Tool Kit” to eliminate discrepancies in volume
end balance. Refer to “Mastering” (p. 102).
Recording Destination
(
12) Turning Off the Power
“Turning Off the Power” (p. 28).
■ :
❐ :
V-Tracks with recorded data.
V-Tracks without data.
Before you turn off the BR-900CD, make sure to first stop any
recording. If the BR-900CD is turned off during playback/
recording where the memory card is being accessed, the
recorded data, mixer settings, and effect patch data may be
lost.
“What are V-Tracks?” (p. 14)
2. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-track to which you want to record.
CD-R/RW Disc (Direct CD Bounce)” (p. 59).
(13) Removing the Memory Card
3. Press [REC].
The power of the BR-900CD must be turned off before
removing a memory card. If a memory card is inserted when
the power is turned on, the data in the memory card may be
destroyed, or the memory card may become unusable.
[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the
recording standby state.
fig.00-446
Flash
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
If INPUT SELECT [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]
Selecting the Recording Track
1. Press either [1]–[7/8] at REC TRACK to select the
or [MIC] are lit
fig.01-102
recording track.
If the button flashes in red, that track is ready for
recording.
fig.01-101
or
Since the input is mono, the recording is normally performed
as a mono recording onto one track. Press one of TRACK [1]–
[6] at REC TRACK to select the one track to which to record.
The status of each track can be determined from the
indicator on the button.
However, if you want to record in stereo to increase the effect
of insert effects, you can simultaneously press the [1] and [2],
[3] and [4], or [5] and [6], REC TRACK buttons for stereo
recording onto two tracks.
Off:
Green: Recorded data exists on track.
Red: The track is selected for recording.
No recorded data exists on the track.
If a track with existing data is selected for recording, the
indicator will light alternately in orange and green.
In addition, Tracks 7/8 are stereo tracks, so they always
produce stereo recordings.
fig.01-103
(Recording in Mono)
(Recording in Stereo)
If INPUT SELECT [LINE] or [SIMUL] are lit
fig.01-104
or
Since the input is stereo, the recording is normally performed
on two tracks. Press either REC TRACK [1] or [2] to select
tracks 1 and 2, or [3] or [4] to select tracks 3 and 4.
However, if you want to mix together the left and right
channels being input onto one track, with tracks 1 and 2
selected, press REC TRACK [1] again to select track 1. Using
the same procedure, you can select any track 1 to 6 to be the
track to which to record.
In addition, Tracks 7/8 are stereo tracks, so they always
produce stereo recordings.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Changing V-Tracks
The BR-900CD is a eight-track multitrack recorder, and each
track consists of eight V-Tracks. You can select any one of
these V-Tracks for recording or playback.
Changing the Position of the
Input Sound (Pan)
When you record new material while listening to a recorded
performance, your playing may tend to be buried in the
existing performances, making it difficult for you to play.
Therefore, by making use of the many V-Tracks, you can use
the BR-900CD just as if it were a 64-track multitrack recorder.
If this is the case, you can change the positioning (or
This allows a wide range of uses, such as recording one take
of a guitar solo or vocal, and then recording another take
without having to erase the first one. You can also then take
just the portions of the V-Tracks that you like and put them
together onto one track.
panning) of the INPUT (the instrument you are playing) and
record it so that it is not buried underneath the other sounds.
1. Press [PAN/EQ].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “PAN,”
and press [ENTER].
The PAN settings screen appears.
fig.01-107d
“Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)” (p. 67))
1. Press [V-TRACK].
fig.01-105
The V-Track Selection screen appears. This screen shows
the numbers of the selected V-Tracks for each track.
fig.01-106d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] to display “IN.”
fig.01-108d
■ :
❐ :
V-Tracks with recorded data.
V-Tracks without data.
2. Use the REC TRACK [1]–[7/8] to select the track to be
altered.
*
You can also select tracks with CURSOR [ ] [ ].
3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial and change the V-Track.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change the pan settings.
4. After you finish changing the V-Track,
press [V-TRACK] (or [EXIT]) to return to the Play
screen.
The pan settings made here are automatically applied to
the track that you are recording to, so that after
recording is complete, you can listen to the track with
the same pan as that when it was recorded.
5. Press [PAN/EQ] (or [EXIT]) to return to the Play screen.
Pan the playback tracks to left (or right) and the sound you
are playing to right (or left) to make it easier to hear yourself.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
*
The following operations cannot be used, or are disabled, while
the recorder is in use (during recording and playback).
Recording Operations
1. Press [REC MODE] repeatedly until “INPUT” is
• Recording patterns
indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.
fig.01-109d
• Editing arrangements
• Selecting drum kits
• Switching to the USB screen
• Switching to the Tone Load screen
• Switching to the Song Selection screen
• Switching to the Song New screen
• Switching to the Song Information screen
• Switching to the Edit Song screen
• Track Editing
2. Press [REC].
[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the
recording standby state.
• Switching to the Sync screen
• Switching to the Initialize screen
• Operating the CD-R/RW
fig.01-110
Flash
3. Press [PLAY].
The [REC] and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red
and instead light solidly, and recording starts.
fig.01-111
Lit
4. When you finish recording, press [STOP].
The REC TRACK button lights alternately in orange and
green, indicating that track contains recorded data.
*
*
You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one
second.
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeating Playback (Repeat)
By using the “Repeat function” you can repeatedly play back
mixing balance or perform loop recordings (p. 56) with the
punch in/out functions.
2. After registering the repeat start point (A), register the
repeat end point (B).
Move to the position where you want the repeat to end
and press [REPEAT].
fig.01-203
The position in the song where [REPEAT] is pressed first
becomes repeat start point (A), and the position where it is
pressed a second time becomes repeat end point (B). The
portion between the two points is then repeated during
playback.
fig.01-201
That position becomes repeat end point (B).
Repeat
The [REPEAT] indicator lights, telling you that the
repeat end point (B) has been registered.
To re-do the registration, press [REPEAT] once again.
Time
The [REPEAT] indicator goes out, and the registered
repeat start point (A) and end point (B) are deleted.
Repeat Start
(A)
Repeat End
(B)
Then press [REPEAT] again and register repeat start
point (A) and end point (B) as desired.
Press [REPEAT] again to cancel the repeat function and
delete the start and stop points.
*
*
There must be at least one second between repeat start point
(A) and repeat end point (B). It is not possible to set the end
point less than one second away from the start point.
Setting the Repeat Portion
1. Enter the repeat start point (A).
If you press [REPEAT] at a position before the repeat start
point (A), that earlier position is then set as the repeat start
point (A).
Move to the position where you want the repeat to start
and press [REPEAT].
fig.01-202
3. If you want to save the settings in the currently selected
song, hold down [STOP], and press [REC].
“Saving the Current Settings to the Song (Song Save)” (p. 79)
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
The position is set as repeat start point (A).
The [REPEAT] indicator begins to flash, telling you that
the repeat start point (A) has been registered.
If you wish to re-do the registration, you can cancel the
registered location by pressing [REPEAT] when the
current location is the same as the repeat start point (A).
If the current location is beyond the repeat start point
(A), press [REPEAT] twice to cancel the registration.
The [REPEAT] indicator goes out, and the registered
repeat start point (A) and end point (B) are deleted.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeating Playback (Repeat)
Setting the Repeat Portion
with Accurate Timing
Normally, the repeat start and end points are registered at
the exact position where [REPEAT] is pressed. This may
make it difficult for you to set the repeat portion exactly as
you desire.
When the repeat portion is set, you can use the following
functions to edit your recorded track data.
• Copying the repeat portion (p. 67)
• Moving the repeat portion (p. 70)
• Erasing the repeat portion (p. 73)
If this is the case, you can use the quantize function to have
the time [REPEAT] is pressed be adjusted to the timing of the
song.
Before using these functions, you can use the quantize
function to set the repeat portion with accurate timing.
The quantize function allows you to set the timing in one-
measure units.
Perform the procedure given below to use the quantize
function.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.01-204d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “AB Qtz,” and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to turn the setting on.
When off, the quantize function will not work.
fig.01-205d
4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
Changing the tempo after having made the quantize function
settings in a repeated portion will result in timing
discrepancies between the repeat start and end points and the
beginnings and ends of measures.
*
You can set the repeat portion to one measure by pressing
[REPEAT] twice at the same position.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re-recording Only a Mistake (Punch-in/out)
You may occasionally make a mistake while recording, or the
Manually punching in and out
using [REC]
performance may not turn out as you expect. In this case, you
can punch in/out to re-record only the portion that is
As an example of use, the explanation below assumes you
are manually punching in and out to re-record a portion of
track 1, which is a track to which you have already recorded.
mistaken.
Changing to recording during the playback of a song is
referred to as punching in, and changing from recording to
playback is referred to as punching out.
1. Press REC TRACK [1].
Therefore, punch in at the location where you want to begin
the re-recording, and punch out at the location where you
REC TRACK [1] lights alternately in orange and green.
2. Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below.
fig.01-302
want the re-recording to end.
fig.01-301
Playback
Recording
Playback
Time
]
Start
Punch-In
Punch-Out
Stop
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
STOP
PLAY
REC
REC
3. Start playback and adjust the volume of the input
With your BR-900CD, you can choose from manual or
automatic punching in/out.
source using the INPUT LEVEL knob.
Listen to the track you will be re-recording and the input
source and adjust the volume of the input source using
the INPUT LEVEL knob so that it is the same level as the
track.
*
You can use the Undo function (p. 57) to revert to the
condition before re-recording.
*
The data prior to punch-in/out will remain on the memory
card without being erased. If this data is no longer needed, in
function (p. 78) to delete unneeded data from the memory card.
4. Move to a position before where you want to start re-
recording and press [PLAY] to start playback.
5. Press [REC] to punch in at the location where you want
to start recording.
The BR-900CD starts recording.
Manually Punching In/Out
You can use the button on the BR-900CD or a foot switch to
punch in or out.
6. To punch out, press [REC] (or [PLAY]) again.
Each time you press [REC], you punch in and punch out,
so if there is another location that you want to redo, then
you can punch in again at that location using the same
procedure.
When you are playing an instrument and performing the
recording by yourself, it may be difficult to punch in or out
using the button on the BR-900CD. If this is the case, you can
use a separately sold foot-switch (BOSS FS-5U, Roland DP-2,
etc.) and use your feet to punch in and out.
7. Press [STOP] to stop recording.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
*
When using manual punch-in/out, you need to allow for an
interval of at least one second between the punch-in and
punch-out points.
8. Listen to the re-recorded results.
Return the song to a point earlier than you re-recorded,
and play it back.
Adjust the volume of track 1 using the TRACK fader.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re-recording Only a Mistake (Punch-in/out)
Manually punching in and out
using a foot switch
Auto Punching In and Out
Automatically punching in and out at predetermined
locations (or times) in the song is referred to as “auto
punching in/out.”
In operating the foot switch during playback of a song
(manual patch in and out), press the foot switch once to
punch in, then press it again to punch out.
When you want to punch in and out at accurate times or
when you want to concentrate on playing rather than
punching in and out manually, the auto punch in/out
function is very useful.
In order to use a foot switch
When you are using a foot switch (BOSS FS-5U, Roland DP-2,
etc.) to punch in and out, connect the foot switch to the
FOOT SW jack on the BR-900CD and change the function of
the FOOT SW jack by following the procedure given below.
Specifying the area for auto
punching in/out
Before you begin recording, you must register the locations
1. Press [UTILITY].
at which punch-in and punch-out will occur automatically.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.01-303d
1. Register the location where you want to punch in.
Move the location where you want to punch in and press
AUTO PUNCH [IN] to register that location for
automatic punch in.
At this time, the AUTO PUNCH [IN] indicator lights,
telling you that the punch-in position is registered.
fig.01-305
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and select “Foot SW.”
fig.01-304d
*
If the AUTO PUNCH [IN] indicator is lit, you will
automatically move to the registered punch-in time when this
button is pressed.
2. Register the location where you want to punch out.
Move the location where you want to punch out and
press AUTO PUNCH [OUT] to register that location for
automatic punch out.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial and select “PUNCH”
(PUNCH IN/OUT).
At this time, the AUTO PUNCH [OUT] indicator lights,
telling you that the punch-out position is registered.
fig.01-306
5. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
*
If the AUTO PUNCH [OUT] indicator is lit, you will
automatically move to the registered punch-out time when this
button is pressed.
press [LOCATOR] to move to the locator point (p. 64), and
press AUTO PUNCH [IN] or AUTO PUNCH [OUT].
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re-recording Only a Mistake (Punch-in/out)
6. Press [REC] to place the BR-900CD in recording
Erasing a registered auto punch
in/out location
standby and then press [PLAY].
Recording automatically starts at the auto punch-in
location, so start playing what you want to record.
■
To erase an auto punch-in location, press and hold
AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] and then press [IN].
At the point you specified for punch-out, the track will
automatically change back to play mode.
■
To erase an auto punch-out location, press and hold
AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] and then press [OUT].
7. Press [STOP] to stop recording.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
When the settings are erased, the AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF],
[IN], and [OUT] indicators go out.
*
If you want to save the auto punch in/out settings in the
currently selected song, hold down [STOP], and press [REC].
8. Listen to the re-recorded results.
Return the song to a point earlier than you re-recorded,
and play it back.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
Adjust the volume of track 1 using the TRACK fader.
How to record
As an example of use, the explanation below assumes you
are using the auto punch in/out to re-record a portion of
track 1, which is a track to which you have already recorded.
1. Press REC TRACK [1].
REC TRACK [1] lights alternately in orange and green.
2. Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below.
fig.01-307
3. Make sure that the AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] indicator
is dark.
If it is lit, press AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] to make the
indicator go dark.
4. Start playback and adjust the volume of the input
source using the INPUT LEVEL knob.
Listen to the track you will be re-recording and the input
source and adjust the volume of the input source using
the INPUT LEVEL knob so that it is the same level as the
track.
5. Move to a position before where you want to start re-
recording and press AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF].
The indicator lights up, showing that the auto punch in
and out have been set.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re-recording Only a Mistake (Punch-in/out)
How to record
As an example of use, the explanation below assumes you
are using the auto punch in/out to re-record a portion of
track 1, which is a track to which you have already recorded.
Repeatedly Recording Over the
Same Location (Loop Recording)
The repeat function (p. 51) allows you to play a certain
portion of a song (the loop portion) over and over again.
1. Press REC TRACK [1].
If you used auto punch in/out together with the repeat
function, the portion will be repeated so the result of the
recording can be heard right away.
REC TRACK [1] lights alternately in orange and green.
2. Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below.
fig.01-309
If the recording did not sound as you wished, simply press
[REC] and redo the recording.
Using the repeat function and auto punch in/out together in
this manner to repeatedly perform recording is known as
“loop recording.”
*
For details on how to set the portion where recording will
occur (the portion between the punch-in and punch-out
positions), refer to “Auto punching in and out” above.
3. Use the repeat function (p. 51) to repeat the playback of
the song and adjust the volume of the input source
using the INPUT LEVEL knob.
Listen to the track you will be re-recording and the input
source and adjust the volume of the input source so that
it is the same level as the track.
Setting the portion to be repeated
Before you begin recording, you will need to set the starting
and ending position of the portion to be repeated.
4. Press [STOP].
*
The portion to be repeated should contain the portion that you
wish to re-record (the portion between the punch-in and
punch-out points).
5. Press AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF].
The indicator lights, showing that the auto punch in and
out have been set.
fig.01-308
6. When you are ready to record, press [REC], then press
Repeat
[PLAY] to begin recording.
After you press [PLAY], you can record from the time
the first punch-in is reached until the time the punch-out
is reached. Re-record the portion as desired.
Playback
Recording
Playback
Time
When the song is repeated, you can check the result of
what you just recorded. If the recording is not
satisfactory, press [REC] and perform the recording
again.
Repeat Start Punch-In
(A)
Punch-Out Repeat End
(B)
If the portion to be re-recorded is not fully contained in the
repeat portion, the recording may not start or end as desired.
7. Press [STOP] to stop recording.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
8. Press [REPEAT] to make the button indicator go dark.
9. Press AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] to make the indicator
go dark.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canceling an Operation (Undo/Redo)
Occasionally when the recording you make may not turn out
Reversing the Last Operation
as you wish, or the settings you make for an editing
(Undo)
operation are incorrect, and you want to reverse what you
have done. At these times, you can use the “Undo function.”
1. Press [UNDO/REDO].
The Undo function reverses the action you have just
“UNDO?” appears.
fig.01-401d
performed and returns you to the status you were in
beforehand. To reverse an Undo, you must use the “Redo
function.”
For example, suppose you are punching in to loop record
and record over the same location twice. To undo the
recording you just performed and return to the first
recording, you would use the Undo function.
To then reverse the Undo and return to the condition that
2. To execute Undo, press [ENTER] (YES).
you were in immediately after the second recording, you
Press [ENTER] to reverse the last performed recording or
would use the Redo function.
editing operation.
*
*
After you have performed an Undo, you can only perform a
Redo (you cannot perform an Undo again).
If you decide not to Undo, press [EXIT] (NO).
If you record something, or carry out Track Edit after
performing an Undo, it will no longer be possible to perform a
Redo.
Canceling the Undo (Redo)
To reverse the Undo you just executed, perform a Redo.
*
*
Undos only affect audio data recorded to the tracks. You
cannot undo changes made to parameter settings, or data other
than audio data.
1. Press [UNDO/REDO].
“REDO?” appears.
fig.01-402d
Keep in mind that the history of all operations you’ve carried
you carry out a Song Optimize (p. 78). This means that once
you execute Song Optimize, you’ll no longer be able to perform
an undo.
2. To execute Redo, press [ENTER] (YES).
The Undo you just performed is reversed.
If you decide not to Redo, press [EXIT] (NO).
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Putting Multiple Tracks Together (Bounce)
Although the BR-900CD allows the simultaneous playback of
eight tracks, when you run out of tracks, the BR-900CD also
lets you copy the recordings of multiple tracks together onto
one track (V-Track). This is called “bounce” (also known as
bounce recording or ping-pong recording). By combining
multiple tracks in this way, you can free up other tracks in
order to record additional performances.
The explanation below uses an example of mixing the
monaural recording on tracks 1 and 2 and the stereo
recording on tracks 3 and 4, and bouncing them to V-Track 2
of tracks 3 and 4.
1. Set the pan for tracks 1 and 2 to the locations you
desire, set the pan for track 3 all the way to the left
(L50), and the pan for track 4 all the way to the right
(R50).
“Setting the positioning (pan) of the sound” (p. 42)
In bounce mode, you can play back eight tracks
simultaneously and record them all to a single, separate
V-Track.
2. Play back the song and adjust the volumes for the
tracks 1 to 4 using the REC TRACK faders.
When input sources are selected with INPUT SELECT,
you can have those sounds recorded together.
The overall volume is adjusted by the MASTER fader. At
this time, raise the volume as high as possible without
allowing the sound to distort.
Furthermore, you can include the sounds from the
Rhythm in the recording.
fig.01-601
Lower the faders for the tracks that you do not want to
mix.
TRACK 8-V1
TRACK 7-V1
TRACK 6-V1
TRACK 5-V1
TRACK 4-V1
TRACK 3-V1
TRACK 2-V1
*
According to the Mode” (p. 87).
TRACK 1-V1
RHYTHM
Rhythm
3. Press [STOP].
INPUT
Track 1–8
4. Press [REC MODE] repeatedly until “BOUNCE” is
indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The INPUT SELECT indicator goes out, and the input
source is automatically muted. This prevents the input
source from being mixed in and recorded during bounce
recording.
TRACK 8-V2
TRACK 7-V2
Separate V-Track
*
If you wish to mix an input source as part of the bounce
source. At this time, you can apply loop effects (p. 108) to the
sound of the input source.
5. If you want to mix in the sound of the Rhythm as well,
increase the Rhythm fader.
If you do not want to record the Rhythm, lower the
fader.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Putting Multiple Tracks Together (Bounce)
6. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
Bouncing Directly to a CD-R/RW Disc
(Direct CD Bounce)
With the BR-900CD, you can bounce data directly to a CD-R/
RW disc instead of the audio tracks. This is a convenient way
to keep a copy of song sketches after recording them.
select the recording-destination track/V-Track.
Here, set this to “34V2” (V-Track 2 of Tracks 3 and 4).
fig.01-602d
Recording destination
• The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used
when tracks are bounced directly to a CD. Only the
audio tracks are bounced.
■ :
❐ :
V-Tracks with recorded data.
V-Tracks without data.
• Due to differences in the characteristics of CD-R/RW
discs, there is no way to ensure 100% error-free writing.
For this reason, the bouncing may be discontinued if an
error occurs in writing to the CD-R/RW disc. Never use
this feature with your important recordings.
(When bouncing while recording in mono)
If you turn the TIME/VALUE dial at this time, the
screen for specifying the track for mono recording is
displayed.
1. Prepare a blank CD-R/RW disc or a CD-R/RW disc to
is not yet finalized (p. 143).
fig.01-603d
2. Place the CD-R/RW disc in the tray.
The CD-R/RW drive‘s indicator begins flashing.
Wait until the indicator stops flashing.
3. Press [REC MODE] a number of times until the
7. After pressing [ZERO] to return to the time location
00:00:00-00.0, press [REC] and then press [PLAY] to start
bounce recording.
BOUNCE indicator lights.
The BR-900CD is switched to BOUNCE mode.
fig.01-604d
8. When you are finished recording, press [STOP].
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
9. Lower all TRACK faders except those for Tracks 3 and
4, press [PLAY], and then check the sounds bounced to
Tracks 3 and 4.
4. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select “CD.”
fig.01-605d
*
The pan for tracks 3 and 4, where the music was bounced, is
set all the way to the left and right respectively.
10.If you want to save the settings in the currently selected
song, hold down [STOP], and press [REC].
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
*
If you wish to mix an input source as part of the bounce
Recording to a CD-R/RW” (p. 60).
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Putting Multiple Tracks Together (Bounce)
5. Press [REC].
Selecting the Input Source
and Bouncing the Recording
to a CD-R/RW
You can simultaneously select the input source sounds and
record when bouncing directly to a CD, just as you can when
bouncing tracks in the normal manner.
The CD-R/RW drive’s motor begins spinning.
“Now Checking...” appears in the display.
The message disappears approximately ten seconds
later, indicating that preparations for bouncing have
been completed.
• In contrast to normal recording, you cannot press [REC]
(manual punch in) after first pressing [PLAY].
RW Disc (Direct CD Bounce)” (p. 59).
• The moment [REC] is pressed, a region with a minimum
of one song is created on the disc. Note that even if you
press [STOP] at this point without bouncing any tracks,
the song cannot be deleted.
2. Press one of the INPUT SELECT buttons to select the
input source you want.
The button for the selected input source lights up, and
the sounds of the input source become audible.
6. Press [PLAY].
Bounce)” (p. 59)
[PLAY] and [REC] light, and bouncing to the CD-R/RW
disc begins.
The sounds are written to the CD-R/RW disc exactly as
they are played back.
The input source sound is mixed with the sounds played
back from the tracks and bounced to the CD-R/RW disc.
7. Press [STOP] when you reach the end of the song.
“Keep power on! Closing Track...” appears in the
display. The message disappears, indicating that the
bouncing have been completed.
You can also bounce only the input source sound to the CD
by completely lowering track faders 1–6 and 7/8 and the
RHYTHM faders.
Several seconds may be necessary before you can
proceed with the next operation.
as an audio CD (p. 142).
9. To enable playback of the bounced tracks on a
conventional audio CD player, finalize the disc (p. 143).
Finalizing the CD-R/RW disc allows the content to be heard
using a regular CD player but prevents any further bouncing
or writing of tracks to the disc. Do not finalize the disc if you
want to bounce or write other tracks to it.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Songs Created with the BR-864/BR-532
You can load songs created with the BR-864 or BR-532 into
the BR-900CD via memory cards.
To record or edit, turn off song protect (p. 79).
When you turn off song protect, “Overwrite OK?” appears in
the display; press [ENTER] (YES). Song protect is switched
Loading Songs Created with
the BR-864
off, and the data is simultaneously converted to BR-900CD
format. After this step is executed, the song data can no
longer be used with the BR-864.
First, save the song data created with the BR-864 to a
memory card, then insert the memory card into the BR-
900CD.
Loading Songs Created with
the BR-532
Once you record, edit, or set parameters for imported BR-864
When copying song data created with the BR-532 from
song data, that particular song data can no longer be used by
SmartMedia to a BR-900CD memory card, you can load the
the BR-864.
data as a BR-900CD song.
protect (p. 79) is automatically switched on for imported BR-
864 song data.
Reading BR-532 data requires a PC with a SmartMedia
If you can accept the fact that you will no longer be able to
reader and CompactFlash writer connected.
use the song data with the BR-864, you can switch song
protect off, then carry out recording or editing.
First, copy the data on the BR-532 memory card
(SmartMedia) to the PC with the SmartMedia reader, and use
the CompactFlash writer to copy that data from the PC to a
BR-900CD memory card.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SEL,”
and press [ENTER].
Then insert the memory card containing the copy of the
desired data into the BR-900CD.
The Song Select screen is appeared.
The song protect icon ( ) is indicated for the BR-864 songs.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SEL,”
and press [ENTER].
The Song Select screen is appeared.
3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song to be
loaded.
3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song to be
4. Press [ENTER].
loaded.
The song data is loaded.
4. Press [ENTER].
The song data is loaded.
The data remains in BR-532 format immediately after
(p. 79) to BR-900CD format.
Patches employing the “Guitar Synth” algorithm of the BR-
864 are replaced by “P001” when loaded.
The “Harmonist” of the BR-864 are replaced by “Flanger”
when loaded.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the Song Information
Displaying the Remaining
Available Recording Time
Follow the procedure below to either display the elapsed
recording time in the recording standby and recording
screens.
Displaying the Memory Card Usage
Follow the procedure below to display the current condition
of the memory card being used.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “INF,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.01-904d
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.01-901d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “Remain Inf,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “ON.”
fig.01-902d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the parameter to be
displayed.
Name of the currently selected song
fig.01-905d
ON:
Displays the remaining available recording
time in “minutes: seconds.”
OFF:
Doesn’t display the remaining available
recording time.
Song’s data type and memory used (Size: MB)
fig.01-906d
4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
Data Type
*
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
HiFi (MT2):
STD (LV1):
LONG (LV2):
High-quality recording type
Standard recording type
Long recording type
When [REC] is pressed in the Play screen, putting the BR-
900CD into record standby ([REC] flashes), the remaining
recording time is displayed in the TIME area.
Remaining memory
fig.01-907d
fig.01-903d
*
The song sizes are displayed in units of 1M = 1,000,000 bytes.
The size displayed is an approximation.
4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering Time (Locator)
Using the locator function, you can register any desired time
in a song as a “locator point” so that you can jump to that
point later with just the press of a button.
This function is quite useful during editing.
Registering a Locator Point
1. At the Play screen, move to the location where you
want to register the locator point.
2. Press [LOCATOR].
When the [LOCATOR] indicator lights up, registration is
complete.
fig.02-101
Moving to the Locator Point
1. Press [LOCATOR].
This moves you to the time in the song registered as a
locator point.
Deleting a Locator Point
1. Press and hold AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF], then press
[LOCATOR].
The locator point is deleted.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Search for the Music’s Start and End (Scrub/Preview)
Scrub function
When editing a sound, some times you need to know exactly
Scrubbing to Find the Music
Starting/Ending Point
where the sound starts, or exactly where the recording with
an auto punch in starts.
1. Hold down [STOP] and press [PLAY].
To enable you to find these points accurately, the BR-900CD
The [PLAY] indicator begins flashing and scrubbing
is equipped with the Scrub function.
starts.
When you use the Scrub function during playback (called
At this time, the Track 1–7/8 level meters are displayed.
“scrubbing”), the portion from your before or after the
The “
” (SCRUB TO) and “
” (SCRUB FROM)
current location (approximately 45 msec) is played back and
repeated.
displayed at the TEMPO position in the screen are the
scrub points with respect to the current position.
Preview function
With the Preview function, you can playback the one-second
When the cursor is set under the scrub point, it is
possible to change scrub point by TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.02-202d
portion of the song before or after your current position.
By using this together with the Scrub function, at the same
time slowly moving your current position in the song, it
becomes easy to find the exact transition point from one
phrase to the next.
fig.02-201
Now Time
fig.02-203d
Sound Data
Time
SCRUB
TO
SCRUB
FROM
Approx. 45 msec
You can press [PLAY] to preview the material to or from the
currently selected scrub point.
PREVIEW
TO
PREVIEW
FROM
Approx. 1.0 msec
Approx. 1.0 msec
PREVIEW FROM
PREVIEW TO
To mute the sound of a particular track, hold down
[DELETE/MUTE] and press the relevant REC TRACK
button so it starts blinking.
2. Slowly turn the TIME/VALUE dial to move the current
position and search for the starting point of the phrase
(e.g., where sound is first emitted).
3. After you find the exact point where the music starts,
press [STOP] to stop scrubbing.
You can now press [LOCATOR] to register a locator point so
that you can find the point easily later.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Search for the Music’s Start and End (Scrub/Preview)
Changing the Scrub Points
Besides switching the scrub point in the Play screen (p. 65),
you can also use the following method to switch the scrub
point.
Enabling Use of the Preview
Function with [REW] and [FF]
Besides using [PLAY] for the Preview function (p. 65), you
can also set the unit so that [REW] and [FF] can be used with
the Preview function.
1. Press [UTILITY].
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SCR,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-204d
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SCR,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-206d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “FROM/TO,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change scrub points.
fig.02-205d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] to select “Preview SW,” and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to set “ON.”
fig.02-207d
TO:
Scrubs to your current position.
FROM: Scrubs from your current position.
This enables use of the Preview function.
4. After completing the setting, press [UTILITY] (or press
4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
[EXIT] repeatedly) to return to the Play screen.
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
You can temporarily switch to Preview during scrub with the
following operations.
Press [REW]:
Press [FF]:
PREVIEW TO
PREVIEW FROM
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
The BR-900CD allows you to edit your songs by performing
Copying the repeated portion (AB)
Perform the procedure given below to copy the portion from
editing functions such as copying and moving data recorded
on the tracks.
the repeat start (A) to the repeat end (B).
Ex. 1: Copying twice to the same track
fig.02-302
About the Measure/Time Specification screen
Measures and time are specified in the “S” (Start), “E”
(End), and “T” (To) screens in Track Edit as shown
below.
fig.02-301d
S (Start) / E (End) / T (To)
Repeat
Start (A)
Repeat TO
End (B)
Time
Measure Beat
(Ex.)
Ex. 2: Copying twice to another track
fig.02-303
Hours
Seconds
Frame
Sub Frame
Minutes
Repeat
Start (A)
Repeat TO
End (B)
Time
Data is saved in its edited form when you return to the Play
screen from the Track Edit screen.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-304d
*
During automatic updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the
upper line of the display, while the lower line shows what is
being processed.
To copy, move, or erase repeated portions, you first need to
on p. 51.
Copying Data (Track Copy)
Track Copy allows you to copy a specific part of data and
then place it in a different location.
You can perform editing operations such as copying the data
on a track all at once, or copying the data from a specified
part as many times as you wish.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “CPY,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-305d
If, for example, you want to use a phrase from a certain track,
or have the same phrase repeated again and again, the copy
function will help save you time.
*
If data exists at the position being copied to, that data will be
overwritten.
*
The portion being copied must be longer than 1.0 seconds long.
If the copied portion is 1.0 seconds or less, no sound will be
heard even if the copy is carried out.
The three types of Track Copy are given below.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “AB” and press
[ENTER].
fig.02-306d
Copying by specifying the time
(TME/MES)
Perform the procedure given below to copy the portion
between specific times.
Ex. 1: Copying twice to the same track
fig.02-309
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-Track to copy from, and track/V-
Track to copy to.
START
END
TO
Time
Ex. 2: Copying twice to another track
fig.02-310
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-307d
START
END
TO
Time
7. Use [CURSOR] and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
specify the time of the beginning of the location “T”
(To) where you want the copied data to be placed.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
8. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-308d
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-311d
9. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of
copies you want to be placed.
10.When you are ready to execute the copy, press
[ENTER].
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
11.Press [ENTER].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “CPY,”
The copy is executed.
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-312d
12.Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “TME/MES” and
press [ENTER].
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
fig.02-319d
13.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of
copies you want to be placed.
14.When you are ready to execute the copy, press
[ENTER].
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
15.Press [ENTER].
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-Track to copy from, and track/V-
Track to copy to.
The copy is executed.
16.Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-314d
*
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
After specifying the time in the procedure above, a “+” may
appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual
current position and the position displayed. If you specify the
locations using measures, specify the locations at each screen
using the TIME/VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy.
7. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the beginning of the portion “S” (Start) of data you
want to copy.
You can also enter the time using [LOCATOR], [ZERO],
[STOP] + [REW], [STOP] + [FF], and AUTO PUNCH [IN/
OUT].
8. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-315d
Copying a complete track (ALL)
Perform the procedure given below to copy the complete
recorded data from one track to another.
9. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the
1. Press [UTILITY].
ending of the portion “E” (End) of data you want to copy.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
10.Press [ENTER].
fig.02-316d
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-318d
11.Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the time of the beginning of the location “T” (To)
where you want the copied data to be placed.
12.Press [ENTER].
fig.02-317d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “CPY,”
and press [ENTER].
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
fig.02-319d
Moving Data (Track Move)
Track Move allows you to move a specific portion of data to
a different location.
*
After the data is moved, the location it was in will be left
empty.
The three types of Track Move are given below.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “ALL” and press
[ENTER].
fig.02-320d
Moving the repeated portion (AB)
Perform the procedure given below to move the portion from
the repeat start (A) to the repeat end (B).
Ex. 1: Moving to the same track
fig.02-321
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-Track to copy from, and track/V-
Track to copy to.
Repeat
Start (A)
Repeat
End (B)
TO
Time
6. When you are ready to execute the copy, press
[ENTER].
Ex. 2: Moving to another track
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
fig.02-322
7. Press [ENTER].
The copy is executed.
8. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
Repeat
Start (A)
Repeat
Start (B)
TO
Time
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-323d
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
Moving by specifying the time
(TME/MES)
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“MOV,” and press [ENTER].
fig.02-324d
Perform the procedure given below to move the portion
between specific times.
Ex. 1: Moving to the same track
fig.02-327
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “AB” and press
[ENTER].
fig.02-325d
START
END
TO
Time
Ex. 2: Moving to another track
fig.02-328
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-Track to move from, and track/V-
Track to move to.
START
END
TO
Time
1. Press [UTILITY].
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-326d
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-329d
7. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
specify the time of the beginning of the location “T”
(To) where you want the data to be moved.
8. When you are ready to execute the move, press [ENTER].
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
9. Press [ENTER].
Move Event is executed.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“MOV,” and press [ENTER].
fig.02-330d
10.Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “TME/MES” and
press [ENTER].
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
fig.02-331d
*
After specifying the time in the procedure above, a “+” may
appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual
current position and the position displayed. If you specify the
locations using measures, specify the locations at each screen
using the TIME/VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy.
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-Track to move from, and track/V-
Track to move to.
You can also enter the time using [LOCATOR], [ZERO],
[STOP] + [REW], [STOP] + [FF], and AUTO PUNCH [IN/
OUT].
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-332d
Moving a complete track (ALL)
Perform the procedure given below to move the complete
data from one track to another.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-335d
7. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the beginning of the portion “S” (Start) of data you
want to move.
8. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-333d
9. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the
ending of the portion “E” (End) of data you want to move.
10.Press [ENTER].
fig.02-334d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“MOV,” and press [ENTER].
fig.02-336d
11.Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the time of the beginning of the location “T” (To)
where you want the data moved.
12. When you are ready to execute the move, press [ENTER].
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “ALL” and press
[ENTER].
fig.02-337d
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
13.Press [ENTER].
Move Event is executed.
14.Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line of
the display, while the lower line shows what is being processed.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
Erasing Data (Track Erase)
select the track/V-Track to move from, and track/V-
Track to move to.
Track Erase allows you to erase a specific part of data. Even if
data exists after the specified part, it will not be moved
forward to fill the gap left by the erasure. Like a normal tape
recorder, erasing can be considered covering unwanted data
by recording emptiness.
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-338d
*
Do not leave a portion of less than 1.0 seconds in length after
the erased portion. If a portion that short does remain, it will
end up being silent.
The three types of Track Erase are given below.
7. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the time of the beginning of the location “T” (To)
where you want the data to be moved.
Erasing the repeated portion (AB)
Perform the procedure given below to erase the portion from
8. When you are ready to execute the move, press [ENTER].
the repeat start (A) to the repeat end (B).
fig.02-339
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
9. Press [ENTER].
Move Event is executed.
10.Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
Repeat
Start (A)
Repeat
End (B)
Time
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-304d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “ERS,”
and press [ENTER].
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
fig.02-341d
Erasing by specifying the time
(TME/MES)
Perform the procedure given below to erase the portion
between specific times.
fig.02-343
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “AB” and press
[ENTER].
fig.02-342d
START
END
Time
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-334d
select the track/V-Track to erase from.
6. When you are ready to execute the erasure, press [ENTER].
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
7. Press [ENTER].
The erasure is executed.
8. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “ERS,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-345d
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “TME/MES” and
press [ENTER].
fig.02-346d
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
Erasing a complete track (ALL)
1. Press [UTILITY].
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-Track to erase from.
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-347d
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-349d
7. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the beginning of the portion “S” (Start) of data you
want to erase.
8. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-348d4
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “ERS,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-350d
9. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the ending of the portion “E” (End) of data you want to
erase.
10.When you are ready to execute the erasure, press
[ENTER].
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “ALL” and press
[ENTER].
fig.02-351d
11.Press [ENTER].
The erasure is executed.
12.Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
After specifying the time in the procedure above, a “+” may
appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual
current position and the position displayed. If you specify the
locations using measures, specify the locations at each screen
using the TIME/VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy.
select the track/V-Track to erase.
6. When you are ready to execute the erasure, press
[ENTER].
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
7. Press [ENTER].
You can also enter the time using [LOCATOR], [ZERO],
[STOP] + [REW], [STOP] + [FF], and AUTO PUNCH [IN/
OUT].
The erasure is executed.
8. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line of
the display, while the lower line shows what is being processed.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)
5. When you are ready to execute the exchange, press
Exchanging Data (Track Exchange)
[ENTER].
Perform the procedure given below to exchange the data
between two tracks.
The display will ask “Are you sure?,” so that you can
confirm the operation.
Example: exchanging all the data on track 1 with all the
6. Press [ENTER].
data on track 2
fig.02-352
The exchange is executed.
Track 1
7. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
A
B
C
to the Play screen.
Track 2
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
D
D
E
E
Track 1
Track 2
A
B
C
Time
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “TRK,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-353d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “XCG,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.R08-27
4. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the two tracks/V-Tracks to exchange data.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Organizing the Songs You’ve Recorded
Copying a Song (Song Copy)
Erasing Songs (Song Erase)
Follow the procedure below to copy the currently selected
song.
Follow the procedure below to erase a song from the
memory card.
1. Press [UTILITY].
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EDT,”
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EDT,”
and press [ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-401d
fig.02-403d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “CPY,”
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “ERS,”
and press [ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
The Copy Song screen appears.
fig.02-402d
The Erase Song screen appears.
fig.02-404d
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial and select the song to be
If “Card Full!” appears
erased.
If this message appears before the copy, it means that
there is insufficient space on the memory card to
complete the copy. Delete any unnecessary recording
from the memory card.
5. After selecting the song to erase, press [ENTER].
“Are you sure?” appears.
6. To continue with the erasure, press [ENTER] (YES).
To cancel the operation press the [EXIT] (NO) (or
[UTILITY]).
4. Press [ENTER].
The copy is executed. When the copy has been
completed, “Completed!” appears in the display, and
you are returned to the Play screen.
7. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly)
repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
*
If you erase a song currently being used, the song on the
memory card with the lowest number is selected. If there are no
other songs on the card, a new song is created.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Organizing the Songs You’ve Recorded
*
*
Depending on the situation, an appreciable length of time may
be required for Optimize to be completed. This is not a
malfunction. Do not turn off the power until Optimize has
completed.
Saving Memory on the
Memory Card (Song Optimize)
When you perform overdubbing or punch-in/out, the data
that you rewrite (replace) actually remains on the memory
card. In some cases, this unwanted data may occupy a
significant amount of space on the memory card. This will
cause the time available for recording to be less than it
should be.
After you execute Optimize, it is not possible to undo/redo to
revert to the state before executing Optimize.
Naming Songs (Song Name)
When a new song is created, it is automatically given a name
such as “SONG 0001.” With your BR-900CD, you can use
“Song Name” to give each song a name, which helps you
manage and organize your songs.
By performing a “Song Optimize,” you can have the BR-
900CD erase any unnecessary data on the memory card and
increase the unused space.
1. Press [UTILITY].
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EDT,”
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EDT,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-405d
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-407d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “OPT,”
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
and press [ENTER].
“NAM,” and press [ENTER].
“Are you sure?” appears in the display.
fig.02-406d
The name of the song (Song Name) appears in the
display.
fig.02-408d
4. To continue with the optimization, press [ENTER]
(YES).
The Song Optimize function is carried out. When
completed, “Completed!” appears in the display, and
you are returned to the Play screen.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the
character you want to change.
5. Rotate TIME/VALUE dial to select the character.
To cancel the operation press the [EXIT] (NO) (or
[UTILITY]).
*
You can switch between upper case and lower case characters
by pressing [ENTER].
6. After the name is properly entered, press [UTILITY] (or
press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return to the Play screen.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Organizing the Songs You’ve Recorded
4. Rotate TIME/VALUE dial to select the “ON.”
Protecting a Song (Song Protect)
You can imagine situations where, after taking care to create
a song, you accidentally overwrite it with a recording,
deleting the performance itself.
5. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
When a song is protected, the display will show the song
To prevent such accidents, you can protect song data so that
it cannot be rewritten accidentally (Song Protect).
protect symbol.
fig.02-411d
*
The following operations are not available when a song is
protected.
• Editing a song name
• Erasing a song
• Song Optimize
• Editing a digital copy protect
• Initializing the Rhythm (arrangements/patterns/
drum kits)
Saving the Current Settings
to the Song (Song Save)
• Initializing effects (song patches)
• Initialize All
The BR-900CD can save the following contents as song data.
• Arrangement/Pattern Edit
• Importing SMFs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Recorded data
Mixer settings (Pan, Track EQ, etc.)
Insert Effect song patches
Mastering Tool Kit song patches
Pitch Correction song patches
Rhythm Arrangements / Rhythm Patterns
Loop Effects
• Writing effects to song patches
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EDT,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-409
Tuner
Utility (excluding LCD contrast)
These recorded data or mixer settings are not saved
immediately after recording, but are saved when songs are
saved, and when the screens are switched.
Ordinarily, if a situation calls for it, a message appears in the
display prompting you to confirm that you want to save the
data, so you need not pay particular attention to this, but if
you want to save the settings to the song in its current state,
use the following procedure.
1. Hold down [STOP] and press [REC].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “PRT,”
and press [ENTER].
The Song Protect screen appears.
fig.02-410d
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Master Tape / Disc
This process involves recording the finished song to your
Recording to a Digital
Recorder (Digital Connection)
recorder (cassette tape recorder, CD recorder, etc.) and
making a master tape or a master disc.
1. Connect the BR-900CD’s DIGITAL OUT connector to
the digital recorder's input connector.
fig.02-501b
Recording to a Cassette Tape
Recorder (Analog Connection)
1. Connect the BR-900CD’s LINE OUT jacks to the
cassette tape recorder's input jacks.
fig.02-501a
Digital Recorder
(CD Recorder etc.)
2. Set the digital recorder so it is ready to record digital
signals.
Cassette tape
Recorder
3. Put the digital recorder in record mode.
4. Press [PLAY] on the BR-900CD and start the playback
of the recorded data.
2. Put the cassette tape recorder in record mode.
3. Press [PLAY] on the BR-900CD and start the playback
Disabling digital copying (Digital
Copy Protect)
of the recorded data.
When recording from the BR-900CD to a digital recorder,
you can prevent further digital copying of the master tape or
disc to any other digital recorders.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EDT,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-501d
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Master Tape / Disc
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“DPRT,” and press [ENTER].
The Digital Copy Protect screen appears.
fig.02-502d
4. Rotate TIME/VALUE dial to select the “ON.”
ON:
Digital copying will be prohibited.
Digital copying is enabled.
OFF:
5. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
Some DAT recorders do not support SCMS, or do not allow
digital connections to a CD player. If you are using this type of
DAT recorder, it will not be possible to record the digital
output of the BR-900CD on a DAT recorder if “Copy Prtct” is
turned “ON.” In this case, you will need to turn off the “Copy
Prtct” setting.
What is SCMS?
SCMS stands for Serial Copy Management System.
This is a function of consumer digital audio devices such
as DAT recorders CD recorders that protects the
copyright of the producer by prohibiting second-
generation and subsequent copies from being made
digitally.
If digital connections are made to a digital recorder that
has this function, SCMS flags will be recorded along
with the digital audio signals.
Digital audio data that contains this data cannot be
recorded again via a digital connection.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Insert Effects
The BR-900CD comes with five effects processors: an insert
effects, loop effects, Track EQ, Pitch Correction, and
Mastering Tool Kit.
Preset patches (P)
The preset patches contain preset data. Their settings can be
changed, but you cannot create a new preset patch.
An insert effects, loop effects, and Track EQ can be used
simultaneously, and you can make settings for each effect as
desired.
User patches (U)
User patches can be rewritten, and are stored in internal
memory. If you have created a patch that you would like to
use for other songs as well, it is convenient to store it as a
user patch.
Here is an explanation of how to change the various
parameters for the insert effects and how to then save those
changes.
Song patches (S)
Like user patches, song patches can be written; however, the
data for song patches are stored along with the song data to
the memory card. This is convenient when you have created
a patch for a specific recorded performance, and would like
“Track EQ Parameter Functions” (p. 112)
to store that patch together with the song.
fig.01-502
Insert effects are applied during recording, in addition they
are Used According to the Mode” (p. 87).
Memory Card
BR-900CD
Song
Preset
Patch
User
Patch
Song
Patch
*
Song patches (S) cannot be selected unless a memory card is
inserted.
Effect Patches and Banks
The effects used by insert effects and the parameters of each
effect are changed by calling up “effect patches.”
Your BR-900CD is shipped with the user patches (U) and
song patches (S) containing the same patches as the preset
patches (P).
Your BR-900CD comes equipped with a number of preset
effect patches for use with vocals and instruments. These are
grouped according to different input sources and each group
is called a “bank.”
fig.01-501
When you create a new song, copies of the patches in the
song patches (S) are made in the preset patches (P) for each
bank.
INPUT SELECT
GUITAR/BASS MIC
LINE
SIMUL
Guitar Bank Mic Bank Line Bank Simul Bank
GTR
MIC
LIN
SML
P01
P01
P01
P01
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Preset
Patch
P99
P40
P50
P50
U01
U01
U01
U01
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
User
Patch
U99
U40
U50
U50
S01
S01
S01
S01
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Song
Patch
S99
S40
S50
S50
Your BR-900CD allows you to automatically change banks
by pressing an INPUT SELECT button. For example,
pressing the [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] INPUT SELECT button
changes you to a guitar bank patch, and pressing [LINE]
changes you to a line bank patch.
Also, within each bank, effect patches are further grouped as
shown below.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Insert Effects
Editing Insert Effect Settings
If you wish to create a new effect sound, you should first
select an existing patch that is closest to the sound you want,
and then edit its settings. If you wish to save the effect settings
that you edited, save them as a user patch or song patch.
By pressing [ENTER] while the cursor is at a Bank–Number,
you can display the Edit Effect screen directly.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to each
effect and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to turn each
effect on or off.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
Blocks that are turned on are shown in uppercase letters,
while blocks that are turned off are shown in lowercase
letters.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.01-503d
P: Preset / S: Song / U: User
Algorithm
Turn on the effects that you want to use.
fig.01-506d
Bank
Number Patch Name
Name
2. Select an effect patch.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the
effect with the parameter that you want to change and
press [ENTER].
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the bank, Preset/Song/User, and patch number.
The Parameter Setting screen for each effect appears.
fig.01-507d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to “EDIT,” and
press [ENTER].
The Edit Effect screen appears and the algorithm (the
connection sequence for the effects being used) is displayed.
fig.01-504d
6. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select a parameter, and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to edit the value.
7. If you would like to edit another effect, press [EXIT] to
return to the previous screen, and repeat steps 5–6.
8. If you wish to save the current effect settings, perform
the procedure described in “Saving insert effect
settings,” next.
■
When effect patches in the SIMUL bank are selected,
“GTR” and “MIC” appear.
Edited effect settings are temporary. If you exit the Edit
Effect screen without saving the effect patch you changed,
“TMP” appears next to the indication of the bank.
Be aware that if you select a new effect patch while “TMP” is
displayed, the altered effect patch is returned to its original
settings and the changes are lost.
Move the cursor to “GTR” to modify a guitar-use effect,
or to “MIC” to modify an effect for use with a mic, then
press [ENTER].
fig.01-505d
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Insert Effects
5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number to
Saving Insert Effects Settings
(Write)
which to write the new effect patch.
6. After you’ve selected the destination, press [ENTER].
Follow the procedure below to enter a name (patch name) for
an effect that you’ve modified, and save it as a new effect
patch.
After the save has been completed, you are returned to
the Effect screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
*
You cannot save an effect patch during the recording or
playback of a song.
*
If you do not need to change patch name, go to step 4.
1. At the Effect screen, press CURSOR [ ] to move the
cursor to “NAME,” and press [ENTER].
The Patch Name Setting screen appears.
fig.01-508d
2. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to enter the
patch name.
*
Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.
3. After you have completed entering the effect settings
and patch name as desired, press [EXIT] to return to the
Effect screen.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“WRITE,” and press [ENTER].
fig.01-509d
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Insert Effects
INPUT<REC DRY>:
The sound is monitored through the insert effect but is
Changing How the Insert Effects are
Used According to the Mode
recorded without the effect (dry).
fig.01-512
By default, the insert effect is inserted immediately after the
input source. The reason for this is to allow for the effects-
processed (wet) sound to be recorded and monitored.
However, sometimes you want to change the connection
order.
TRACK 1
(REC)
On the BR-900CD, you can accommodate a wide variety of
situations by changing the point to which the insert effects
are connected.
TRACK 1–8, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8:
The insert effect can be applied to the playback of a track
(or pair of tracks). Use this when you wish to try out
effects after recording the dry sound, or when you wish
to apply effects only to a specific track.
Follow the procedure below to change where insert effects
are connected.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
fig.01-513
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“LOCAT,” and press [ENTER].
fig.01-510d
TRACK 1
(PLAY)
RHYTHM:
The insert effect can be applied to the playback of a
Rhythm.
fig.01-513a
RHYTHM
MASTER:
Use this when you wish to apply effects to the entire
song, such as when adjusting the tone or applying a
special effect during mixdown.
3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to switch the point to
which the insert effects are connected.
fig.01-514
INPUT<NORMAL>:
The sound is monitored and recorded after it passes
through the insert effect. Normally you will use the BR-
TRACK 1
(PLAY)
900CD with this setting.
fig.01-511
TRACK 2
(PLAY)
TRACK 8
(PLAY)
TRACK 1
(REC)
RHYTHM
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
Algorithm List
The algorithms (the available effects and their connection order) that can be used as an insert effect are shown below.
bank that includes that algorithm, and then refer to the “Effect Patch List” (p. 202) and select a patch that uses the desired
algorithm.
The line or lines connecting the algorithm indicate whether the effect features mono output (single line) or stereo output (two lines).
(Example)
fig.04-105a
Output: Mono
Output: Stereo
–[
]–[ ]–
COMP PAMP
–[
]=[ ]=
MOD DLY
BANK: GUITAR
1. COSM GTR AMP
2. ACOUSTIC SIM
This is a multi-effect designed for electric guitar. This
provides an amp sound using a preamp and speaker
simulator.
This is a multi-effect designed for electric guitar. It allows
you to use an electric guitar to produce sounds similar to
those of an acoustic guitar.
fig.04-107
*
In case of “Phaser,” output will become monaural.
fig.04-106
–[
[
]–[ ]
]–[ ]–[
ASIM COMP EQ NS
–[
[
]–[ ]
]–[ ]–[
COMP PAMP SP EQ/WAH
]–[ ]=
]=[
FV MOD DLY
]–[ ]–[ ]=
]=[
NS FV MOD DLY
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
Compressor
Compressor
Preamp
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
Delay
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Harmonist
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
- Slow Attack
Delay
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
3. BASS SIM
5. ACOUSTIC GTR
Simulates the sound of a bass guitar. Obtain the sound of a
bass guitar while playing an electric guitar.
This is a multi-effect designed for acoustic guitar. Even when
an electric-acoustic is connected at line level, this provides a
warm sound similar to what is obtained through a
*
You should avoid playing chords when using the Bass
Simulator.
microphone.
fig.04-111
fig.04-108
–[
]=[ ]=
]=[ ]=[ ]=[
ACP COMP EQ NS DLY
–[
]–[
]–[ ]–[ ]–[
]=
BSIM COMP/DEF NS FV MOD
Acoustic Processor
Compressor
Bass Simulator
Compressor/Defretter
- Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Delay
- Defretter
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
6. BASS MULTI
This is a multi-effect designed for bass guitar. Appropriate
- Chorus
for creating standard bass sound.
fig.04-112
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
–[
]–[ ]
]–[
]–[
COMP/DEF OCT ENH EQ/WAH
–[ ]–[ ]–[
]=[
]=
NS FV MOD DLY
4. COSM COMP GTR
This is a multi-effect designed for electric guitar. In addition
to a COSM compressor/limiter, it uses a preamp and speaker
Compressor/Defretter
- Compressor
- Defretter
Octave
simulator for a characteristic amp sound.
fig.04-109
Enhancer
–[
]–[ ]
]–[ ]–[
COMP PAMP SP EQ/WAH
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
–[ ]–[ ]–[
]=
NS FV DLY
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
COSM Comp/Limiter
Preamp
Modulation
- Flanger
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Delay
Delay
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
7. COSM BASS AMP
8. COSM COMP BSS
This is a multi-effect designed for bass guitar. This features
This is a multi-effect designed for bass guitar.
an amp sound that uses a preamp and speaker simulator.
fig.04-113
In addition to a COSM compressor/limiter, it uses a preamp
and speaker simulator for a characteristic amp sound.
fig.04-114
–[
]–[ ]
]–[ ]–[
COMP PAMP SP EQ/WAH
–[
[
]–[ ]
]–[
COMP/LIM PAMP SP
–[ ]–[ ]–[
]=[
]=
NS FV MOD DLY
]–[ ]–[ ]–[
EQ/WAH NS FV DLY
]=
Compressor
Preamp
COSM Comp/Limiter
Preamp
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Delay
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
BANK: MIC
9. VOCAL MULTI
10. VOICE TRANS
This is a multi-effect designed for vocals.
This is a multi-effect designed for vocals.
It provides the basic effects needed for vocals.
This allows you to produce a unique effect using a voice
fig.04-115
transformer.
fig.04-116
–[
]–[ ]
]–[
]–[
COMP DES ENH EQ
–[ ]–[ ]–[ ]–[ ]=
]=[
VT NS FV MOD DLY
–[ ]–[ ]–[ ]=
]=[
NS FV MOD DLY
Voice Transformer
Compressor
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
De-esser
Enhancer
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Chorus
- Tremolo/Pan
- Phaser
Delay
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
11. COSM COMP VCL
This is a multi-effect designed for vocals.
The COSM compressor/limiter is perfect for creating a basic
sound.
fig.04-117
–[
[
]–[ ]
]–[
COMP/LIM DES ENH
]–[ ]–[ ]–[
EQ NS FV DLY
]=
COSM Comp/Limiter
De-esser
Enhancer
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Delay
BANK: LINE
12. STEREO MULTI
13. LO-FI BOX
This algorithm connects seven types of effect, all in full
This allows you to simulate sounds that appear to be playing
on an AM radio, the sounds of old records played on an old-
fashioned gramophone, and even extreme deformations of
stereo.
fig.04-118
the sound produced by a Lo-Fi Digital.
fig.S02-14
=[
[
]=[ ]
]=[
COMP RNG EQ/WAH
]=[ ]=[ ]=
]=[
NS FV MOD DLY
=[
]=[ ]=
LOFI NS
Compressor
Lo-Fi Box
Noise Suppressor
Ring Modulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
BANK: SIMUL
14. VO+GT AMP
15. VO+AC.SIM
This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a
vocal and electric guitar.
This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a
vocal and electric guitar.
For the guitar, you can produce an amp sound using a
preamp and speaker simulator.
For the guitar, you can make the electric guitar sound like an
acoustic guitar.
(GUITAR)
(GUITAR)
fig.04-121
fig.04-123
–[
]–[
]–[ ]–[ ]–[
]–
–[
]–[ ]–
]–[ ]–[
COMP PAMP SP NS DLY
ASIM COMP NS DLY
(MIC)
(MIC)
fig.04-122
fig.04-120
–[
]–[ ]–[ ]–[ ]–
COMP EQ NS DLY
–[
]–[ ]–[ ]–[ ]–
COMP EQ NS DLY
(GUITAR)
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
Compressor
(GUITAR)
Compressor
PreAmp
Noise Suppressor
Delay
Speaker Simulator
Noise Suppressor
Delay
(MIC)
Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Delay
(MIC)
Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Delay
16. VO+ACOUSTIC
This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a
vocal and acoustic guitar.
For the guitar, you can produce a warm sound as though a
mic were being used, even when an electric-acoustic is
connected by a direct line.
(GUITAR)
fig.04-125
–[
]–[ ]–[ ]–
ACP COMP NS
(MIC)
fig.04-124
–[
]–[ ]–
COMP NS
(GUITAR)
Acoustic Processor
Compressor
Noise Suppressor
(MIC)
Compressor
Noise Suppressor
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
Parameter List
The trademarks listed in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, which are separate companies from BOSS.
Those companies are not affiliated with BOSS and have not licensed or authorized BOSS’s BR-900CD. Their marks are used
solely to identify the equipment whose sound is simulated by BOSS’s BR-900CD.
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
Acoustic Processor
This simulates the sound of an acoustic guitar. It allows you to use
an electric guitar to produce sounds similar to those of an acoustic
guitar.
With this feature, you can change the sound from a pickup on an
electric-acoustic guitar into a richer sound, similar to that obtained
by a microphone placed near a guitar. Best results will be achieved
when stereo recording.
If you set the pickup selector of your guitar to the front position, the
desired effect will be easier to achieve.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the acoustic processor effect on/off.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the acoustic guitar simulator effect on/off.
Body
0–100
This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body. That is,
it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical
characteristics of acoustic guitars.
PickUp
SINGLE, HUMBUCK
Set this to the type of pickup on the connected guitar.
Charct
Mic Dist
0–100
This selects one of the four types of sounds.
This simulates the distance between the microphone capturing the
sound of an acoustic guitar and the guitar itself.
STD (standard):
This is a normal acoustic guitar.
Level
0–100
JUMBO:
This adjusts the volume of the acoustic processor.
This is an acoustic guitar with a body that is bigger than
STANDARD. The bass sound is powerful.
Bass Simulator
Simulates the sound of a bass guitar. Obtain the sound of a bass
guitar while playing an electric guitar. You should avoid playing
chords when using the Bass Simulator.
ENHANCE:
This is an acoustic guitar that with a more responsive attack, so the
guitar will retain more of its prominence in almost any situation.
PIEZO:
This simulates the sound you would get from a pickup installed on
an electric-acoustic guitar.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the bass simulator effect on/off.
During the attack, a certain amount of compression will be applied.
Charct
LOOSE, TIGHT
Bass tone characteristic is set. When “LOOSE” is selected, as if the
string gauge was getting thicker.
Top-Hi
-100–+100
Adjust the level of the direct sound from the strings. That is, it
adjusts the harmonic contents.
Level
0–100
Top-Mid
-100–+100
This adjusts the volume of the bass simulator.
This adjusts the interference to the strings made by the top plate.
That is, it adjusts the attack sense.
Body
-100–+100
This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body. That is,
it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical
characteristics of acoustic guitars.
Level
0–100
This adjusts the volume of the acoustic guitar simulator.
*
If Top-Hi, Top-Mid, and Body are all set to “-100,” there will be no
sound.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
Chorus
COSM Comp (compressor)/Limiter
A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound,
making the final output sound thicker and broader. Best results will
be achieved when stereo recording.
The compressor corrects differences in input to create a steadier, more
even volume balance. It is used to extend the sustain of input sounds
and, conversely, to shorten sustain and emphasize the attack portion
of sounds.
*
This effect can be used when the MODULATION “Type” parameter
is set to “CHORUS.”
The limiter is an effect that prevents distortion by suppressing input
signals that exceed a set value (threshold). You can get the same effect
achieved with the compressor by setting the threshold at a low value.
The BR-900CD uses COSM technology to model four types of
compressor/limiter in which the compressor and limiter functions are
combined.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the chorus effect on/off.
Rate
0–100
Adjusts the rate of the Chorus effect.
On/Off
Sets the compressor/limiter to ON or OFF.
OFF, ON
Depth
0–100
Adjusts the depth of the Chorus effect.
Type
Pre Dly
0.5–50.0 ms
Selects the compressor/limiter type.
Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the
direct sound has been output.
BOSS-Cmp: Models the BOSS CS-3 compact effects processor.
D-Comp:
Rack160:
VtgRack:
Models the MXR dyna comp.
Models the dbx 160.
E.Level
Adjusts the volume of the effect sound.
0–100
Models the UREI 1178.
Attack (with BOSS-Cmp, D-Comp)
0–100
Compressor
This corrects differences in input to create a steadier, more even
volume balance. This is used to extend the sustain of input sounds
and, conversely, to shorten sustain and emphasize the attack portion
of sounds.
Adjusts the strength of the picking attack when the strings are
played. Larger values will result in a sharper attack, creating a more
clearly defined sound.
Sustain (with BOSS-Cmp, D-Comp)
Boosts low-level signals, adjusting the time over which sounds are
sustained. Higher values deepen the effect, resulting in a longer
sustain.
0–100
Another use of compression is as a “limiter,” which prevents
distortion by suppressing only volume peaks.
Threshold (with Rack160)
0–100
On/Off
OFF, ON
Adjust this as appropriate for the input signal from your bass. The
compression effect is applied to input above the level set here. The
smaller the value set here, the lower the level at which the limiter
effect kicks in.
This parameter turns the compressor effect on/off.
Sustain
0–100
This adjusts the depth of the effect. Higher settings values result in
longer sustain times. Set this to a lower value when using
compression for the limiter effect.
Input (with VtgRack)
Controls the input level. Increasing the value will produce a deeper
effect.
0–100
Attack
0–100
Adjusts the strength of the attack. Larger values will result in a
sharper attack, creating a more clearly defined sound.
Ratio
(with Rack160) 1:1–20:1, INF:1 (with VtgRack) 4:1–20:1
Adjusts the limiter compression ratio. Higher ratio create a stronger
compression effect.
Level
Adjusts the volume.
0–100
Attack Time (When set to VtgRack)
0–100
This adjusts the amount of time it takes for the compression ratio set
in Ratio to be reached once compression begins, as the input level
exceeds the set threshold level. The larger the value set here, the
more rapidly compression is applied.
Release Time (with VtgRack)
0–100
This adjusts the time from when the signal level drops below the
threshold until when the compression is removed. The lower the
values set, the more rapidly the compression is released, and the
more clearly the sound from the next string played is heard.
Tone (with BOSS-Cmp)
-50–+50
Adjusts the tone. The higher the value set, the more the high
frequencies are boosted, resulting in a harder sound.
Level
Adjusts the volume.
0–100
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
De-esser
Doubling
Useful for reducing ‘sibilant’ or ‘S’ sounds produced by a vocalist.
By adding a slightly time-delayed sound to the direct sound, this
produces the impression that multiple sources are sounding together
(a “doubling” effect). Best results will be achieved when stereo
recording.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the de-esser effect on/off.
Sibilant
0–100
*
This effect can be used when the MODULATION “Type” parameter
is set to “DOUBLING.”
Adjusts the sensitivity relative to the input volume, which controls
how the effect is applied.
On/Off
OFF, ON
Level
Adjusts the volume.
0–100
This parameter turns the doubling effect on/off.
Dly Tme
0.5–50.0 ms
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).
Defretter
This simulates a fretless bass.
Separation
-50– +50
On/Off
OFF, ON
0–100
Adjusts the diffusion. The panning of the direct sound and effect
sound can be spread to left and right.
This parameter turns the defretter effect on/off.
*
This effect is obtained with stereo recording (using two tracks).
Sens
This controls the input sensitivity of the Defretter. It should be
adjusted for the bass guitar you have until you get the harmonic
changes to sound natural.
E.Level
0–120
This adjusts the volume of the delay sound.
Attack
0–100
Enhancer
By adding sounds which are out-of-phase with the direct sound, this
effect enhances the definition of the sound, and pushes it to the
forefront.
This controls the attack of the Defretter. Increasing the value will
cause the harmonics to change more slowly, thus producing a
relatively attack-less sound, similar to a fretless bass.
Depth
0–100
This controls the ratio of harmonics. Increasing the value will
increase the harmonic content and therefore will create a more
unusual sound.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the enhancer effect on/off.
Sens
0–100
Level
0–100
Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied relative to
the input signals.
Adjusts the volume of the defretter sound.
Freq
1.0–10.0 kHz
Delay
Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be
applied. The effect will be made apparent in the frequencies above
the frequency set here.
This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the
direct sound.
On/Off
OFF, ON
Mix Level
0–100
This parameter turns the delay effect on/off.
Adjusts the amount of phase-shifted sound of the range set
by “Frequency” that is to be mixed with the input.
Type
This Parameter selects the type of delay.
Lo Mix Lvl
0–100
SINGLE:
This is a simple delay.
Adjusts the amount of phase-shifted sound of the lower range that is
to be mixed with the input. The frequency range in which the effect
is applied is fixed.
TAP:
The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels. This
will be effective when stereo recording.
Level
0–100
Adjusts the volume of the enhanced sound.
Dly Tme
SINGLE: 1–1400 ms, TAP: 1–700 ms
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).
Feedback
0–100
This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback. Changing the
amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is
repeated to change as well.
E.Level
Adjusts the volume of the delay sound.
0–120
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
Resonance
0–100
Equalizer
Determines the amount of resonance (feedback). Increasing the value
will emphasize the effect, creating a more unusual sound.
A 4-band equalizer.
*
You can use this effect with the following algorithms when “4BAND
EQ” is selected for the 4BAND EQ/WAH “Type” setting.
Separation
0–100
Adjusts the diffusion. The diffusion increases as the value increases.
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
BASS MULTI
COSM BASS AMP
COSM COMP BSS
STEREO MULTI
This will be effective when stereo output is used.
*
This effect is obtained with stereo recording (using two tracks).
On/Off
OFF, ON
Foot Volume
Specify the volume between effects.
This parameter turns the equalizer effect on/off.
Low Gain
-20– +20 dB
By using an expression pedal to control the foot volume, you can
explanation, see “When Using an Expression Pedal” (p. 187).
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the bass
equalizer.
Lo-M Gin
-20– +20 dB
On/Off
Switches the foot volume on/off.
OFF, ON
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the low-
midrange equalizer.
Lo-M F
100 Hz–10.0 kHz
This parameter sets the central frequency for the low-midrange
Lo-Fi Box
Produces a lo-fi sound.
equalizer.
Lo-M Q
0.5–16
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
This parameter turns the lo-fi box effect on/off.
by “Lo-M F.” A larger value results in a narrower range of change.
Type
Hi-M Gin
-20– +20 dB
Select the mode of the lo-fi box.
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the high-
midrange equalizer.
RADIO:
The sound will appear to be heard from an AM radio.
Hi-M F
100 Hz–10.0 kHz
This parameter sets the central frequency for the high-midrange
*
By adjusting “Tuning,” you can simulate the sounds that occur when
you adjust the tuning frequency of the radio.
equalizer.
PLAYER:
Hi-M Q
0.5–16
The sound will appear to be heard from a gramophone. The noise
caused by scratches and dust on the record are is simulated.
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
by “Hi-M F.” A larger value results in a narrower range of change.
DIGITAL:
Hi Gain
-20– +20 dB
This allows you to create a “lo-fi” sound by lowering the sample rate
and/or decreasing the number of bits. Realtime modify filters
connected in series allow you to reshape the sound freely.
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the treble
equalizer.
Level
-20– +20 dB
■
When “RADIO” or “PLAYER” is selected
This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage.
Tuning
0–100
This is a parameter for “RADIO.” It simulates the sounds that occur
when you adjust the tuning frequency of an AM radio.
Flanger
This produces a flanging effect that gives a sort of “twisting”
character to the sound.
Wow Flt
0–100
This is a parameter for “PLAYER.” It simulates the wow and flutter
which occur when the speed of the turntable is not constant.
*
This effect can be used when the MODULATION “Type” parameter
is set to “FLANGER.”
Noise
This simulates noise.
0–100
On/Off
OFF, ON
0–100
This parameter turns the flanger effect on/off.
Filter
Adjusts the filter.
0–100
Rate
Determines the rate of the flanging effect.
D:E
100:0–0:100
Depth
0–100
This adjusts the volume balance of the direct and effect sounds.
Determines the depth of the flanging effect.
Manual
0–100
Adjusts the center frequency at which to apply the effect.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
■ When “DIGITAL” is selected
Noise Suppressor
This effect reduces the noise and hum. Since it suppresses the noise
in synchronization with the envelope of the sound (the way in which
the sound decays over time), it has very little effect on the sound,
and does not harm the natural character of the sound.
Pre Filter
OFF, ON
This filter decreases digital distortion. When turned off, you can
create an intense lo-fi sound incorporating digital distortion.
Smpl Rate
Modify the sample rate.
OFF, 1/2–1/32
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on/off.
Bit
OFF, 15–1
Modify the number of data bits. If this is turned off, the number of
data bits will be unchanged. If an extremely low number of bits is
selected, loud noise may appear even when there is no sound,
depending on the input source. In such cases, raise the threshold of
the noise suppressor.
Threshold
0–100
Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise. If
the noise level is high, a higher setting is appropriate. If the noise
level is low, a lower setting is appropriate. Adjust this value until the
decay of the sound is as natural as possible.
Post Fltr
OFF, ON
*
High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no
sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down.
This filter decreases the digital distortion produced by lo-fi.
By turning this off, you can create an extremely lo-fi sound.
Release
0–100
Fx Level
Adjust the volume of the lo-fi sound.
0–100
0–100
Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function
until volume reaches “0.”
Dir Level
Adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
Octave
Modify Fil
This adds a note one octave lower, creating a richer sound.
This is a filter featuring a wide range of possible settings (modifiable
filter). Select different types to get a variety of different filter effects.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the octave effect on/off.
OFF:
The modify filter will not be used.
Oct Level
0–100
LPF:
This adjusts the volume of the sound one octave below.
The effect will function as a low pass filter.
Dir Level
Adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
0–100
BPF:
The effect will function as a band pass filter.
HPF:
Phaser
The effect will function as a high pass filter.
By adding varied-phase portions to the direct sound, the phaser
effect gives a whooshing, swirling character to the sound.
Cutoff F
0–100
0–100
Adjust the cutoff frequency.
*
This effect can be used when the MODULATION “Type” parameter
is set to “PHASER.”
Resonance
Adjust the resonance.
On/Off
OFF, ON
0–100
0–100
0–100
0–100
Gain
0–24 dB
This parameter turns the phaser effect on/off.
Adjust the volume level of the sound that has passed through the
modify filter.
Rate
This sets the rate of the Phaser effect.
Depth
Determines the depth of the Phaser effect.
Manual
Adjusts the center frequency of the phaser effect.
Resonance
Determines the amount of resonance (feedback). Increasing the value
will emphasize the effect, creating a more unusual sound.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
Pitch Shifter
Preamp
This effect changes the pitch of the original sound (up or down)
within a range of two octaves.
Adjust the distortion and tone of the guitar sound.
*
When all Bass, Middle and Treble are set to “0,” no sound may be
produced depending on the “Type” setting.
*
This effect can be used when the MODULATION “Type” parameter
is set to “PITCH SFT.”
On/Off
Turns the preamp effect on/off.
OFF, ON
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the pitch shifter effect on/off.
Type
Type
This sets the type of the preamp. The distortion and tone
characteristics of each amp are as shown below:
Selects either manual pitch shifter “MANUAL” or pedal pitch shifter
“PEDAL.”
■
With “COSM GTR AMP,” “COSM COMP GTR,” or
“VO+GT AMP” algorithms
MANUAL:
This is a simple pitch shifter.
JC-120
The sound of the Roland “JC-120,” a favorite
PEDAL:
of pro musicians around the world.
The sound of a conventional built-in tube
amp.
The effect will function as a pedal pitch shifter. The effect of the wah
(p. 187).
CLEAN
CRUNCH
MATCH
VO DRV
BLUES
Allows you to obtain a crunch effect that
creates a natural distortion.
Pitch
-24–DETUNE– +24
A simulation of the latest tube amp widely
used in styles from blues and rock.
Allows you to obtain the Liverpool sound of
the 60’s.
Adjusts the amount of pitch shift (the amount of pitch change) in
semitone steps. By selecting “DETUNE,” you can add a slightly
pitch-shifted sound to the input sound, producing a detune effect.
*
This effect can be used when the “P.Shift Type” parameter is set to
“MANUAL.”
A lead sound with a rich middle ideal for
Blues.
BG LEAD
The sound of a tube amp typical of the late
’70s to ’80s, characterized by a distinctive
mid-range.
D:E
100:0–0:100
This adjusts the volume balance of the direct and effect sounds.
Separation
-50– +50
MS (1, 2, 1+2)
The sound of a large tube amp stack that was
indispensable to the British hard rock of the
70’s, and is used to this day by many hard
rock guitarists.
Adjusts the diffusion. The panning of the direct sound and effect
sound can be spread to left and right. This will be effective when
stereo output is used.
1
2
A trebly sound created by using input I of the
guitar amp.
A trebly sound created by using input I of the
guitar amp.
1 + 2
The sound of connecting inputs I and II of the
guitar amp in parallel, creating a sound with a
stronger low end than I.
SLDN
A tube amp sound with versatile distortion,
usable in a wide range of styles.
The sound of a large tube amp, suitable for
heavy metal.
METAL
METAL D
A high gain and powerful metal sound.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
■
With “COSM BASS AMP” or “COSM COMP BSS”
algorithms
Ring Modulator
This creates a bell-like sound by ring-modulating the guitar sound
with the signal from the internal oscillator. The sound will be
unmusical and lack distinctive pitches.
AC
It produces the vintage sound of an early
transistor amp.
AMG
It produces the sound of a large double-stack
vacuum tube amp with ultra-lows and a crisp
edge.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the ring modulator effect on/off.
Frequency
This adjusts the frequency of the internal oscillator.
0–100
Volume
0–100
Adjusts the volume and distortion of the amp.
Fx Level
Adjusts the volume of the effect sound.
0–100
Bass
GUITAR AMP: 0–100, BASS AMP:-100– +100
Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range.
Dir Level
Adjust the volume of the direct sound.
0–100
Middle
GUITAR AMP: 0–100, BASS AMP:-100– +100
Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range.
*
If you have selected “MATCH” or “VO DRV” as the type, the middle
control will have no effect.
Slow Attack
This produces a volume-swell effect (“violin-like” sound).
Treble
GUITAR AMP: 0–100, BASS AMP: -100– +100
Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range.
*
This effect can be used in the “COSM GTR AMP” algorithm when
the MODULATION “Type” parameter is set to “SLOW ATCK.”
Presence
0–100
This can be selected in the “COSM GTR AMP,” “COSM COMP
GTR,” or the “VO+GT.AMP” algorithm.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the slow attack effect on/off.
Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range.
*
If you have selected “MATCH” or “VO DRV” as the type, raising
presence will cut the high range (the value will change from “0” to “-
100”).
RiseTme
10–2000 ms
This adjusts the time needed for the volume to reach its maximum
from the moment you begin picking.
Master
0–100
Level
0–100
Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp.
Adjust the volume of the slow attack sound.
Bright
OFF, ON
(with JC-120, CLEAN, CRUNCH, BLUES, BG LEAD, AC, AMG)
Turns the bright setting on/off.
OFF:
Bright is not used.
ON:
Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone.
Gain
LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH
Adjusts the distortion of the amp. Distortion will successively
increase for settings of “LOW,” “MIDDLE” and “HIGH.”
*
The sound of each Type is created on the basis that the Gain is set to
“MIDDLE.” So, normally set it to “MIDDLE.”
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
Speaker Simulator
Tremolo/Pan
This simulates the characteristics of various types of speakers. When
the output of the BR-900CD is connected directly to a mixer, etc., this
can be used to create the sound of your favorite speakers system.
Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume. Pan
cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right (when
stereo output is used).
*
This effect can be used when the MODULATION “Type” parameter
is set to “TRM/PAN.”
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the speaker simulator effect on/off.
On/Off
OFF, ON
Type
This parameter turns the tremolo/pan effect on/off.
Selects the type of speaker that will be simulated.
Mode
*
“On Mic” simulates the sound when a dynamic microphone is used,
and “Off Mic” simulates the sound when a condenser microphone is
used.
Selects tremolo or pan; also selects how the effect is applied
TRM-TRI:
The volume will change cyclically. Smooth change will be produced.
■ With “COSM GTR AMP,” “COSM COMP GTR,”
or “VO+GT AMP” algorithms
TRM-SQR:
fig.04-128
The volume will change cyclically. Abrupt change will be produced.
SP Simulator
Type
Speaker Microphone
Cabinet
Comments
Unit
Setting
On Mic
On Mic
On Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
OnMic
Off Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
Off Mic
PAN-TRI:
Small open-back enclosure
Open-back enclosure
10 inch
SMALL
MIDDLE
JC-120
TWIN
twin
MATCH
match
VO DRV
vo drv
BG STK
bg stk
MS STK
ms stk
METAL
The sound will be moved cyclically between left and right. Smooth
change will be produced.
12 inch
Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Large Sealed enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Large sealed enclosure 12 inch (two units)
Large sealed enclosure 12 inch (four units)
Large sealed enclosure 12 inch (four units)
Large dual stack 12 inch (four units)
Roland JC-120 Simulation
A setting suitable for CLEAN
A setting suitable for CLEAN
A setting suitable for MATCH
A setting suitable for MATCH
A setting suitable for VO DRV
A setting suitable for VO DRV
A setting suitable for BG LEAD
A setting suitable for BG LEAD
A setting suitable for MS
A setting suitable for MS
PAN-SQR:
The sound will be moved cyclically between left and right. Abrupt
change will be produced.
*
“PAN-TRI” and “PAN-SQR” are obtained with stereo recording
(using two tracks).
Rate
0–100
Adjust the rate at which the effect will operate.
Depth
Adjusts the depth of the effect.
0–100
■ With “COSM BASS AMP” or “COSM COMP
BSS” algorithms
fig.04-129
Voice Transformer
This controls the formants, allowing a variety of voice characters to
be created. This adds two voice characters with differing formants to
the direct sound.
SP Simulator
Type
Speaker Microphone
Comments
Cabinet
Unit
Setting
On Mic
Off Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
Large sealed enclosure 15 inch (two units)
Large sealed enclosure 15 inch (two units)
Large sealed enclosure 10 inch (eight units)
Large sealed enclosure 10 inch (eight units)
A setting suitable for AC
A setting suitable for AC
A setting suitable for AMG
A setting suitable for AMG
AC
ac
AMG
amg
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the voice transformer effect on/off.
Mic Set
CENTER, 1–10 cm
Formant1
-100– +100
-100– +100
0–100
This simulates the microphone position. “CENTER” simulates the
condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker
cone. “1–10 cm” means that the microphone is moved away from the
center of the speaker cone.
Adjust the formant of the voice character 1.
Formant2
Adjust the formant of the voice character 2.
Mic Level
Adjusts the volume of the microphone.
0–100
FX1 Level
Adjust the volume of the voice character 1.
Dir Level
Adjust the volume of the direct sound.
0–100
FX2 Level
Adjust the volume of the voice character 2.
0–100
Dir Level
Adjust the volume of the direct sound.
0–100
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert Effect Parameter Functions
■ When “PEDAL” is selected
The effect of the wah pedal can be obtained by operating the
Expression pedal.
Wah
The wah effect creates a unique tone by changing the frequency
response characteristics of a filter.
Pedal” (p. 187).
Touch wah creates an automatic wah by changing the filter in
response to the volume of the input. Pedal wah lets you use an
Expression pedal or the like to obtain real-time control of the wah
effect.
Peak
0–100
This adjusts the amount of wah effect applied. Lower values provide
a mild wah effect, while higher values result in a sharper wah sound.
With a value of “50” a standard wah sound will be produced.
*
You can use this effect with the following algorithms when
“WAH” is selected for the 4BAND EQ/WAH “Type” setting.
Level
Adjusts the volume.
0–100
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
BASS MULTI
COSM BASS AMP
COSM COMP BSS
STEREO MULTI
On/Off
OFF, ON
Turns the touch wah/pedal wah effect on/off.
Type
Selects either touch wah “TOUCH” or pedal wah “PEDAL.”
TOUCH:
The effect will function as a touch wah.
PEDAL:
The effect will function as a pedal wah.
■ When “TOUCH” is selected
Polarity
Selection for the direction in which the filter will change in response
to the input.
UP:
The frequency of the filter will rise.
DOWN:
The frequency of the filter will fall.
Sens
0–100
This adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the
direction determined by the polarity setting. Higher values will
result in a stronger response. With a setting of “0,” the strength of
picking will have no effect.
Frequency
This adjusts the center frequency of the Wah effect.
0–100
Peak
0–100
This adjusts the amount of wah effect applied. Lower values provide
a mild wah effect, while higher values result in a sharper wah sound.
With a value of “50” a standard wah sound will be produced.
Level
Adjusts the volume.
0–100
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mastering
Use the “Mastering Tool Kit” to produce a two-track master
of the bounce tracks with the levels optimized.
1. Press [REC MODE] several times until “MASTERING”
is indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.
2. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the recording
source V-Track, and then press [ENTER].
What is Mastering Tool Kit?
The Mastering screen appears in the display.
fig.01-801d
When creating an audio CD from your recorded songs,
or recording to an MD or similar media, the overall
volume needs to be restrained, so that even the loudest
portions of the songs are handled appropriately on the
CD or MD. However, this often results in an overall
lowering of the volume, resulting in a CD or MD that
lacks excitement and impact.
Recoding source
Moreover, in the low-frequency range, to which the
human ear is not very sensitive, the sound actually
produced might be perceived as being somewhat low in
volume, even though the meter shows that it’s at the
maximum level. This also makes it difficult to create
powerful sounds.
■ :
❐ :
V-Tracks with recorded data.
V-Tracks without data.
*
At this point, the Mastering Tool Kit is automatically selected
as the effect.
With the “Mastering Tool Kit,” however, you can
smooth out the differences in volume that occur over the
course of a song, while also correcting the balance in the
low end.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the
recording-destination V-track and turn the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the V-Track.
fig.01-802d
We recommend mastering with the Mastering Tool Kit
in the final stage of creating songs.
Recoding-distination
*
The Mastering Tool Kit features 19 pre-programmed
“Preset Patches” (P01–P19), 19 rewritable “User
Patches” (U01–U19), and 19 “Song Patches,” which are
stored individually for each song (S01–S19).
fig.01-800
Memory Card
BR-900CD
Song
Preset
Patch
User
Patch
The REC TRACK button for the track selected as the
recording destination flashes in red.
Song
Patch
4. Press [EFFECTS].
The Mastering Tool Kit selection screen appears in the
display.
“Mastering Tool Kit Patch List” (p. 205)
fig.01-806d
P: Preset / S: Song / U: User
Algorithm
*
In Mastering mode, the following buttons are disabled after
you set the recording source and destination and return to the
the insert effects are connected (p. 87).
Bank
Number Patch Name
Name
[INPUT SELECT], [TUNER], [PAN/EQ],
[LOOP EFFECTS], [PITCH CORRECTION],
[PHRASE TRAINER],
[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF], [EDIT],
[RHYTHM PAD], [V-TRACK], [DELETE/MUTE]
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mastering
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the Preset/Song/
Editing the Mastering Tool Kit
Settings
User patch and number for the Mastering Tool Kit.
To create a new patch, select the patch that most closely
resembles the sound you have in mind from the effects
patches already stored in the unit, then edit its settings.
“Mastering Tool Kit Patch List” (p. 205)
6. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
The overall volume is adjusted by the MASTER fader. At
this time, raise the volume as high as possible without
allowing the sound to distort.
If you wish to save the effect settings that you edited, save
them as a user patch or song patch.
1. Carry out Steps 1–3 from p. 102, and switch to
7. Press [REC].
Mastering mode.
[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the
2. Press [EFFECTS] (MASTERING TOOL KIT).
recording standby state.
fig.01-804
The Mastering Tool Kit selection screen appears.
fig.01-806d
Flash
P: Preset / S: Song / U: User
Algorithm
Bank
Number Patch Name
Name
8. Press [PLAY].
[REC] stop flashing in red and instead light solidly, and
recording starts.
fig.01-805
Lit
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the Preset/Song/
User and number.
9. When you finish mastering, press [STOP].
4. Press CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to “EDIT,” and
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
press [ENTER].
The display switches to the Mastering Tool Kit Edit
screen, which shows the algorithm (the effects used,
shown in the sequence they are connected).
fig.01-807d
You can also display this screen directly by pressing
[ENTER] while the cursor is positioned at the Preset/Song/
User or number.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mastering
fig.01-809d
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to each
effect and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to turn each
effect on or off.
Blocks that are turned on are shown in uppercase letters,
while blocks that are turned off are shown in lowercase
letters. Turn on the effects that you want to use.
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the
effect with the parameter that you want to change and
press [ENTER].
The Parameter Setting screen for each effect appears.
fig.01-808d
2. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
enter the patch name.
*
Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.
3. After you have completed entering the effect settings
and patch name as desired, press [EXIT] to return to the
Kit Selection screen.
7. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select a parameter, and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to edit the value.
8. If you would like to edit another effect, press [EXIT] to
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
return to the previous screen, and repeat steps 5-6.
“WRITE,” and press [ENTER].
9. If you wish to save the current effect settings, perform
the procedure described in “Saving Mastering Tool Kit
Settings,” below.
The Write screen appears.
fig.01-810d
Edited effect settings are temporary. If you exit the Edit
Effect screen without saving the effect patch you changed,
“TMP” appears next to the indication of the bank.
Be aware that if you select a new effect patch while “TMP” is
displayed, the altered effect patch is returned to its original
settings and the changes are lost.
Saving the Mastering Tool
Kit Settings (Write)
5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the patch number
to which to write the new patch.
This assigns a name (patch name) to the edited patch settings
and saves the settings.
6. After you’ve selected the destination, press [ENTER].
*
You cannot write patches while songs are being recorded or
played back.
After the save has been completed, you are returned to
the Mastering Tool Kit selection screen.
*
If you do not need to change patch name, go to step 4.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
1. At the Mastering Tool Kit selection screen, press
CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to “NAME,” and
press [ENTER].
The Patch Name Setting screen appears.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions
Algorithm
fig.04-204
=[ ]=[ ]
]=[
]=[ ]=[
EQ BCUT ENH IN EXP
[
]=[ ]
]=[
]=[
COMP MIX LIM OUT
Equalizer
Bass Cut Filter
Enhancer
Input
Expander
Compressor
Mixer
Limiter
Output
Parameter List
High Mid Q
0.3–16.0
Equalizer
Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the upper-low
range’s center frequency.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the equalizer effect on/off.
High Type
SHELVG, PEAK
Sets the equalizer type (shelving, peaking) for the upper range.
Input Gain
-24 – +12 dB
Sets the overall volume before passing through the equalizer.
High Gain
-12– +12 dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut in the upper range.
Low Type
SHELVG, PEAK
Sets the equalizer type (shelving, peaking) for the lower range.
High Freq
Sets the center frequency for the upper range.
1.4–20.0 kHz
Low Gain
Sets the amount of boost or cut in the lower range.
-12 – +12 dB
High Q
0.3–16.0
Sets the frequency response curve steepness for the upper range’s
center frequency. (*1)
Low Freq
20 Hz–2.0 kHz
0.3–16.0
Sets the center frequency for the lower range.
Output Gain
Sets the overall volume level after equalization.
-24– +12 dB
Low Q
Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the lower
range’s center frequency. (*1)
(*1) The Low Q/Hi Q setting is disabled when “SHELVG” (shelving
type equalization) is selected for the Low Type or High Type.
Low Mid Gain
Sets the amount of boost or cut in the mid-low range.
-12– +12 dB
Low Mid Freq
Sets the center frequency for the mid-low range.
20 Hz–8.0 kHz
Low Mid Q
0.3–16.0
Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the mid-low
range’s center frequency.
High Mid Gain
-12– +12 dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut in the upper-low range.
High Mid Freq
Sets the center frequency for the upper-midrange.
20 Hz–8.0 kHz
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions
Bass Cut Filter
Expander
This is a filter that cuts unwanted low range noise, such as pops.
This expands the dynamic range at a fixed ratio.
On/Off
OFF, ON
On/Off
OFF, ON
-80–0 dB
This setting turns the Bass Cut Filter on/off.
This setting turns the expander on/off.
Freq
20 Hz–2.0 kHz
Lo Thres
This sets the frequency containing popping or other undesirable
lower-range noises that you want to cut.
This sets the volume level at which the lower-range expander goes
into effect.
Lo Ratio
1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This sets the ratio of increase in output of the lower range when the
input level falls below the Lo threshold level.
Enhancer
This adds more liveliness to the sound, putting sounds at the
forefront.
Lo Attack
0–100 ms
This sets the time it takes for the lower-range expander to go into
effect once the input level falls below the Lo threshold level.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the enhancer effect on/off.
Lo Release
50–5000 ms
Sens
0–100
This sets the time it takes for the lower-range expander effect to stop
once the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level.
This sets the amount of Enhancer that is applied.
Freq
1.0–10.0 kHz
Mid Thres
-80–0 dB
Sets the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be
applied.
This sets the volume level at which the midrange expander goes into
effect.
Mix Lvl
Sets the volume of the effect sound.
-24– +12 dB
Mid Ratio
1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This sets the ratio of increase in output of the midrange when the
input level falls below the Middle threshold level.
Mid Attack
0–100 ms
Input
This sets the time it takes for the midrange expander to go into effect
once the input level falls below the Middle threshold level.
This divides the original sound into three frequency ranges: low,
mid, and high.
Mid Release
This sets the time it takes for the midrange expander effect to stop
once the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level.
50–5000 ms
Gain
-24– +12 dB
Sets the overall volume level before the signal passes through the
expander/compressor.
Hi Thres
-80–0 dB
Dly Time
0–10 ms
This sets the volume level at which the upper-range expander goes
into effect.
This sets the amount of time by which the source input sound is
delayed.
Hi Ratio
1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
SplitL
20–800 Hz
This sets the ratio of increase in output of the upper range when the
input level falls below the Hi threshold level.
This sets the frequency (in the lower range) at which the source
sound is split into three separate ranges.
Hi Attack
0–100 ms
SplitH
1.6–16.0 kHz
This sets the time it takes for the upper-range expander to go into
effect once the input level falls below the Hi threshold level.
This sets the frequency (in the upper range) at which the source
sound is split into three separate ranges.
Hi Release
50–5000 ms
This sets the time it takes for the upper-range expander effect to stop
once the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions
Compressor
Mixer
This compresses the overall output signal when the input volume
level exceeds a set value.
Adjusts the volume of each frequency band.
Lo Level
-80– +6 dB
On/Off
OFF, ON
Sets the volume level of the lower range after the signal passes
through the expander and compressor.
This parameter turns the compressor effect on/off.
Lo Thres
-24–0 dB
Mid Level
-80– +6 dB
This sets the volume level at which the lower-range compressor goes
into effect.
Sets the volume level of the midrange after the signal passes through
the expander and compressor.
Lo Ratio
1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This sets the ratio of suppression of the lower-range output when the
input level exceeds the Lo threshold level.
Hi Level
-80– +6 dB
Sets the volume level of the upper range after the signal passes
through the expander and compressor.
Lo Attack
0–100 ms
This sets the time it takes for the lower-range compressor to go into
effect once the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level.
Limiter
This suppresses high-level signals to prevent distortion.
Lo Release
50–5000 ms
On/Off
Sets the limiter to ON or OFF.
OFF, ON
This sets the time it takes for the lower-range compressor effect to
stop once the input level falls below the Lo threshold level.
Thres
-24–0 dB
Mid Thres
-24–0 dB
Adjust this as appropriate for the input signal from your bass.
This sets the volume level at which the midrange compressor goes
into effect.
Attack
0–100 ms
Mid Ratio
1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This sets the time it takes for the limiter to go into effect once the
input level exceeds the threshold level.
This sets the ratio of suppression of the midrange output when the
input level exceeds the Middle threshold level.
Release
50–5000 ms
Mid Attack
0–100 ms
Adjusts the time until when the limiter will turn off after the input
level falls below the threshold level.
This sets the time it takes for the midrange compressor to go into
effect once the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level.
Mid Release
50–5000 ms
Output
This makes settings that affect the overall output.
This sets the time it takes for the midrange compressor effect to stop
once the input level falls below the Middle threshold level.
Level
-80– +6 dB
Hi Thres
-24–0 dB
Sets the volume level of the overall sound after the signal passes
through the limiter.
This sets the volume level at which the upper-range compressor goes
into effect.
Soft Clip
Off, On
Hi Ratio
1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This sets the ratio of suppression of the upper-range output when
the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level.
This suppresses noticeable distortion occurring with heavy use of
the compressor/limiter effect.
Dither
OFF, 24–8 BIT
Hi Attack
0–100 ms
This prevents the action of muting sounds from being too noticeable.
This sets the time it takes for the upper-range compressor to go into
effect once the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level.
Hi Release
50–5000 ms
This sets the time it takes for the upper-range compressor effect to
stop once the input level falls below the Hi threshold level.
*
With the compressor, the level is automatically adjusted to the
optimum setting according to the threshold (Thres) and ratio (Ratio)
settings. In addition, since lengthening the attack (Attack) setting
may result in distortion, a buffer (margin) of -6 dB is provided. Adjust
the Mixer level as needed.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ
Here is an explanation of how to change the various
parameters for the loop effects (chorus/delay/doubling/
reverb).
When using REV
Select either “HALL” or “ROOM.”
fig.01-703d
Parameter Functions” (p. 111).
Loop effects do not have “patches.” Loop effect settings are
saved along with the song data.
4. To change the settings for the selected effect, press
CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the parameter and turn the
If you want to save the settings in the currently selected song,
hold down [STOP], and press [REC].
TIME/VALUE dial to change the set value.
fig.01-704d
Selecting the Loop Effect
*
You cannot use the chorus, delay, and doubling effects
together. You must choose only one.
1. Press [LOOP EFFECTS].
“Loop Effect Parameter Functions” (p. 111).
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “CHO/
DLY” or “REV,” and press [ENTER].
fig.01-701d
5. When you finish making settings,
press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the PLAY screen.
Doubling
When you want to spread out the guitar backing sound
to the left and right, record the same guitar backing
separately to two tracks, then pan the sounds to the left
and right. This is known as “doubling.”
By using the “DBLN” loop effect, you can produce a
doubling effect even from a single-track (mono)
recording, allowing you to make more efficient use of
the tracks.
*
If you want to emphasize the doubling effect, pan the track
completely to the right or to the left and increase the
doubling effect level. In addition, use the following
procedure to raise the send level.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] until “FX Type” or “Type” is
displayed, then turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
loop effect.
When using CHO/DLY
Select from “CHORUS,” “DELAY,” or “DBLN”
(doubling).
fig.01-702d
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ
Adjusting How the Loop
Effect is Applied
The following explains how you can alter the volume of the
signals sent by each track to the loop effects (the send level),
and control the degree to which the loop effects are applied.
If you then press CURSOR [ ], the screen for setting
the input-source send level appears in the display; if you
press CURSOR [ ], the one for setting the Rhythm
send level is displayed.
fig.01-708d
1. Press [LOOP EFFECTS].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “CHO/
DLY” or “REV,” and press [ENTER].
fig.01-705d
fig.01-709d
To adjust the send level for the input source, move the
cursor to “In Send.” To adjust the send level for the
Rhythm, move the cursor to “Rhy Send.” The setting is
adjusted by turning the TIME/VALUE dial to the
desired value.
5. After you have completed adjusting the send level,
press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the screen for setting
the send level of each track appears.
You can switch screens in the following sequence, with the
screen cycling to the next screen each time [LOOP EFFECTS]
is pressed.
When using CHO/DLY
fig.01-706d
Loop Effects selection screen → Send Level screen →
Type screen → Play screen
When using REV
fig.01-707d
4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
the send level for each track.
*
Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track
corresponding to the button pressed.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ
Setting the Track EQ
This section explains how to edit the Track EQ settings
(parameters).
Parameter Functions” (p. 112).
Track EQ do not have “patches.” Loop effect settings are
saved along with the song data.
If you want to save the settings in the currently selected song,
hold down [STOP], and press [REC].
1. Press [PAN/EQ].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EQ,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.01-711d
3. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
set the EQ On/Off for each track.
*
Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track
corresponding to the button pressed.
4. To change the EQ settings, press CURSOR [
]
repeatedly to display the parameter screen, then turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to change the settings value.
fig.01-712d
5. After you have completed the setting, press [EXIT]
repeatedly to return to the Play screen
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loop Effect Parameter Functions
Parameter List
CHORUS/DELAY/DBLN (Doubling)
REVERB
This selects the chorus, delay, or doubling effect.
Reverberation (or reverb) is the effect caused by sound waves
decaying in an acoustic space, or a digital simulation thereof. This
decay occurs because sound waves bounce off many walls, ceilings,
objects, etc. in a very complex way. These reflections, coupled with
absorption by various objects, dissipate the acoustic energy over a
certain period of time (called the decay time). The ear perceives this
phenomenon as a continuous wash of sound.
FX Type
This sets the type of the effect.
CHORUS:
A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound,
making the final output sound thicker and broader.
DELAY:
Type
This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the
direct sound.
This selects the Reverb Type.
ROOM:
DBLN:
Simulates the reverberation in a small room.
By adding a slightly time-delayed sound to the direct sound, this
produces the impression that multiple sources are sounding together
(a “doubling” effect). The delayed sound will be output from the
side opposite to which the playback track has been panned.
HALL:
Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall.
Rev Time
0.1–10.0
-12– +12
0–100
This parameter adjusts the duration (time) of the reverb.
■ When “CHORUS” is selected
Tone
Adjusts the tone.
Rate
0–100
0 –100
Adjusts the rate of the Chorus effect.
E.Level
Depth
This adjusts the volume of the reverb sound.
Adjusts the depth of the Chorus effect.
Pre Dly
0.5–50.0 ms
Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the
direct sound has been output.
E.Level
Adjusts the volume of the effect sound.
0–100
■ When “DELAY” is selected
Dly Tme
10–1000 ms
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).
Feedback
0–100
This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback. Changing the
amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is
repeated to change as well.
E.Level
0–100
This adjusts the volume of the delay sound.
Rev Send
0–100
Adjust the volume of the reverb that is applied to the delayed sound.
■ When “DBLN” is selected
Dly Tme
0.5–50.0 ms
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).
E.Level
0–100
This adjusts the volume of the delay sound.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track EQ Parameter Functions
Parameter List
This is a two-band equalizer that is independent for each track.
If you adjust the equalizer while listening to the sound, you
may notice a clicking noise. This is not a malfunction. If the
noise is objectionable, make adjustments while the sound is
not playing.
On/Off
OFF, ON
This parameter turns the equalizer effect on/off.
LoG
-12– +12 dB
This sets the gain (-12 to +12 dB) for the low-range equalizer
(shelving type).
LoF
40 Hz–1.5 kHz
This sets the center frequency (40Hz to 1.5 kHz) for the low-range
equalizer (shelving type).
HiG
-12 – +12 dB
This sets the gain (-12 to +12 dB) for the high-range equalizer
(shelving type).
HiF
500 Hz–18 kHz
This sets the center frequency (500 Hz to 18 kHz) for the high-range
equalizer (shelving type).
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)
The Pitch Correction
The term Pitch Correction is used to describe a group of effects that are used on recorded vocal tracks to fix incorrect pitches.
When compared with guitars, pianos, and other musical instruments, the human voice generally produces a relatively unstable
tone. And when recording unprepared vocalists, this can often lead to considerable difficulties in the form of notes sung out of
tune and poor sound quality.
When properly used, the BR-900CD’s Pitch Correction will help to ensure that your vocal tracks will always sound great.
Makeup of the Pitch Correction
This effect is intended for use with the playback of recorded audio tracks and cannot be used on input sources.
The Pitch Correction and audio tracks are connected as shown below.
fig.35-01
Chorus / Delay
Send
L
CHORUS/
MIX
DELAY
R
Track Pan
L
PITCH
CORRECTION
Track
EQUALIZER
MIX
MIX
R
L
R
REVERB
Reverb Send
Pitch Correction Patches
In the case of pitch correction, you can set up the way in which the effect is to be applied and can then save these settings. A group
of such settings is referred to as a Patch.
At the time of purchase, a total of 5 pitch correction patches (i.e., preset patches) will be stored in the BR-900CD. In addition, 5
song patches can be set up for use within a specific song.
Precautions for Pitch Correction Usage
• When you are using the Pitch Correction, you will not be able to use insert effects, or the Mastering Tool Kit.
• The Pitch Correction is intended for use with recorded vocal tracks and it cannot be applied to input sources or the Master output.
• These effects will function when applied to solo performances other than vocals; however, the fundamental differences
between the character of the human voice and that of musical instruments makes it highly unlikely that the desired result will
be achieved.
• In the following situations, the Pitch Correction may not be able to accurately detect the pitch, and normal operation will not
be possible.
-
-
-
-
-
*
When other sounds are mixed in with the solo vocal part.
When the volume of the vocal part is excessively loud or quiet.
When the vocal part contains a lot of sibilance or is very breathy (such as a singer that whispers, or one with a husky voice).
When the vocal part contains an excessive number of different pitches (such as fast, deep vibrato or fast speech)
When the part is sung with a very low voice containing a lot of harmonics.
If the BR-900CD is frequently incorrect when detecting the pitch, either change the “Type” setting for the pitch correction function.
In certain cases, this will reduce the number of incorrect detections.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)
8. Press a track button to select the track for recording the
Using the Pitch Correction
corrected vocal part.
The track button will turn red and start flashing to
indicate selection as the recording track.
Let’s now use the BR-900CD’s pitch correction feature to
clean up some mistakes in a solo vocal part.
Using this feature, we will be able to correct pitches in real
time and in semitone units.
9. Move the faders for all tracks except the track
containing the solo vocal recording all the way down.
Note that this also applies to the Rhythm fader.
1. Before using pitch correction, record a solo vocal track
to work with.
10.Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song and then
press [REC].
2. Press [REC MODE] several times until the BOUNCE
[REC] will turn red and start to flash, indicating that the
BR-900CD is now ready for recording.
indicator lights up.
The BR-900CD will now enter Bounce mode.
11.Press [PLAY].
3. Press [PITCH CORRECTION].
Both [PLAY] and [REC] will light up and recording will
start. The solo part will be played and any incorrect
pitches will be fixed. At the same time, the corrected part
will be recorded on the selected track.
This button will light up to indicate that the Pitch
Correction is turned on.
The Pitch Correction patch selection screen will appear.
fig.35-06d
12.Press [STOP] at the point where you want to stop
recording.
The BR-900CD will stop playback.
13.Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song once again
and then start playback of the recorded track.
Move the fader for the track containing the original vocal
part all the way down, and raise the fader for the track
containing the corrected vocal part to an appropriate
point. As you listen to the corrected part, confirm
whether or not you are happy with the corrections.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“LOCAT,” and press [ENTER].
fig.35-08d
Undo (p. 57) to cancel the recording.
14.After you have completed entering the settings, press
5. Use TIME/VALUE dial to select the track containing
[EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
the solo vocal recording.
The following tracks can be selected at this time:
Tracks 1 through 6, Tracks 7/8
6. Start playback on the BR-900CD.
Pitches will be corrected in the solo vocal part as it is
played. Listen to the part to confirm that it is now
completely in tune, and if necessary, adjust the volume
of the part using the corresponding track fader.
Press [STOP] to end playback.
7. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the patch number
and select a patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
“Pitch Correction Patch List” (p. 205)
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)
4. Press [EXIT].
Setting the Correction Method for
Vocal Pitch (Pitch Correction Edit)
The Pitch Correction’s patch selection screen will appear.
fig.35-06d
Each of the preset patches 1 through 5 uses a slightly
different method for correcting pitches. Normally, it will be
sufficient to select the patch that gives the results you like
best; however, if you cannot achieve favorable results using
any of these patches, you can change the Pitch Correction
settings to create a patch of your own.
5. To save your modified settings, carry out the procedure
described in “Saving the Pitch Correction Settings
(Write)” below.
1. Select a preset patch to base your new patch on.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “EDIT,”
and press [ENTER].
Saving the Pitch Correction
Settings (Write)
The Pitch Correction edit screen will appear.
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the setting you
Modified Pitch Correction settings are saved by writing them
together under a new patch name.
want to change and select a new value using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
fig.35-05d
*
*
You cannot write patches while songs are being recorded or
played back.
If you do not need to change patch name, go to step 4.
1. At the Pitch Correction patch selection screen, press
CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to “NAME,” and
press [ENTER].
Type LO.MALE, HI.MALE, LO.FEML, HI.FEML
Set this parameter to match the type of voice in the original
vocal part. If this parameter is not set correctly, problems will be
more likely to occur in pitch detection and correction.
The Patch Name Setting screen appears.
fig.35-11d
LO.MALE (Low Male)
Select this setting for a low-pitched, male voice.
HI.MALE (High Male)
Select this setting for a high-pitched, male voice.
LO.FEML (Low Female)
Select this setting for a low-pitched, female voice.
2. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
enter the patch name.
HI.FEML (High Female)
Select this setting for a high-pitched, female voice.
*
Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.
*
If the BR-900CD is frequently incorrect when detecting the
pitch, either change the type setting. In certain cases, this will
reduce the number of incorrect detections.
3. After you have completed entering the effect settings
and patch name as desired, press [EXIT] to return to the
Patch selection screen.
Smooth
0–100
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
This setting determines how quickly pitch correction will react
to changes of pitch in the original vocal part. Large values result
in a longer time before correction is applied; consequently,
changes in pitch will be more gradual. Small values produce
rapid changes in pitch.
“WRITE,” and press [ENTER].
The Write screen appears.
fig.35-12d
Corrections that are made too rapidly seem robotic.
However, if the correction is too smooth, in some cases it may
appear as if no correction has been applied. For natural
sounding pitch corrections, set the value in a range between 20
and 40.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)
5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the patch number
You can make corrections freely at the desired points in
the song by arranging correction events in the sequence
they occur.
The sequence of correction events with the information
they contain is called a “correction event map.”
to which to write the new patch.
6. After you’ve selected the destination, press [ENTER].
After the save has been completed, you are returned to
the Pitch Correction patch selection screen.
Initially, only one correction event, “AUTO,” is input at
the beginning of the correction event map.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
AUTO:
After the specified point in the song, all pitches are
corrected in semitone increments.
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “INSERT” and
Making Detailed Settings for Pitch
Correction (Correction Event Map)
press [ENTER].
A new correction event is inserted.
In the procedures described thus far, what has been
explained is how to correct the overall pitch for the entire
song, from start to finish, in semitone increments.
In actual practice, however, there may be situations where
you want to correct only a certain section or adjust the pitch
differently. In such instances, use the following procedure.
4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “Time” and
1. Start by switching to BOUNCE mode and selecting the
specify the time at which you want the correction to
patch to which pitch correction is to be applied.
start with the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.03-368d
2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “P.MAP” in the
Pitch Correction patch selection screen and press
[ENTER].
Smth
(Correction Speed)
Time
Note
The Correction Event Map screen appears.
fig.03-366d
You cannot change the time of the correction event at the
start of the song.
In the Correction Event Map screen, you can input the
time at which you want the pitch correction to start as
well as the pitch.
5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “Note” and specify
the pitch you want to correct with the TIME/VALUE dial.
Taken together, this timing and pitch data is referred to
as a “correction event.”
Note:
OFF
fig.03-367
No correction is made after the specified point in the
song. The song is played using the original pitch.
Correction
start point
Next event
start point
Pitch
Correction
pitch
AUTO
After the specified point in the song, all pitches are
corrected in semitone increments.
Vocal pitch
C, C#, –A#, B
The performance after the specified point in the song is
adjusted to the specified pitch.
Time
pitch. See “Setting the Reference Pitch of the Tuner” (p. 189).
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)
6. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “Smth” and
specify the correction speed.
You can only save a Correction Event Map to a single song.
Even if you switch the patch with the pitch correction, the
Correction Event Map remains unchanged.
Smth (Smooth)
-100–+100
patch parameter (p. 115).
When set to 0, the correction proceeds at the rate set in
the patch’s “Smooth” parameter.
The correction is performed more rapidly the lower the
value is compared to the value set for the patch, while
the correction is carried out more smoothly as the value
increases relative to the patch’s value.
Make this setting so that the sum is in the range from 0 to
100. No effect is achieved if the resulting value is lower than
0 or greater than 100.
7. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “INSERT” and
press [ENTER].
Another new correction event is inserted.
8. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “TIME” and
specify the time at which you want the correction to
end with the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.03-368d
Smth
(Correction Speed)
Time
Note
9. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “NOTE” and
specify “OFF.”
10.Have the Recorder play the song from the beginning.
The correction is first applied at the point in the song
specified in Step 4, with the correction ending at the
point specified in Step 8.
11.To delete any unnecessary correction events, move the
cursor to the event and press [DELETE/MUTE].
The correction event is deleted.
You cannot delete the correction event at the beginning of the
song. If this correction event is unneeded, rather than
deleting it, just set the function to “OFF.”
12.Repeat Steps 3–11 as needed to specify the edited
range.
13.After you have completed entering the settings, press
[EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Rhythm
The “Rhythm” is a dedicated Rhythm track that can not only
play back Rhythm sounds as a guide during recording, you
can also use it to play internal Rhythm patterns and original
user-created Rhythm patterns and to play and record these
patterns as your own Rhythm part performances.
E (Ending)
Music patterns to be placed at the ending of a song.
Song patterns (S001–S100)
These are patterns whose data is rewritable, and up to 100
The Rhythm features two modes, “Pattern mode” and
“Arrangement mode.”
different patterns for each song can be stored on memory
cards.
fig.03-101a
Memory Card
BR-900CD
Pattern Mode
Song
You can perform patterns and create your own original
Preset
Pattern
Song
Pattern
patterns.
Arrangement Mode
You can perform arrangements and create your own original
About the Arrangements
arrangements.
Arrangements are sequences of patterns arranged in the
order they are performed and with the tempo set.
fig.03-102
About the Patterns
These are phrases consisting of from one to several measures
of drum performance.
Intro
Tempo: 120.0
Verse
Tempo: 110.0
Fill
Tempo: 130.0
Types of patterns
Types of arrangements
Preset arrangements (P01–P50)
These are internal arrangements stored in the BR-900CD that
have already been prepared for use. There are 50 patterns
categorized by musical genre, such as “rock” and “jazz.”
Preset patterns (P001–P327)
These are internal patterns stored in the BR-900CD that have
already been prepared for use. There are 327 patterns
categorized by musical genre, such as “rock” and “jazz.”
*
You cannot change and overwrite Preset pattern data.
*
You cannot change and overwrite Preset arrangement data.
In each Preset arrangement (except for Metro 4/4), a BREAK
(rest) of three measures is played after the END (ending), and
then the V1 (verse 1) is played repeatedly.
Preset patterns include prepared patterns for intros, verses,
fill-ins, and endings (you can confirm the type by looking at
the characters at the end of the pattern name).
(Example)
ROCK1-IN (Intro)
ROCK1-V1 (Verse 1)
ROCK1-F1 (Fill 1)
ROCK1-V2 (Verse2)
ROCK1-F2 (Fill 2)
ROCK1-E (Ending)
“Preset Arrangement List” (p. 206)
Song arrangements (S01–S05)
These are arrangements whose data is rewritable, and up to 5
different arrangements for each song can be stored on
“Preset Pattern List” (p. 207)
memory cards.
fig.03-102a
IN (Intro)
Memory Card
BR-900CD
Music patterns to be placed at the beginning of a song.
Song
Preset
Arrangement
V (Verse) 1 and 2
Music patterns to make up the main part of the song. “1” are
Song
Arrangement
basic patterns and “2” are more advanced versions of “1.”
F (Fill) 1 and 2
Music patterns to be used as phrases to connect different
sections of a song. You can select either “1” or “2” depending
on the form that will follow the fill.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Rhythm
Switching the Rhythm Mode
The Rhythm mode switches each time [ARRANGE/
PATTERN/OFF] is pressed.
Performing Arrangements
and Patterns
Selecting arrangements
This procedure selects the arrangement to be played with the
[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF]: Lit
(Arrangement Mode)
Rhythm.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
fig.03-201d
Performance and programming of arrangements is enabled.
Press [PLAY] to start the performance of the arrangement.
P: Preset / S: Song
Arrangement
*
You cannot play back or record during programming.
Number
Name
[ARRANGE/PATTREN/OFF]: Flashing
(Pattern Mode)
Performance and programming of patterns is enabled.
Press [PLAY] to start the performance of the pattern.
*
You cannot play back or record during programming.
2. Select the arrangement.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF]: Unlit (OFF)
The Rhythm does not play.
P01–P50: Preset arrangements 1–50
S01–S05: Song arrangements 1–5
3. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
Recording Rhythm
Performances
When you want to record Rhythm performances, be sure to
record (bounce) in Bounce mode.
Performing arrangements
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
fig.03-202d
You can have only the Rhythm performance be recorded by
bringing down all of the faders except the Rhythm fader.
Multiple Tracks Together (Bounce)” (p. 58).
2. Select an arrangement.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
3. Move the RHYTHM fader to the positions shown in the
figure below.
fig.03-203
4. Press [ZERO] to reset the play position back to the
beginning of the arrangement, then press [PLAY].
The selected arrangement is performed.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Rhythm
Selecting patterns
This selects the pattern to be played with the Rhythm.
Changing the tempo of the
arrangements or patterns
You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or
pattern being played by carrying out the following
procedure while the Play screen is displayed.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-203d
P: Preset / S: Song
Pattern
*
The arrangement’s tempo setting is temporarily disabled.
Number
Name
1. Press [CURSOR] and align the cursor up with
“TEMPO” in the display.
2. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the tempo.
fig.03-205d
Tempo
2. Select a pattern.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
P001–P327: Preset patterns 1–327
S001–S100: Song patterns 1–100
*
*
the arrangement’s actual tempo, refer to p. 123.
3. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
Tempos cannot be saved to patterns.
Performing patterns
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
Tapping to change the tempo of
the arrangements or patterns
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-204d
You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or
pattern by the timing with which you press [TAP].
Tap on [TAP] four or more times to change the tempo of the
arrangement or pattern. The tempo becomes that in which
you tapped.
fig.03-206
2. Select a pattern.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
3. Move the RHYTHM fader to the positions shown in the
figure below.
fig.03-203
*
*
the arrangement’s actual tempo, refer to p. 123.
Tempos cannot be saved to patterns.
4. Press [PLAY].
The selected pattern is performed.
No sound plays if “BREAK” is selected for the pattern.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Arrangements
You can create arrangements (Song arrangements) of up to
999 measures.
Starting Measure
Set the measure where the pattern that is selected by the
current step will start playing.
fig.03-303a
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
Step 1
Step 2
indicator is lit.
fig.03-301d
Intro
(1 measure)
Verse
(1 measure)
Strating
Measure 001
002
003
Set the starting measure to “3” in step 2
Step 1
Step 2
Intro
Verse
(2 measures)
(1 measure)
Strating
Measure 001
002
003
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
*
*
*
The starting measure for step 1 is always set to “001.” This
cannot be changed.
select the Arrangement number.
3. Press [EDIT].
You cannot set a starting measure that is equal to, or earlier
than the starting measure that is set for the previous step.
The Arrangement Edit screen appears.
fig.03-302d
You cannot set a starting measure that is beyond the starting
measure of the next step.
Pattern Number
Select the pattern. Set the patterns for each step as shown
in the figure below.
fig.03-304
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
4. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “STEP,” and
Intro
(2 measures)
Tempo: 120.0
Verse
Fill
(1 measure)
(1 measure)
press [ENTER].
Tempo: 110.0
Tempo: 110.0
Starting
Measure
The Recording Standby screen appears.
001
003
004
*
You cannot switch from the Recording Standby screen for
arrangements to other screens (except for the drum kit
selection screen).
*
When an arrangement is played from within the Play screen,
the arrangement plays all the way to the end, and then the
performance of the pattern set in the last step is repeated.
Thus, by setting the preset pattern “P327 BREAK” for the last
step, you can have a rest be played repeatedly, which makes it
seem as if the performance of the arrangement has stopped.
fig.03-303d
Pattern Number
Starting Measure
Step
Time Signature
fig.03-304a
Step 1
Step 2
Verse
Step **
Step **
P327
BREAK
Intro
Ending
Time Signature
Set the time signature of the pattern that is selected by
the current step.
Tempo Pattern Name
Information about the performance is displayed in the
matrix display at the bottom of the screen.
Tempo
Set the tempo of the pattern that is selected by the
current step.
5. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “Step,” then turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to select the step to be edited.
Valid Settings: 25.0–250.0
*
You can press [REW] to move to the immediately preceding
step, or press [FF] to move to the next step.
7. When you have finished creating the arrangement,
press [EXIT] repeatedly.
6. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter
you want to change, then turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting’s value.
The Play screen is displayed again, and the arrangement
is saved.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
*
You can press [PLAY] here to play the sound of the pattern in
the currently selected step.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Arrangements
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
Inserting a Step
Perform the procedure below to insert a new step into the
location of the present step.
fig.03-305
2. Press [EDIT].
The Arrangement Edit screen appears.
Verse
Insert
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “STEP,” and
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
press [ENTER].
Intro
Verse
Fill
The Recording Standby screen appears.
4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
step to be erased.
fig.03-308d
Intro
Verse
Verse
Fill
*
The parameter value of inserted step will be the same as of the
targeted step.
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
2. Press [EDIT].
5. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to
The Arrangement Edit screen appears.
“ERASE” and press [ENTER].
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “STEP,” and
To cancel the operation, press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly
to return to the Arrangement Edit screen.
press [ENTER].
The Recording Standby screen appears.
When you press [ENTER], the display indicate “Erase!”
then return to the Recording Standby screen.
4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
location (step) where the data is to be inserted.
fig.03-306d
Naming Arrangements
You can edit the name of the currently selected arrangement.
*
You can use up to eight characters in naming arrangements.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to
2. Press [EDIT].
“INSERT” and press [ENTER].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to
To cancel the operation, press CURSOR [ ] to return to
the Arrangement Edit screen.
“NAME,” and press [ENTER].
The Change Arrangement Name screen appears.
fig.03-310d
When you press [ENTER], the display indicate “Insert!”
then return to the Recording Standby screen.
Erasing a Step
This erases the content of the currently selected step. The
content of the following steps are brought forward to fill the
erased step.
fig.03-307
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Intro
Verse
Fill
Verse
Erase
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Intro
Verse
Verse
*
No further data can be deleted when only Step 1 remains.
*
You cannot change Preset arrangement names.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Arrangements
7. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and turn the TIME/VALUE
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line of
the display, while the lower line shows what is being processed.
dial to change the characters.
*
Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.
5. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
Erasing Arrangements
This erases Step 2 and all subsequent steps in the
arrangement currently being selected.
*
“Metro” (the metronome) is set in Step 1.
Copying Arrangements
You can take the currently selected arrangement and copy it
to another Song arrangement.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
2. Press [EDIT].
The Arrangement Edit screen appears.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “ERASE,” and
press [ENTER].
fig.03-315d
2. Press [EDIT].
The Arrangement Edit screen appears.
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “COPY,” and
press [ENTER].
The screen for selecting the copy destination is
displayed.
fig.03-312d
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the arrangement
to be erased.
S01–S05: Song arrangements 1–5
5. If you want to erase the arrangement, press [ENTER].
The screen for confirming the deletion appears.
fig.03-316d
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copy-
destination arrangement.
S01–S05: Song arrangements 1–5
5. Once you have decided on the copy destination, press
[ENTER].
The screen for confirming the copy destination appears.
fig.03-313d
6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to erase the arrangement.
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).
7. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to copy.
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Patterns
When creating a Rhythm arrangement by stringing together
Note concerning creation of patterns
Rhythm patterns, there may be times when you do not find
anything suitable among the preset Rhythm patterns, or
when you want to get a Rhythm pattern that sounds exactly
the way you want. In such cases, you can create your own
original Rhythm patterns.
●
Maximum polyphony for patterns is five voices. This
means you can play up to five drum sounds with the
same timing.
●
Even if six or more drum sounds are input at the same
time, only five of the drum sounds will be sounded.
However, the “■” signifying the entry in the matrix
display remains as is.
There are three ways to create Rhythm patterns.
Realtime Recording
●
●
You cannot play the CLOSED HH and OPEN HH
sounds at the same time. However, the “■” signifying
the entry in the matrix display remains as is.
In Realtime Recording, you record while tapping the TRACK
buttons in time with the metronome. Rhythm patterns are
played back repeatedly, and the data being input is mixed in
with these sounds. Additionally, even if your timing is a little
off when tapping the buttons, you can use the Quantize
function to rectify the input so the timing is correct.
When using cymbals and other sounds that have
lengthy decay times, if other sounds totalling five
voices are input before the previous sound has
completely vanished, Sounds started previously may
be cut off before they finish playing.
Step Recording
In Step Recording, the timing of sounds and the drum
sounds are programmed one at a time. There are two ways to
input drum sounds:
●
You cannot switch to other screens while recording
patterns (except for the pattern record standby screen).
Creating Patterns in Realtime
Recording
• Specifying the timing of a sound (measure-beat-click),
and inputting the drum sound at that point by tapping
the TRACK button.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
• Inputting a drum sound at the desired timing within the
detailed framework dividing a single measure (the
matrix). This allows you to visually get an overall grasp
of the Rhythm pattern, making for a simple way to create
Rhythm patterns.
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-401d
Importing SMFs
You can import SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) as song patterns.
2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-402d
For instructions on this procedure, refer to p. 169 or p. 179.
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “REAL,” and
press [ENTER].
“REAL” appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The Recording Standby screen appears.
fig.03-403d
Measure
Tempo
Time Signature Quantize
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Patterns
4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
measure, beat, and click from which to start recording
of the pattern.
The current velocity value is briefly indicated where the
beat value normally appears.
fig.03-404d
Measure
This sets the number of measures in the pattern to be
recorded.
Valid Settings: 1–999
Tempo
When recording, this sets the tempo for confirming the
Velocity
pattern.
7. Input the drum sounds with the desired timing.
Valid Settings: 25.0–250.0
Use REC TRACK [1]–[6] to input the drum sounds.
*
The tempo setting here is exclusively for confirmation of the
pattern recording. This tempo is not stored in the pattern (you
cannot make any individual tempo settings for the patterns
themselves).
You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum sounds by
pressing [RHYTHM PAD].
[RHYTHM PAD] Lit
Enables input of the UPPER drum sounds.
Time Signature
This sets the time signature (i.e., the beat) for the pattern
REC TRACK [1]
REC TRACK [2]
REC TRACK [3]
REC TRACK [4]
REC TRACK [5]
REC TRACK [6]
KICK
to be recorded.
SNARE
Valid Settings: 1/1–8/1, 1/2–8/2, 1/4–8/4, 1/8–8/8
CLOSED HIHAT
OPEN HIHAT
CRASH CYMBAL
RIDE CYMBAL
Quantize
This sets the recording quantization.
Setting Quantize lets you to have the sounds being input
conform to preset note lengths, thus eliminating
discrepancies in the input timing.
[RHYTHM PAD] Flashing
Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds.
*
Press “HI” you want to keep the timing used to input the
sounds.
REC TRACK [1]
REC TRACK [2]
REC TRACK [3]
REC TRACK [4]
REC TRACK [5]
REC TRACK [6]
CROSS STICK
COWBELL
TOM1
Valid Settings:
Quarter note
Sixteenth-note triplet
Thirty-second note
Thirty-second-note triplet
TOM2
Quarter-note triplet
Eighth note
TOM3
TOM4
Eighth-note triplet
Sixteenth note
HI
You can confirm the drum sound currently being input
by checking the matrix at the bottom part of the display.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “REC,”
Indicated in the matrix
You can confirm the timing at which each rhythm
and press [ENTER].
The count-in is played, and then Realtime Recording
starts.
instrument sounds in the matrix display.
The ▼ mark in the lower part of the matrix indicates beat
*
You can also start Realtime Recording by pressing the [REC]
button.
timing.
6. Set the velocity (how “hard” the note is played) for the
sounds to be input from the current point by adjusting
Fader 1.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Patterns
*
When a coarse Quantize setting is used, the ▼ mark may
Rehearsing recordings
indicate half-note or quarter-note timing.
You can practice (rehearse) your performances along with
the metronome before carrying out Realtime Recording.
During rehearsals, the drum sounds are only played, and are
not recorded to the pattern even if you press the track
buttons.
fig.03-405
Ex.)
CLOSED HH
SNARE
KICK
• Q (Quantize) =
• Q (Quantize) =
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-411d
fig.03-405a
Ex.)
CLOSED HH
SNARE
2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-407d
KICK
• Q (Quantize) =
When using high-resolution Quantize settings, you may
be unable to view the entire pattern, from start to finish,
in the display at one time.
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “REAL,” and
press [ENTER].
In such instances, a “
” symbol appears, indicating
that there is material not currently displayed.
fig.03-405b
“REAL” appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The Recording Standby screen appears.
fig.03-408d
You can press [REC MODE] during Realtime
Recording to switch to Step Recording.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to
Using this option allows you to switch to Step
Recording temporarily when you want to change the
set velocity or input drum sounds input with the
sounds (instructions: p. 132), and then switch back to
Realtime Recording and continue recording the
pattern.
“RHR,” and press [ENTER].
The BR-900CD is put into Rehearsal mode.
fig.03-409d
8. Set the tempo and Quantize values as needed.
9. When you have finished inputting sounds, move the
cursor to “STOP” and press [ENTER].
*
You can also stop recording by pressing [STOP].
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Patterns
5. Rehearse the performance by pressing the REC TRACK
Changing the metronome volume
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-411d
[1]–[6].
You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum sounds by
pressing [RHYTHM PAD].
*
At this point, adjust Fader 1 to confirm the velocity status.
6. When you have finished rehearsing, move the cursor to
“STOP” and press [ENTER].
*
You can also quit the rehearsal by pressing [STOP].
2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-412d
Deleting unneeded drum sounds
You can delete any drum sounds you do not need during
Realtime Recording by holding down [DELETE/MUTE] and
pressing the track buttons.
1. When you hold down [DELETE/MUTE] and press one
or more REC TRACK buttons for the tones you want to
delete.
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “REAL,” and
The corresponding drum sounds are deleted for as long
press [ENTER].
as the buttons are pressed.
fig.03-410
“REAL” appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The Recording Standby screen appears.
fig.03-413d
4. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to
“Click.”
fig.03-414d
5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the metronome
volume.
Valid Settings: 0–3
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Patterns
Time Signature
This sets the time signature (i.e., the beat) for the pattern
to be recorded.
Creating Patterns in Step
Recording
Valid Settings: 1/1–8/1, 1/2–8/2, 1/4–8/4, 1/8–8/8
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-415d
Quantize
This sets the resolution for the steps being input.
Quarter note (96)
Sixteenth-note triplet (16)
Quarter-note triplet (64)
Eighth note (48)
Thirty-second note (12)
Thirty-second-note triplet (8)
(1)
Eighth-note triplet (32) HI
Sixteenth note (24)
2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-416d
Numerals in parentheses indicate the clock. The lower
the value set, the finer the resolution each beat becomes.
(Ex.) ꢀ : Here you can input sounds in eighth-note lengths.
fig.03-418d
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “STEP,” and
press [ENTER].
“STEP” appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The recording standby screen appears in the display.
(Ex.) ꢁ : Here you can input sounds in sixteenth-note lengths.
fig.03-417d
fig.03-419d
Measure
Tempo
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “REC,”
Time Signature
Quantize
and press [ENTER].
Step Recording starts.
4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
measure, beat, and quantize from which to start
recording of the pattern.
*
You can also start recording by pressing [REC].
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the
measure, beat, and clock, then turn the TIME/VALUE
dial to specify the time at which the drum sound is to
Measure
This sets the number of measures in the pattern to be
recorded.
be input.
fig.03-420d
Valid Settings: 1–999
Measure Beat Clock
Tempo
When recording, this sets the tempo for confirming the
pattern.
Valid Settings: 25.0–250.0
*
The tempo setting here is exclusively for confirmation of the
pattern recording. This tempo is not stored in the pattern (you
cannot make any individual tempo settings for the patterns
themselves).
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Patterns
fig.03-421d
7. Set the velocity (how “hard” the note is played) for the
sounds to be input from the current point by adjusting
Fader 1.
fig.03-423d
Indicated in the matrix
You can confirm the timing with which each rhythm
instrument sounds in the matrix display.
Velocity
The ▼ mark in the lower part of the matrix indicates beat
8. Input the drum sounds.
timing.
There are two ways to input drum sounds.
*
When a coarse Quantize setting is used, the ▼ mark may
indicate half-note or quarter-note timing.
fig.03-422
(Method 1) Inputting with the REC TRACK buttons
Use REC TRACK [1]–[6] to input the drum sounds.
Ex.)
CLOSED HH
SNARE
You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum
sounds by pressing [RHYTHM PAD].
KICK
[RHYTHM PAD] Lit
Enables input of the UPPER drum sounds.
REC TRACK [1] KICK
• Q (Quantize) =
• Q (Quantize) =
REC TRACK [2] SNARE
REC TRACK [3] CLOSED HIHAT
REC TRACK [4] OPEN HIHAT
REC TRACK [5] CRASH CYMBAL
REC TRACK [6] RIDE CYMBAL
fig.03-422a
[RHYTHM PAD] Flashing
Ex.)
CLOSED HH
SNARE
Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds.
REC TRACK [1] CROSS STICK
REC TRACK [2] COWBELL
REC TRACK [3] TOM1
KICK
• Q (Quantize) =
REC TRACK [4] TOM2
REC TRACK [5] TOM3
REC TRACK [6] TOM4
When using high-resolution Quantize settings, you may
be unable to view the entire pattern, from start to finish,
in the display at one time.
(Method 2) Inputting with the [ENTER]
Press CURSOR [
] to move the cursor to the
matrix display.
In such instances, a “
” symbol appears, indicating
Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the
intersection of the drum sound you want to input
and the time at which you want it to sound, then
press [ENTER].
that there is material not currently displayed.
fig.03-405b
The drum sound is alternately input or deleted each
time you press [ENTER].
“■” flashes rapidly when you move the cursor to a
point where a sound has already been input. When a
drum sound is input, the display changes to “■.”
*
In this case, you can press [REW]/[FF] to move the location
(cursor) in large steps.
Pressing CURSOR [
] in the top row of the
matrix display returns the cursor to its original
position.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Patterns
Naming Patterns
You can use up to eight characters in naming patterns.
You can press [REC MODE] during Step Recording to
switch to Realtime Recording.
*
You can not change the Preset Pattern name.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
9. Set the tempo and Quantize values as needed.
10.Repeat Steps 6–9 as needed.
2. Press [EDIT].
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “NAME,” and
press [ENTER].
*
Press [PLAY] to listen to the recording pattern.
The Change Pattern Name screen appears.
fig.03-427d
11.When you have finished inputting sounds, move the
cursor to “STOP” and press [ENTER].
*
You can also stop recording by pressing [STOP].
Changing the velocity
During Step Recording, when you move the cursor to a point
in the matrix display where a drum sound has been input,
the velocity value appears in the position where the time
signature is normally indicated. At this point, you can
change the velocity by adjusting Fader 1.
fig.03-424d
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and turn the TIME/VALUE
dial to change the characters.
*
Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.
5. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
Deleting unneeded drum sounds
You can use either of the two following methods to delete
unneeded drums sounds in Step Recording.
(Method 1)
1. Move the [CURSOR] to the point in the matrix display
where a drum sound you want to delete has been input,
then press [ENTER].
(Method 2)
1. When you hold down [DELETE/MUTE] and press one
or more track buttons for the tones you want to delete.
You can delete the unneeded drum sound at the current
measure, beat, and clock.
fig.03-410
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Original Patterns
Copying Patterns
Erasing Patterns
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
indicator is flashing.
2. Press [EDIT].
2. Press [EDIT].
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “COPY,” and
3. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to
“ERASE,” and press [ENTER].
fig.03-432d
press [ENTER].
The Pattern Copy screen appears.
fig.03-429d
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the pattern to be
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copy-
deleted.
destination arrangement.
S001–S100: Song Pattern 1–100
S001–S100: Song Pattern 1–100
5. If you want to delete the pattern, press [ENTER].
5. Press [ENTER].
The screen for confirming the deletion appears.
fig.03-433d
The screen for confirming the copy appears.
fig.03-430d
6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to delete the pattern.
6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to copy.
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).
7. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
7. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Drum Kits
A drum kit is a variety of rhythm instrument sounds
collected in a single set; the BR-900CD includes nine internal
“preset drum kits.”
Selecting Drum Kits
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
In addition, you can also put together an additional five
original “song drum kits.”
indicator is lit.
fig.03-502d
Song drum kits are saved to individual songs on memory
cards.
The drum kit instrument sounds are used in the performance
of the arrangements and patterns.
fig.03-501
Memory Card
BR-900CD
SONG
SONG
SONG
Preset Drum Kit 9
2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-503d
Preset Drum Kit 3
Preset Drum Kit 2
Preset Drum Kit 1
Song Drum Kit
Kick
Snare
Kick
Snare
Closed Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “KIT,” and
press [ENTER].
fig.03-504d
Drum Kit Name
Performing the Drums
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [RHYTHM PAD] repeatedly until the indicator is
lit or flashing.
2. Press REC TRACK [1]–[6] to input the drum sounds.
Number
[RHYTHM PAD] Lit
P: Preset / S: Song
Enables performance of the UPPER drum sounds.
REC TRACK [1]
REC TRACK [2]
REC TRACK [3]
REC TRACK [4]
REC TRACK [5]
REC TRACK [6]
KICK
4. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select drum kits by switching the preset/song and
number.
SNARE
CLOSED HIHAT
OPEN HIHAT
CRASH CYMBAL
RIDE CYMBAL
(P1–9)
STD1, 2:
ROOM:
HARD:
Standard sets
Set with moderate ambience applied
Set appropriate for hard rock
Set appropriate for jazz
Set appropriate for dance
Set appropriate for dance
Set appropriate for reggae
[RHYTHM PAD] Flashing
JAZZ:
Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds.
HIP-HOP:
HOUSE:
REGGAE:
808:
REC TRACK [1]
REC TRACK [2]
REC TRACK [3]
REC TRACK [4]
REC TRACK [5]
REC TRACK [6]
CROSS STICK
COWBELL
TOM1
Set based on the renowned “Roland
TR-808” rhythm machine
TOM2
TOM3
(S1–5)
TOM4
SongKit1–5:
song (p. 135).
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Drum Kits
5. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
Loading from the tracks
This loads sounds recorded to the tracks as drum tones.
*
Drum kits are stored to each individual arrangement
separately.
(Example)
It can be convenient to use the “scrub,” “punch in,” and
“locator” functions to set the range containing the drum
sounds you want to load ahead of time.
Arrangement
Drum Kit
ROCK 1...............ROOM
ROCK 2...............STD 2
You can use the scrub function to repeat playback and locate
the point from which loading is to start (the start point) and
press AUTO PUNCH [IN], then after determining the point
at which loading is to finish (the end point), press
:
:
Creating Original Drum Kits
(Tone Load)
With the BR-900CD, you can create original drum kits not
only with the internal drum sounds, but by loading drum
sounds from external sources as well.
[LOCATOR] to register the range to be loaded.
Using this technique of setting the start point with AUTO
PUNCH [IN] and the end point with [LOCATOR] allows you
to set the range to be loaded very rapidly.
1. Press [UTILITY].
There are four ways to load drum tones.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“TONE,” and press [ENTER].
fig.03-505d
● Loading from the tracks
● Loading from other drum kits
● Loading from WAV/AIFF files (p. 171, p. 181)
(p. 149)
●
●
when tracks are bounced directly to a CD (p. 59).
Wave data in the following formats can be imported.
You cannot import wave data in other formats.
• WAV or AIFF format
• Mono or Stereo
3. Press CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to “TRACK,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.03-506d
• 8-bit or 16-bit
• Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz
●
Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.
●
●
●
●
Extremely short waveform data (less than
approximately 100 msec) cannot be loaded.
The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
Add the extension “WAV” to imported WAV files and
the extension “AIF” to imported AIFF files.
4. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track and V-Track to which the drum sounds
You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a
single drum kit.
are to be loaded, then press [ENTER].
fig.03-507d
(Example)
Kick: 3 seconds, snare: 3 seconds,
crash cymbal: 7 seconds → Total 13 seconds
●
Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as “mono”
sounds with the left and right sides mixed.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Drum Kits
5. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the range (start and end points) of drum sounds to be
loaded in terms of measures or time locations.
6. When you have finished setting the start and end
points, move the cursor to “LOAD” and press [ENTER].
fig.03-510d
*
You cannot specify an interval between the start and end
points or a length of time in less than 100 ms or excess of 13
seconds.
*
When specifying measures, the result is reflected in the time
display, and vice versa.
Start Point (“S”)
Specify the measure or location to be used as the start
point for loading the drum sounds.
fig.03-508d
Measure Beat
7. Specify the load-destination song drum kit with the
TIME/VALUE dial, then press [ENTER].
S1–5: Song Drum Kit 1–5
fig.03-511d
Hours
Seconds
Frame
Minutes
End Point (“E”)
Specify the measure or location to be used as the end
point for loading the drum sounds.
8. Specify the load-destination drum sound with the
From the screen for setting the start point, press
TIME/VALUE dial, then press [ENTER].
CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to display the screen for
setting the end point.
Loading is executed.
fig.03-509d
To cancel, press [EXIT].
fig.03-512d
Measure Beat
Hours
Seconds
Frame
Minutes
• You can press [ENTER] to switch between the start point
and end point settings screens.
• You can preview the drum sounds in the specified range
by moving the cursor to “PVW” and pressing [ENTER].
Determine the sounds to load while setting the start and
end points and the length, and repeating the preview.
You can press [PLAY] to preview the sounds, and press
[STOP] to stop the sounds.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Drum Kits
5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the copy-
Copying drum sounds from other
drum kits
destination drum sound, then press [ENTER].
*
Select “ALL” if you want to copy all of the drum sounds in the
kit.
1. Press [UTILITY].
fig.03-520d
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“TONE,” and press [ENTER].
fig.03-505d
6. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the copy-
destination drum kit, then press [ENTER].
fig.03-521d
7. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copy-
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
destination song drum sound, then press [ENTER].
“COPY,” and press [ENTER].
fig.03-519d
Copying is executed.
To cancel, press [EXIT].
fig.03-522a
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
8. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the copy-
destination drum kit, then press [ENTER].
P1–9:
S1–5:
Preset Drum Kit 1–9
Song Drum Kit 1–5
fig.03-520d
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Drum Kits
Erasing drum sounds
Changing the position (pan) of
the drum sounds
1. Press [UTILITY].
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“TONE,” and press [ENTER].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“TONE,” and press [ENTER].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“ERASE,” and press [ENTER].
fig.03-523d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to “PAN,” and
press [ENTER].
fig.03-526d
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the erase drum
kit, then press [ENTER].
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the drum kit
whose panning you want to change, then press
[ENTER].
S1–5:
Song Drum Kit 1–5
fig.03-524d
S1–5:
Song Drum Kit 1–5
fig.03-527d
5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the erase drum
sound, then press [ENTER].
*
Select “ALL” if you want to erase all of the drum sounds in
the kit.
5. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the drum sound whose panning is being changed and
fig.03-525d
the pan setting.
fig.03-528d
“Are you sure?” appears.
6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to erase the drum sound.
*
*
When you press [RHYTHM PAD], causing the indicator to
light/flash, you can then set the drum sounds by tapping REC
TRACK [1]–[6].
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).
7. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
Pressing [ENTER] sets this to “C00” (Center).
6. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Audio CD
The pre-gap setting screen will appear.
fig.40-03d
Precautions
In addition to CD-R discs, you can also use CD-RW discs
when making audio CDs. However, it may not be possible
for audio CDs created using CD-RW discs to be played on
standard CD players.
Furthermore, even when CD-R discs are used for this
purpose, playback will not be possible on CD players that do
not support this type of media. You should, therefore, confirm
that the CD player to be used is compatible with CD-R discs.
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify a gap time
between songs in seconds.
5. Press [EXIT].
Note that the BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW drive can play commercially
produced audio CDs, CD-R discs, and CD-RW discs.
If silence is included at the end of your finished song, the
pre-gap time will be added to the length of this section, and
as a result, the gap between songs will be longer than
expected when the CD is played back on a CD player. For
details regarding the deletion of silence from the end of
songs, refer to “Erasing Data (Track Erase)” (p. 73).
When you use the CD-R/RW drive, you must use only the
supplied AC adaptor. The CD-R/RW drive cannot be used
while running on battery power.
Setting the Time Between
Songs (Pre-Gap)
Often when you are playing audio CDs on standard CD
players, you will see a countdown in the form of “-3, -2, -1”
on the player’s display before songs start. This duration is
referred to as a Pre-Gap, and it can be freely set during the
CD creation process to allow song lengths to be adjusted
without having to record silence at the end of each.
Writing Songs to Discs
Have on hand the disc you want to burn as an audio CD.
You can write the data to any of the following discs.
• CD-R or CD-RW disc with no data written to it (blank disc)
• Discs that have song data that was written to them using
the BR-900CD, but which still have space available for
further recording and have not yet been finalized
1. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
Methods for creating audio CDs
With the BR-900CD, only the currently loaded song is
written to the audio CD. If you want to include other
songs on your CD, they will each have to be loaded and
written in sequence. When you use this method,
individual songs can be added to a disc one at a time
until it is full. This method is called “Track At Once.”
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
1. Load the song that you want to write.
“AUDIO,” and press [ENTER].
2. Insert an unrecorded CD-R or CD-RW disc into the CD-
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio
R/RW drive.
3. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “GAP,”
and press [ENTER].
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Audio CD
11.Press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“AUDIO,” and press [ENTER].
12.Press the CD-R/RW drive’s EJECT button to eject the
disc.
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio
This completes the writing process.
It may take a period of several seconds before the disc is
actually ejected.
• The range of available write speeds can sometimes be
limited by the type of media being used. In such a case,
the BR-900CD will allow you to select only the
supported speeds.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“WRITE,” and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD Write screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdawrite
• If you are using CD-R or CD-RW discs intended for high-
speed writing, the frequency of write errors may increase
if the x2 or x4 speed is selected. It is recommended that
you use the x8 speed for high-speed discs.
• Note that selecting higher factor write speeds does not
necessarily mean the speed will be that multiple exactly.
This is due to the processing time required for
conversion of the audio data on the audio tracks to CD
format as the data is written to the disc.
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the track and V-
Track that you want to write, and press [ENTER].
• Audio CDs can be created with up to a maximum of 99
tracks on the disc.
The Write Speed screen will appear.
fig.05-CDdawrite2
• Audio CD standards require that one song be at least
four seconds long. If a specified track lasts less than four
seconds, the track cannot be written to the audio CD.
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed.
Alternatively, if you want to use the write speed that is
currently displayed, proceed to Step 9.
What is finalization?
In addition to audio data, information such as the
position and time of this data is also written to audio
CDs, and this process is known as “Finalizing.” If you
intend to play your audio CD on a standard CD player, it
is important that finalization be carried out. Once this
has been done, however, you will not be able to add any
more songs to the CD. For this reason, you should aim to
carry out the finalization of a CD disc only when it is
nearly full of songs.
8. Press [ENTER].
The message “Are you sure?” will appear.
9. Press [ENTER] (YES).
The message “Now Writing...” will appear and writing
to the audio CD will begin.
When writing has been completed, the message
“Finalize CD OK?” will be displayed.
If you don’t finalize:
10.If you intend to write additional songs to the same CD-
R disc, press [EXIT] (NO).
It will not be possible to play your audio CD on a
standard CD player until it has been finalized; however,
you can keep adding songs to the disc until this process
is carried out. The CD-R disc that is not finalized during
the writing process can be finalized later on. For more
Players (Finalize)” (p. 143).
Alternatively, press [ENTER] (YES) if no more songs
will be added to this disc.
If you press [ENTER] (YES), the message “Now
Finalizing...” will appear and the finalization process
will begin. When the message “Completed!” appears, it
indicates that the finalization has been completed.
For more detailed information regarding finalization,
refer to “What is finalization?.”
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Audio CD
Viewing the Remaining Time
for Recording on Audio CDs
Use the following procedure to see how much time you have
left for recording on an audio CD.
Playing Back Audio CDs
Let’s now listen to the audio CD we have just created using
the BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW drive. In addition to CD-R discs,
this drive can be used to play back CD-RW discs that cannot
be played on standard CD players. Naturally, you will also
be able to listen to commercially produced audio CDs on this
drive, and it can even play back audio CDs created using the
BR-900CD that have not yet been finalized.
1. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc into the CD-R/RW drive.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
If you are working with an audio CD created with the BR-
900CD, you can play back and check the sounds on the CD
even before finalizing it. Please note, however, that depending
on the type of disc used and the data on it, songs may not play
that songs play back correctly, finalize (p. 143) the disc.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“AUDIO,” and press [ENTER].
Songs recorded on an audio CD are often referred to as
“tracks.” Be careful to avoid confusing these tracks with the
BR-900CD’s audio tracks.
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio
1. Insert the audio CD into the CD-R/RW drive.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“REMAIN,” and press [ENTER].
The remaining time for recording on audio CD will
appear.
fig.05_CDremain
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“AUDIO,” and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio
With finalized discs, discs that have been used for data
backup, and other discs that cannot be used as audio CDs, a
remaining time of “0” is indicated.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “PLAY/
IMP,” and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD player screen will appear.
fig.05_CDplay
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Audio CD
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song that you
want to listen to.
fig.05-CDplay2
Enabling Playback on CD
Players (Finalize)
If you intend to play a audio CD that was written using the
BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW drive on a standard CD player, the
audio CD must be finalized. Audio CD-R/RW discs can be
finalized at any time to enable playback on this type of
player.
6. Press [PLAY].
The message “Now Playing...” will appear, and playback
of the audio CD will begin.
fig.05-CDplay3
What is finalizing?
In addition to the audio data itself, other information
describing the position and time of this data is also
written to audio CDs. This process is known as
“Finalizing.”
If you finalize:
When finalization has been carried out, you will be able
to play your audio CD on a standard CD player. Note,
however, that you will no longer be able to add songs to
a finalized CD.
The buttons work as shown below.
[STOP] Stop
[PLAY] Play
Furthermore, the finalization of audio CDs containing
only one short song is wasteful, since the remaining
empty space on such discs can no longer be used.
[REW] Rewind
[FF]
Fast forward
For this reason, you should aim to carry out finalizing of
a CD disc only when it is nearly full of songs.
7. If you want to finish playback of the audio CD, press
[EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.
If you don’t finalize:
8. Press the CD-R/RW drive’s EJECT button to eject the
It will not be possible to play your audio CD on a
standard CD player until it has been finalized; however,
you can keep adding songs to the disc until this process
is carried out. Whenever you want to play your audio
CD on a standard CD player, you should perform
finalization.
disc.
It may take a period of several seconds before the disc is
actually ejected.
When an audio disc is inserted into the CD-R/RW drive, the
message “Now Checking...” may remain on the screen for a
relatively long time. This period of time is required for
reading of the data stored on the audio CD and it is not the
result of a malfunction.
1. Insert the CD-R/RW disc to be finalized into the BR-
900CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Audio CD
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“AUDIO,” and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“FINAL,” and press [ENTER].
The message “Finalize CD OK?” will appear.
fig.05_CDfinalize
5. Press [ENTER] (YES). (If you want to cancel
finalization, press [EXIT] (NO).)
Finalization will begin and the state of progress will be
displayed. When the message “Complete” appears and
the track buttons begin to flash, the finalization is
complete.
6. Press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.
7. Press the CD-R/RW drive’s EJECT button to eject the
disc.
This enables the CD-R/RW disc to be played back on
regular consumer CD players.
• Once finalization has been started, it will not be possible
to cancel this process.
• In certain cases, a period of several seconds will pass
before the disc is actually ejected.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
The BR-900CD’s built-in CD-R/RW drive can be used to
Backing up a song to a CD-R/RW
exchange data in the following ways:
disc one at a time (Song Backup)
●
●
●
Storing of songs and other data on the memory card to
CD-R/RW discs (Backup)
1. Insert an empty CD-R/RW disc into the BR-900CD’s
Reading songs and other backup data back into the
memory card (Recover)
CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
Exchanging of waveform data with a PC
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
When you use the CD-R/RW drive, you must use only the
supplied AC adaptor. The CD-R/RW drive cannot be used
while running on battery power.
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
Saving Recorded Songs to
CD-R/RW Discs (Backup)
Although the songs you’ve recorded and created are stored
on the memory card, all of this data would be lost in the
unlikely event that the memory card was damaged. For this
reason, we recommend that you also save your songs on CD-
R/RW discs (Backup).
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata
Once songs have been backed up in this way, it will also be
possible to read them from the CD-R/RW discs into another
BR-900CD.
■ Precautions for backup
• If a CD-R disc selected for backup already contains data,
the message “Not Blank Disc!” will appear and backup
will not be possible. Always use an empty disc for this
operation. If, on the other hand, you are using a CD-RW
disc that already contains data, the message “Erase
Disc?” will be displayed. If you then press [ENTER]
(YES), the BR-900CD will begin erasing data from this
disc.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“BACKUP,” and press [ENTER].
The Backup menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdataback
• If the total size of the songs and other data you intend to
back up exceeds the capacity of a single CD-R/RW disc,
you will be able to perform a backup using as many
discs as necessary. In this case, you will need to have a
number of blank CD-R/RW discs on hand, and during
the backup process, you should insert and remove them
as requested on-screen.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“SONG,” and press [ENTER].
The Song backup screen will appear.
fig.05_CDsongbu
• To cancel writing to a CD-R/RW disc, press [EXIT]
(NO). When the message “Cancel?” appears, press
[ENTER] (YES) to confirm cancellation. (A certain
amount of time may pass between pressing of [EXIT]
(NO) and display of the confirmation message.) Please
note, however, that no guarantee can be made regarding
the state of the data written before cancellation.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song you want
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
to back up, and press [ENTER].
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
The Write Speed screen will appear.
fig.05-CDdawrite2
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed, and
press [ENTER].
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“BACKUP,” and press [ENTER].
The message “Write sure?” will appear.
The Backup menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdataback
• The range of available write speeds can sometimes be
limited by the type of media being used. In such a case,
the BR-900CD will allow you to select only the
supported speeds.
• If you are using CD-R or CD-RW discs intended for high-
speed writing, the frequency of write errors may increase
if the x2 or x4 speed is selected. It is recommended that
you use the x8 speed for high-speed discs.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “ALL,”
and press [ENTER].
The Write Speed screen will appear.
fig.05-CDdawrite2
8. Press [ENTER] (YES).
Writing to the CD-R/RW disc will begin.
When the message “Completed!” appears, it indicates
that the backup has been successfully completed.
Saving all of the songs on a
memory card to a CD-R/RW disc
(All Backup)
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed, and
press [ENTER].
The message “Are you sure?” will appear.
1. Insert an empty CD-R/RW disc into the BR-900CD’s
CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
• The range of available write speeds can sometimes be
limited by the type of media being used. In such a case,
the BR-900CD will allow you to select only the
supported speeds.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
• If you are using CD-R or CD-RW discs intended for high-
speed writing, the frequency of write errors may increase
if the x2 or x4 speed is selected. It is recommended that
you use the x8 speed for high-speed discs.
7. Press [ENTER] (YES).
Writing to the CD-R/RW disc will begin.
When the message “Completed!” appears, it indicates
that the backup has been successfully completed.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song you want
to recover, and press [ENTER].
Loading Saved Songs to a
Memory Card (Recover)
The message “Are you sure?” will appear.
7. Press [ENTER] (YES).
Loading saved songs to a memory
card one at a time (Song Recover)
The recovered song will begin.
When the message “Completed!” appears, it indicates
that the recovered song has been successfully completed.
1. Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing backup songs into
the BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
The recovered songs will be saved in sequence on the
memory card using the available song numbers.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
“Card Full!” may appear in the display when you use Song
Recover in an attempt to load a song that was in the process of
being recorded when the memory card became full (“Card Full!”
was displayed). If this occurs, use “All Recover” to load the song.
Loading all saved songs to a
memory card (All Recover)
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
Note that executing All Recover deletes all of the data
existing on the memory card. Be sure to back up any
required data before executing All Recover.
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata
1. Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing backup songs into
the BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“RECOVER,” and press [ENTER].
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
The Recover menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdataback
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“RECOVER,” and press [ENTER].
The Recover menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdataback
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“SONG,” and press [ENTER].
The Song recover screen will appear.
fig.05_CDrecover
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “ALL,”
and press [ENTER].
The message “Are you sure?” will appear.
6. Press [ENTER] (YES).
The recovered songs will begin.
When the message “Completed!” appears, it indicates
that the recovered songs has been successfully completed.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
3. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
Copying and Writing
Waveform Data
fig.05_CDmenu
This procedure requires a computer equipped with a drive
capable of writing to CD-R/RW discs.
If you have a computer equipped with a CD-R/RW drive,
you can use CD-R/RW discs to transfer waveform data
between multiple BR-900CDs.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
You can, for example, use these discs to copy waveform data
created with the audio software on your computer and then
paste the data to audio tracks. You can also take audio track
data recorded with the BR-900CD and copy it to your
computer for editing.
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata
Copying waveform data from a
computer to the audio tracks
(WAV/AIFF Import)
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “WAV,”
and press [ENTER].
The WAV/AIFF menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDwav
●
To be eligible for import, waveform data must meet the
following criteria. In most cases, you will not be able to
import other kinds of data.
• Use “ISO 9660 Level 2, Mode 1” to write the data to the
CD-R/RW disc.
• WAV or AIFF format
• Mono or Stereo
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
• 8-bit or 16-bit
“IMPORT,” and press [ENTER].
• Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz
A list of the audio data files contained on the current
CD-R/RW disc will appear.
●
Audio data must be at least one second in length.
If the WAV files are collected in a folder, then the folder
name is displayed. To show the WAV files within the
●
Name waveform data using less than eight letters
followed by a three-character extension.
folder, press [ENTER].
fig.05-CDwavimp
●
The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
1. Using a PC, burn and finalize a CD-R/RW disc
containing the waveform data that you want to import.
For instructions on how to write waveform data to CD-
R/RW discs, refer to your computer and CD-R/RW
drive owner’s manuals.
You can preview the sounds by moving the cursor to
“PVW” and pressing [ENTER]. You can stop the sound
by moving the cursor to “PVW” and pressing [ENTER]
once more.
2. Place the CD-R/RW disc in the BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW
drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
You can press [PLAY] to preview the sounds, and press
[STOP] to stop the sounds.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the waveform data
1. Using a PC, burn and finalize a CD-R/RW disc
files you want to import, and press [ENTER].
containing the waveform data that you want to import.
The screen for specifying the import destination appears.
fig.05-CDwavimp2
For instructions on how to write waveform data to CD-
R/RW discs, refer to your computer and CD-R/RW
drive owner’s manuals.
2. Place the CD-R/RW disc in the BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW
drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the import-
3. Press [CD-R/RW].
destination track, and press [ENTER].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
Copying of the waveform data begins.
When “Completed!” appears, the import is finished.
The waveform data is imported at the beginning of the
tracks. If you want to change the location at which this
data is written, use Track Edit (p. 70) to move the data
after it has been imported.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
Copying WAV/AIFF files as drum
sounds (Tone Load)
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata
●
●
The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used
when tracks are bounced directly to a CD (p. 59).
Wave data in the following formats can be imported.
You cannot import wave data in other formats.
• Use “ISO 9660 Level 2, Mode 1” to write the data to the
CD-R/RW disc.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“TONE,” and press [ENTER].
• WAV or AIFF format
• Mono or Stereo
A list of the waveform data files contained on the current
CD-R/RW disc will appear.
• 8-bit or 16-bit
If the WAV files are collected in a folder, then the folder
name is displayed. To show the WAV files within the
• Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz
●
Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.
folder, press [ENTER].
fig.05-CDtone
●
●
●
●
Extremely short waveform data (less than
approximately 100 msec) cannot be loaded.
The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
Add the extension “WAV” to imported WAV files and
the extension “AIF” to imported AIFF files.
You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a
single drum kit.
You can preview the sounds by moving the cursor to
“PVW” and pressing [ENTER]. You can stop the sound
by moving the cursor to “PVW” and pressing [ENTER]
once more.
(Example)
Kick: 3 seconds, snare: 3 seconds,
crash cymbal: 7 seconds → Total 13 seconds
You can press [PLAY] to preview the sounds, and press
[STOP] to stop the sounds.
●
Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as “mono”
sounds with the left and right sides mixed.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the data files you
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
want to import, and press [ENTER].
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
The Drum kit select screen appears.
fig.05-CDton2
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the dum kit, and
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “WAV,”
press [ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
The Drum sound select screen appears.
fig.05-CDton3
The WAV/AIFF screen will appear.
fig.05-CDwav
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the dum sound,
and press [ENTER].
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“EXPORT,” and press [ENTER].
fig.06-110d
Copying of the waveform data begins.
When “Completed!” appears, the import is finished.
Copying audio track waveform data
to computers (WAV/AIFF Export)
You can write data for specified tracks to a CD-R/RW disc as
waveform data, then import the waveform data to the
computer, using your computer to read the CD-R/RW disc.
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the file format, then
press [ENTER].
The Waveform Data Export screen appears.
fig.05-CDwavex
You will be unable to use CD-RW discs if your computer is
only equipped with a CD-ROM or CD-R drive. In this case,
used CD-R discs.
1. Place a writable CD-R/RW disc (a blank disc) in the
BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the tracks you
want to export.
The Write Speed screen will appear.
fig.05-CDdawrite2
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed, and
• To quit writing to the disc while writing is still in
progress, press [EXIT] (NO). When the message
“Cancel?” appears, press [ENTER] (YES); writing is
cancelled (it may take some time after you press [EXIT]
(NO) for the message to appear). However, no guarantee
can be made for the utility of the content up to the time
writing is cancelled.
press [ENTER].
The message “Are you sure?” appears.
The range of available write speeds can sometimes be limited
by the type of media being used. In such a case, the BR-
900CD will allow you to select only the supported speeds.
• It will not be possible to reuse a CD-R disc for which
writing was canceled before completion.
9. Press [ENTER] (YES) again.
Writing to the CD-R/RW disc begins.
When “Completed!” appears, the writing is finished.
Using SMF
The following files will have been written to the CD-R/
RW disc in ISO9660 Level 2, Mode 1 format.
Playing SMFs using external MIDI
instruments (SMF Player)
You can use the BR-900CD to read SMFs from CD-R/RW
discs and play these files using MIDI instruments connected
to the MIDI OUT port.
Track 1, V-Track 1
Track 1, V-Track 2
Track 1, V-Track 3
:
T01___01.WAV or T01___01.AIF
T01___02.WAV or T01___02.AIF
T01___03.WAV or T01___03.AIF
:
Track 2, V-Track 7
Track 2, V-Track 8
:
T02__07.WAV or T02__07.AIF
T02__08.WAV or T02__08.AIF
:
Any SMFs that satisfy the following conditions can be played
in this way.
Format:
0 or 1
Track 3/4, V-Track 1
Track 3/4, V-Track 2
:
T0304_01.WAV or T0304_01.AIF
T0304_02.WAV or T0304_02.AIF
:
File size:
240 KB maximum (Note that this will
vary slightly based on the SMF content.)
Track 7/8, V-Track 7
Track 7/8, V-Track 8
T0708_07.WAV or T0708_07.AIF
T0708_08.WAV or T0708_08.AIF
System Exclusive: Packet sizes of 512 bytes or less
1. Connect a MIDI cable between the MIDI OUT port on
10.Press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.
11. Press the CD-R/RW drive’s EJECT button to eject the disc.
the BR-900CD and the MIDI IN port on your external
MIDI sound module.
fig.05-SMF
12.Use the application on your computer to copy the data
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
from the CD-R/RW disc.
• If a CD-R disc that already has data written to it is
loaded, the message “Not Blank Disc” appears, and you
cannot proceed with the export. Be sure to use only
blank discs.
2. Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing SMFs into the CD-R/
• If a CD-RW disc that already has data written to it is
loaded, the message “Erase Disc?” appears. Pressing
[ENTER] (YES) here begins erasure of the disc. After the
disc has been erased, the export process will continue.
RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
• When a mono track is specified as the source for
exporting, the data is written as a mono waveform file.
When a stereo track is specified, the data is written as a
stereo waveform file.
3. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
• Tracks 7/8 are fixed as a permanent stereo pair, and so
cannot be specified as mono tracks.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
Loading drum patterns from the
CD-R/RW drive (SMF Import)
You can import SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) stored on PC as
song patterns. You can easily increase your collection of song
patterns by creating SMFs on your computer or other device
and copying them to memory cards.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata
Any SMFs that satisfy the following conditions can be played
in this way.
Format:
File size:
0 or 1
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SMF,”
240 KB maximum (Note that this will
vary slightly based on the SMF content.)
and press [ENTER].
The SMF menu screen will appear.
fig.05-CDsmf
When importing GM/GS/XG-compatible SMFs, MIDI
Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for
rhythm performances. Thus, only the data on MIDI Channel
10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR-900CD.
Note that the data on other channels is disregarded.
1. Using a PC, burn a CD-R/RW disc containing the SMFs
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
you want to import.
“PLAY,” and press [ENTER].
2. Insert this CD-R/RW disc into the BR-900CD’s CD-R/
The SMF play screen appears.
fig.05-CDsmfplay
RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
3. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the SMF to be
played.
If the SMFs are collected in a folder, then the folder name
is displayed. To show the SMFs within the folder, press
[ENTER].
8. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to [
]
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
and press [ENTER].
“DATA,” and press [ENTER].
The BR-900CD will start playback.
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata
9. To stop playback, press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move
the cursor to [ ] and press [ENTER].
You can use [START] and [STOP] to start and stop SMF
playback.
In cases where the SMF contains a large amount of MIDI
data, playback of the file may be sluggish.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SMF,”
Erasing Data from a CD-RW
Disc (CD-RW Erase)
and press [ENTER].
The SMF menu screen will appear.
fig.05-CDsmf
If you are using CD-RW discs, you will be able to erase
unneeded data from the discs and reuse them for data storage.
• This process results in all data being erased from a disc.
• Data erasure is possible only with CD-RW discs. Data
cannot be erased from CD-R discs.
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
1. Insert the CD-RW disc to be erased into the BR-
“IMPORT,” and press [ENTER].
900CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The SMF import screen appears.
fig.05-CDsmfplay
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until this
indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
If the SMFs are collected in a folder, then the folder name
is displayed. To show the SMFs within the folder, press
[ENTER].
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the SMFs you want
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
to import, and press [ENTER].
“ERASE,” and press [ENTER].
The screen for specifying the import destination pattern
number appears.
The message “Are you sure?” will appear.
fig.05-CDerase
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the import-
destination pattern number and press [ENTER].
Copying of the SMF begins.
When “Completed!” appears, the import is finished.
4. Press [ENTER] (YES).
Press [EXIT] (NO) to cancel deletion.
The data erasure will begin and the state of progress will
be displayed. When the message “Completed!” appears,
it indicates that erasing has been completed.
5. Press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.
6. Press the CD-R/RW drive’s EJECT button to eject the disc.
• Once erasing has been started, it will not be possible to
cancel this process.
• The amount of time required for erasing data will
depend on the type of CD-RW disc used and the volume
of data that it contains.
• In certain cases, a period of several seconds will pass
before the disc is actually ejected.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Importing Songs from CDs to Audio Tracks
The BR-900CD allows you to import selected songs from a
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “PLAY/
audio CD to audio tracks. (CD-R/RW Write)
IMP,” and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD player screen will appear.
fig.05_CDplay
Important Notice
• The BR-900CD and its CD-R/RW drive are designed
to allow you to reproduce material for which you
own the copyright, or material for which you have
been granted permission to copy by the copyright
owner. Accordingly, the reproduction of audio CDs
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of the
song to be imported.
fig.05-CDimp
or other copyrighted material without the
permission of the copyright owner and the
circumvention of technologies such as SCMS, which
prohibit second-generation and later copies,
constitutes copyright infringement and may incur
penalties, even in cases where such reproduction is
for your own personal use and enjoyment (private
use). Consult a copyright specialist or special
publications for more information regarding the
6. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “[IMP],” and
acquisition of copyright permission from copyright
press [ENTER].
holders.
The screen for specifying the import destination appears.
fig.05-CDiwavimp2
• The BR-900CD does not allow you to import all
songs from a audio CD at once. Songs must be
imported one at a time.
1. Insert a audio CD into the BR-900CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination
proceeding.
track for import, and press [ENTER].
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The message “Now Importing...” will appear and import
to the audio track will begin. When the message
“Completed!” appears, it indicates that the import
procedure has been successfully completed.
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu
When an audio disc is inserted into the CD-R/RW drive, the
message “Now Checking...” may remain on the screen for a
relatively long time. This period of time is required for
reading of the data stored on the audio CD and it is not the
result of a malfunction.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“AUDIO,” and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Fundamentals
By using MIDI to connect the BR-900CD to other MIDI-
capable devices, you can perform the following:
MIDI Channels
The MIDI standard allows data to be exchanged among
multiple MIDI-compatible devices using a single MIDI cable,
and this is made possible by what are known as MIDI
channels.
●
●
●
Play rhythm performances on external MIDI sound
module
Synchronize with external MIDI sequencers and rhythm
machines
In simple terms, a MIDI channel is quite similar to a TV
channel. For example, you can change TV channels to watch
programs from a variety of broadcasters. In this type of
situation, information is communicated only when the
channel on the transmitting end matches the channel on the
receiving end.
Control MMC-compatible devices from the BR-900CD
This section provides a basic description of MIDI and
explains the various ways it can be used.
Likewise, with MIDI as well, if the transmitting device is (for
example) set to MIDI channel 1, MIDI messages will be
received only if the MIDI channel on the receiving end is also
set to 1.
What is MIDI?
MIDI stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface.”
MIDI is a global standard devised so that performance data,
program change data, and other similar information could be
exchanged among electronic musical instruments and
computers. If a device is MIDI compatible, it will be able to
exchange performance data with other MIDI compatible
devices, even if they are of a different type or brand.
MIDI Implementation Charts
MIDI makes it possible for a vast range of electronic musical
devices to communicate with each other. However, this does
not mean that every MIDI device can handle every single
type of MIDI message. In reality, two MIDI-compatible
devices can only exchange the MIDI messages that are
supported by both.
MIDI Connectors
MIDI messages (i.e., the data handled by MIDI) are
The user’s manual for any MIDI-compatible device will
contain a MIDI Implementation Chart, and this chart allows
you to quickly find out which MIDI messages the device in
question can transmit and receive.
exchanged using the following three types of MIDI port.
MIDI IN:
This connector accepts the MIDI messages arriving from
When two MIDI devices are to be used together, you should
compare their MIDI implementation charts to make sure that
exchange of the required MIDI messages will be possible.
other MIDI devices.
MIDI OUT:
All the MIDI messages from the BR-900CD are sent out from
For more detailed information regarding the BR-900CD’s
MIDI characteristics, refer to “MIDI Implementation” (p. 216).
this connector.
MIDI THRU:
This connector re-transmits all the MIDI messages that arrive
at the MIDI IN connector.
The BR-900CD is equipped with a MIDI OUT port, but
not with MIDI IN and MIDI THRU ports.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronizing with MIDI Devices
Using the Rhythm to Play an
External MIDI Sound Module
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “RhyMIDI ch.”
fig.05-403d
Perform the procedure given below to use a MIDI sound
module and choose the sounds you desire for the Rhythm.
1. Use a MIDI cable to connect the BR-900CD and your
MIDI sound module as shown in the diagram.
fig.05-401
5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the MIDI channel
(1–16).
If you select “OFF,” note messages of the Rhythm will
not be transmitted.
MIDI Sound Module
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
6. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
The sounds produced by the Rhythm and their
corresponding note numbers are given below.
Rhythm Sound
Closs Stick
Metronome (click)
Metronome (bell)
Kick
Note Number
2. Press [UTILITY].
G1
(31)
(33)
A 1
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“SYNC,” and press [ENTER].
fig.05-402d
A#1 (34)
C 2
D 2
F 2
(36)
(38)
(41)
(42)
(45)
Snare
Tom 4
Closed Hi-hat
Tom 3
F#2
A 2
Open Hi-hat
Tom 2
A#2 (46)
C 3 (48)
C#3 (49)
D 3 (50)
Clash Cymbal
Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
Cowbell
D#3 (51)
G#3 (56)
Tone arrangement is based on GS/GM. In case your external
MIDI sound module is not based on GS or GM, you will need
to make settings on your external MIDI sound module to
change the sounds that correspond to each note number. For
details on making these settings, refer to the manual of your
MIDI sound module.
*
If you are using an external MIDI sound module to play the
Rhythm, use the controls of the external MIDI sound module
to adjust the volume level.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronizing with MIDI Devices
fig.05-405d
Synchronizing Playback with
a MIDI Sequencer
The BR-900CD can operate in synchronization with a MIDI
sequencer.
When synchronizing with a MIDI sequencer, it is possible to
synchronize the MIDI sequencer using the BR-900CD (i.e.,
with the BR-900CD as the master), but it is not possible to
synchronize the BR-900CD with the MIDI sequencer (i.e.,
with the BR-900CD as the slave).
*
For details on operation of your MIDI sequencer, refer to the
MMC, see p. 160.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “Sync Gen,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the sync generator.
fig.05-406d
Synchronized playback with the
BR-900CD as the master
Follow the procedure given below to synchronize the MIDI
sequencer using the BR-900CD.
1. Use a MIDI cable to connect the BR-900CD and your
MIDI sequencer as shown in the diagram.
fig.05-404
OFF:
MTC:
MCK:
Synchronization signals will not be output.
MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.
with the Rhythm (p. 120).
*
If “OFF” or “MCK” is selected, proceed to step 6.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “MTC Type,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the MTC type.
fig.05-407d
MIDI
Sequencer
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Verify the specifications of your MIDI sequencer and set
the MTC type on the BR-900CD.
30:
30 frames per second non-drop format. This is
used by audio devices such as analog tape
recorders, and for NTSC format black and
white video (used in Japan and the U.S.).
2. Press [UTILITY].
29N:
29D:
29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This
is used for NTSC format color video (used in
Japan and the U.S.).
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“SYNC,” and press [ENTER].
29.97 frames per second drop format. This is
used for NTSC format broadcast color video
(used in Japan and the U.S.).
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronizing with MIDI Devices
25:
24:
25 frame per second frame rate. This is used
for SECAM or PAL format video, audio
equipment, and film (used in Europe and
elsewhere).
Setting the MTC offset
The offset sets the time required to align the song playback
and MTC timing when synchronizing an external device
using MTC from the BR-900CD.
24 frame per second frame rate. This is used
for video, audio devices, and film in the US.
1. Press [UTILITY].
6. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
to the Play screen.
“SYNC,” and press [ENTER].
fig.05-408ad
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
7. Just as when you synchronize a MIDI sequencer using
external MTC, when you use the MCK, you can
synchronize the MIDI sequencer using the external
MIDI clock.
8. Get the MIDI song data ready for playback.
When the BR-900CD begins playing, the MIDI sequencer
will also begin playing in sync with it.
What are drop and non-drop formats?
There are two types of format used by NTSC video
cassette recorders, non-drop and drop. With the non-
drop format, the frames are continuous. On the other
hand, in order to support NTSC color video, the drop
format drops the first two frames of every minute
excluding minutes 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “Offset,” and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to set the time offset.
fig.05-408d
In most video and audio production, since formats with
continuous frames are easier to deal with, non-drop is
generally used. In contrast, in situations such as in
broadcast, where the time code must match actual clock
time, drop is used.
The offset is set as the difference between the “time to
which to align the MTC timing” and the “time to which
to align the song timing.” For example, you want to have
the external device play back with the MTC timing
shown below when the song timing reaches
“01h00m00s00,” then set the offset as follows.
Song Timing
MTC for
External Device
Offset Setting
01h00m00s00
01h00m00s00
01h30m00s00
00h30m00s00
00h30m00s00
23h30m00s00
4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronizing with MIDI Devices
1. Press [UTILITY].
Using MMC
MMC stands for “MIDI Machine Control.” This is a protocol
that uses MIDI System Exclusive messages to remotely
control multiple recording devices from one device. Your BR-
900CD supports the MMC protocol.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“SYNC,” and press [ENTER].
fig.05-410d
By using MMC, your BR-900CD can send commands such as
PLAY, STOP, and FF to connected MIDI devices to operate
them.
Some MIDI devices do not support the BR-900CD’s MMC
functionality. If so, it will not be possible to operate them
from the BR-900CD using the procedures described here. For
details on the MMC functionality supported by the BR-
900CD, read “MIDI Implementation” (p. 216).
Operating MMC-compatible
devices with the BR-900CD
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “MMC Master,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the MMC mode.
fig.05-411d
This section explains how to make settings for synchronizing
the playback with a computer-based sequencer program that
supports MMC and MTC. Make connections as shown in the
diagram below.
fig.05-409
OFF:
ON:
MMC will not be transmitted.
MMC information is sent. The BR-900CD
becomes the master of the external MIDI
instrument.
*
900CD, read “MIDI Implementation” (p. 216).
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “Sync Gen,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set “MTC.”
5. Make settings on your sequencer software.
Make the following settings on your sequencer software.
For details on making these settings, refer to the manual
for your sequencer software.
MTC:
receive
MTC type: same setting as the MTC Type selected on the
BR-900CD
The BR-900CD will be the master for MMC and MTC.
MMC:
receive
Follow the procedure given below to operate the play, stop,
fast-forward and other functions of a sequencer program
with the BR-900CD.
6. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Using USB (Overview)
The BR-900CD is equipped with a USB connector, which
Composition of Data on
allows you to connect the BR-900CD directly to a computer,
making it easy to back up your important song data and
exchange files between the BR-900CD and the computer.
Memory Cards
The folders and files created are as shown below.
fig.06-102
What is USB?
Root Directory
USB, short for “Universal Serial Bus,” is a type of interface
for connecting computers with a variety of peripheral
devices.
ROLAND Folder
BR0 Folder
Using USB allows you to connect different peripherals using
a single USB cable, and also provides rapid data
transmission.
Disk Information
SONG0000 Folder
Song Information
Effect Parameter
Sequence Data
Sequence Data
What’s more, you can connect and disconnect peripherals
with the power on, and the computer can automatically
recognize when devices are connected (you may need to
make settings when connecting certain devices).
Drum Kit Sound Parameter
Song Parameter
Recorded Data
Recorded L Data
Recorded R data
Wave Data
On the BR-900CD, USB is used for the
following tasks:
●
Backing up the BR-900CD’s data
●
Saving BR-900CD track data in WAV/AIFF format
(WAV/AIFF Export)
SONG0001 Folder
●
Loading WAV/AIFF files in BR-900CD tracks (WAV/
AIFF Import)
The folders are created
each song
●
●
Importing SMFs and creating patterns
TONELOAD Folder
WAV/AIFF File
SMF Folder
SMF File
USB Folder
WAV/AIFF File
Loading drum sounds from WAV/AIFF files
Realtime audio signals and MIDI messages cannot be
handled via the BR-900CD’s USB connector.
ROLAND Folder
The structure of the files and folders on the BR-900CD is as
follows.
Compatible OS
Windows:
Windows Me / 2000 / XP
BR0 Folder
Song data (recording data, song arrangements/patterns/
drum kits, effect song patches, and song information) are
saved to each song folder.
Macintosh:
Mac OS 9.1.x / 9.2.x
Mac OS X
TONELOAD Folder
saved here (p. 171, p. 181).
Driver
The BR-900CD uses a standard DRIVER that is found on
OS. The DRIVER will be installed automatically once
connected with Computer via USB.
SMF Folder
(p. 169, p. 179).
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Using USB (Overview)
USB Folder
Connecting a Computer
Use the USB cable to connect the BR-900CD to your
computer.
WAV and AIFF files loaded to the BR-900CD’s tracks, and
WAV and AIFF files saved on computers (track data
165, p. 167, p. 176, p. 178).
*
Purchase USB cables at computer stores or other retailers.
fig.06-101
Folders and files created on memory cards are
displayed on the computer screen.
To USB connector
of your computer
When you continue with an operation, the “BOSS_BR-900”
icon is added in the computer screen.
*
With certain versions of Windows OS, the “Removable disk
(*:)” icon may be displayed.
USB cable
fig.06-102a
(Ex.) Windows XP
BOSS_BR-900
Notes on Using USB
BOSS_BR-900
Do not perform the following actions when switching to USB
mode or transmitting data. These operations may result in
your computer not responding to the data.
(Ex.) Windows 2000
(Ex.) Macintosh
Removable Disk (*:)
Data on memory cards may also be corrupted.
Do not:
• Disconnect the USB cable
• Eject the memory card
BOSS_BR-900
• Put the computer in suspended (standby) mode or
hibernation, restart, or quit
• Turn off the BR-900CD’s power
When you click the “BOSS_BR-900” icon (or the “Removable
disk (*:)” icon), or double-click the “BOSS_BR-900” icon on
the Macintosh, the “ROLAND” folder is displayed.
When Using Windows XP/2000
If using Windows XP/2000, log on to Windows as one of the
following users:
Open this folder to show the “BR0” folder, the
• Administrator or other user with the privileges of the
Administrators group
“TONELOAD” folder, the “SMF” folder, and the “USB”
folder.
fig.06-102b
• A user whose account type is Computer Administrator
(
)
Ex.
Note that you will not be able to properly quit the USB
connection if the user name is not one of those described
above.
For more details, consult the system administrator for the
computer you are using.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
Backing Up the BR-900CD’s
Data
Reading backup data back into the BR-900CD from
PC (Recover)
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
When restoring data backed up on a computer to the BR-
900CD, drag the “ROLAND” folder to the “BOSS_BR-
900” icon (or the “Removable disk (*:)” icon) and drop it
there (overwriting it).
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
and press [ENTER].
6. Quit the connection to the computer.
The USB screen appears.
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-900”
icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
4. Select “BACKUP” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.06-103d
*
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
fig.06-105a
Task Bar
Task Tray
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
With Windows 2000/Me
*
You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-
900” icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject”
the disk.
The “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk (*:)”) icon is
added to the computer.
2) Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
fig.06-104
(Ex.)
fig.06-105a
BOSS_BR-900
Removable Disk (*:)
5. Back up the data.
1) Click the “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk
(*:)”) icon.
Task Bar
Task Tray
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
2) Drag the “ROLAND” folder to the computer’s
folder and drop it in the folder.
fig.06-105d
7. Press the BR-900CD’s [EXIT].
The USB screen returns to the display.
When you have finished backing up the data, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the USB screen to the display.
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
fig.06-106ad
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
and press [ENTER].
The USB screen appears.
4. Select “EXPORT” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
fig.06-110d
8. When backup of the data is complete, press [EXIT] to
return to the Play screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
Saving BR-900CD Track Data
in WAV/AIFF Format (WAV/
AIFF Export)
You can convert the BR-900CD’s track data into WAV or
AIFF files and save these on your computer. After converting
your mastered tracks to WAV or AIFF files, you can easily
use your computer to create audio CDs with the data, as well
as load the data into audio applications.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the file format, then
press [ENTER].
Resolving insufficient memory issues
when exporting WAV/AIFF
When exporting WAV or AIFF files, memory cards must
have enough free space to hold the files. If too little memory
is available and the “Card Full!” error message appears,
there are two approaches you can take to overcome the
problem.
WAV:
AIFF:
This is an audio format used primarily with
Windows.
This audio format is used primarily with
Macintosh.
6. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-track to be saved.
When saving in mono
Deleting unneeded data from the memory card
fig.06-112d
1. Back up the data on the card (see p. 164).
2. Erase unneeded songs (see p. 77).
want to export (see p. 73).
4. Export the data.
When saving in stereo
Step 5 “HINT” on p. 164).
*
Select the track combination 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
fig.06-111d
Using a high-capacity memory card
For more on supported memory cards (CompactFlash) for
the BR-900CD, refer to the separate sheet “About Memory
Cards.”
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
7. Press [ENTER].
*
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
Conversion of the WAV or AIFF file begins.
Files names are converted as shown below.
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
(Mono)
(Stereo)
Track 1, V-Track 1
TR01_ _ _1.WAV or
TR01_ _ _1.AIF
Track 1/2, V-Track 1
TR0102 _1.WAV or
TR0102 _1.AIF
fig.06-105a
Track 1, V-Track 2
TR01_ _ _2.WAV or
TR01_ _ _2.AIF
:
Track 1/2, V-Track 2
TR0102 _2.WAV or
TR0102 _2.AIF
:
Task Bar
Task Tray
Track 6, V-Track 7
TR06_ _ _7.WAV or
TR06_ _ _7.AIF
Track 7/8, V-Track 7
TR0708_7.WAV or
TR0708_7.AIF
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
Track 6, V-Track 8
TR06_ _ _8.WAV or
TR06_ _ _8.AIF
Track 7/8, V-Track 8
TR0708_8.WAV or
TR0708_8.AIF
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-
900” icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject”
the disk.
*
Converting songs takes approximately the same amount of
time (twice as long in stereo) to complete as it does to play the
source song data.
2) Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
When the conversion is complete, the “BOSS_BR-900”
(or “Removable disk (*:)”) icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-105a
fig.06-104
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
Removable Disk (*:)
8. Export the WAV or AIFF file to the computer.
Task Bar
Task Tray
1) Click the “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk
(*:)”) icon.
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
2) Drag the WAV or AIFF file in the “USB” folder in
the “ROLAND” folder to the computer’s folder
10.Press the BR-900CD’s [EXIT].
and drop it in the folder.
The file format selection screen returns to the display.
fig.06-114d
The contents of the “USB” folder are automatically
deleted the instant the [EXIT] button is pressed.
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the file format selection screen to the
display.
fig.06-106ad
When you have finished exporting the data, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
9. Quit the connection to the computer.
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-900”
icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
11.Repeat Steps 4–9 as needed.
12.When you have finished exporting the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play
screen.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
fig.06-120d
Loading WAV/AIFF Files in BR-
900CD Tracks (WAV/AIFF Import)
You can take WAV or AIFF files on your computer, such as
files created with audio software applications, and load them
to the BR-900CD’s tracks.
●
Wave data in the following formats can be imported.
You cannot import wave data in other formats.
• WAV or AIFF format
• Mono or Stereo
• 8-bit or 16-bit
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track and V-track to be loaded, then press
[ENTER].
• Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz
●
Add the extension “WAV” to imported WAV files and
the extension “AIF” to imported AIFF files.
When loading to the tracks in mono
fig.06-122d
●
●
Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.
Extremely short waveform data (less than
approximately 1 sec) cannot be loaded.
●
●
The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
If the unit is in the Arrange mode at the time of the
import, it takes place in accord with the timing of the
Arrange mode. On the other hand, if the unit is in the
Pattern mode at the time of the import, it takes place in
accord with the timing of the Pattern mode.
When loading to the tracks in stereo
*
Select the track combination 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
fig.06-121d
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
6. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
the measure or position in the track from which
and press [ENTER].
loading is to start, then press [ENTER].
fig.06-123d
The USB screen appears.
4. Select “IMPORT” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
The “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk (*:)”) icon is
added to the computer.
fig.06-104
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
Removable Disk (*:)
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
7. Copy the WAV or AIFF files you want to import.
9. Press the BR-900CD’s [EXIT].
1) Click the “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk
(*:)”) icon.
The WAV or AIFF file is imported.
The contents of the “USB” folder are automatically
deleted at the time the import is finished.
2) Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the “USB”
folder in the “ROLAND” folder.
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] imports the WAV or AIFF file.
*
Only one file can be imported at a time in each import
operation. Do not drag and drop more than one file at a time.
fig.06-126d
fig.06-106ad
Once the import is complete, you are returned to the
When you have finished Copying the data, the Idling
screen for specifying the import-source track/V-Track.
screen returns to the display.
8. Quit the connection to the computer.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-900”
10.Repeat Steps 4–8 as needed.
icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
11.When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play
screen.
*
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
fig.06-105a
Task Bar
Task Tray
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-
900” icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject”
the disk.
2) Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
fig.06-105a
Task Bar
Task Tray
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
5. Import the SMF.
Importing SMFs and Creating
Patterns
1) Click the “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk
(*:)”) icon.
2) Drag the imported SMF to the “SMF” folder in the
“ROLAND” folder.
You can import SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) stored on
memory cards as song patterns. You can easily increase your
collection of song patterns by creating SMFs on your
computer or other device and copying them to memory cards.
fig.03-435d
●
You cannot import SMFs containing more than 999
measures.
●
●
Add the extension “MID” to SMFs you are importing.
When you have finished importing the SMF, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
Use file names containing eight alphanumeric
characters.
6. Quit the connection to the computer.
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-900”
icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
*
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
and press [ENTER].
fig.06-105a
The USB screen appears.
4. Select “BACKUP” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.03-434d
Task Bar
Task Tray
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-
900” icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject”
the disk.
2) Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
fig.06-105a
*
You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
Task Bar
Task Tray
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
The “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk (*:)”) icon is
added to the computer.
fig.06-104
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
Removable Disk (*:)
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
7. Press BR-900CD’s [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the
12.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the import-
Play screen.
destination song pattern, then press [ENTER].
fig.03-439d
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] and then [EXIT] returns the Play screen to the
display.
fig.06-106ad
The import is executed.
*
*
With some SMF files, a considerable amount of time may be
required to finish importing the file.
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
8. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-436d
9. Press [EDIT].
10.Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “SMF,” and
press [ENTER].
The names of the SMFs on the memory card are
displayed.
fig.03-438d
11.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the SMF to be
imported, then press [ENTER].
When importing GM/GS/XG-compatible SMFs, MIDI
Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for
rhythm performances. Thus, only the data on MIDI Channel
10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR-900CD.
Note that the data on other channels is disregarded.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
fig.03-513d
Loading Drum Sounds from
WAV/AIFF Files (Tone Load)
You can import WAV and AIFF files on your computer and
load these as drum sounds (TONE LOAD).
●
●
when tracks are bounced directly to a CD (p. 59).
Wave data in the following formats can be imported.
You cannot import wave data in other formats.
• WAV or AIFF format
• Mono or Stereo
*
You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
• 8-bit or 16-bit
• Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz
●
Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.
The “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk (*:)”) icon is
added to the computer.
●
●
●
●
Extremely short waveform data (less than
approximately 100 msec) cannot be loaded.
fig.06-104
(Ex.)
The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
BOSS_BR-900
Removable Disk (*:)
Add the extension “WAV” to imported WAV files and
the extension “AIF” to imported AIFF files.
5. Import the WAV or AIFF file.
1) Click the “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk
(*:)”) icon.
You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a
single drum kit.
2) Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the
“TONELOAD” folder in the “ROLAND” folder.
(Example)
fig.03-514d
Kick: 3 seconds, snare: 3 seconds,
crash cymbal: 7 seconds → Total 13 seconds
●
Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as “mono”
sounds with the left and right sides mixed.
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF
files, the Idling screen returns to the display.
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
6. Quit the connection to the computer.
[UTILITY].
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-900”
icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
and press [ENTER].
The USB screen appears.
*
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
4. Select “BACKUP” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.06-105a
Task Bar
Task Tray
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
10.Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“CARD,” and press [ENTER].
The names of the WAV and AIFF files on the memory
card are displayed.
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-
900” icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject”
the disk.
*
WAV files are indicated by the symbol “.W”; “.A” indicates
AIFF files.
fig.03-516d
2) Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
fig.06-105a
11.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the WAV or AIFF
Task Bar
Task Tray
file with the drum sound to be loaded.
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
You can preview the sound of the WAV or AIFF file to be
loaded by moving the cursor to “PVW” and pressing
[ENTER].
7. Press BR-900CD’s [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the
Play screen.
12.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the load-
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] and then [EXIT] returns the Play screen to the
display.
destination song drum kit.
S1–5:
Song Drum Kit 1–5
fig.03-517d
fig.06-106ad
13.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the load-
destination song drum sound, then press [ENTER].
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
The load is executed.
To cancel, press [EXIT].
fig.03-518d
8. Press [UTILITY].
9. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“TONE,” and press [ENTER].
fig.03-515d
*
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
WAV and AIFF files in the TONELOAD folder are retained
without being deleted even after this procedure is completed. If
these files are no longer needed, connect the BR-900CD to
your computer via USB and use the computer to delete the
files. Any files that are retained will use the required amount
of memory on the memory card.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
7. Drag the previously backed up BR-864 / BR-532
Using the BR-864 / BR-532’s Data
“ROLAND” folder to the “BOSS_BR-900” (or
“Removable disk (*:)”) icon and drop it there.
fig.06-110bd
You can use the BR-900CD to play BR-864 (or BR-532) data.
*
First be sure to back up the BR-864 / BR-532’s “ROLAND”
folder to the computer.
1. Initializing the memory card on the BR-900CD (p. 196).
2. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
3. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
When you have finished backing up the data, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
[UTILITY].
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
8. Quit the connection to the computer.
and press [ENTER].
With Windows XP
The USB screen appears.
In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-900”
icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
5. Select “BACKUP” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
*
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.06-110ad
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
fig.06-105a
Task Bar
Task Tray
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BOSS_BR-
900” icon (or “Removable disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject”
the disk.
*
You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
2) Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
The “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk (*:)”) icon is
added to the computer.
“Stop USB Disk—drive (*:)” message displayed
there.
fig.06-104
fig.06-105a
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
Removable Disk (*:)
6. Delete the BR-900CD “ROLAND” folder.
Task Bar
Task Tray
1) Click the “BOSS_BR-900” (or “Removable disk
(*:)”) icon, and delete the “ROLAND” folder.
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
dialog box that appears.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Windows
9. Press the BR-900CD’s [EXIT].
The USB screen returns to the display.
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the USB screen to the display.
fig.06-106ad
10.When backup of the data is complete, press [EXIT] to
return to the Play screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
Backing Up the BR-900CD’s Data
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
Reading backup data back into the BR-900CD from
PC (Recover)
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
When restoring data backed up on a computer to the BR-
900CD, drag the “ROLAND” folder to the “BOSS_BR-
900” icon and drop it there (overwriting it).
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
and press [ENTER].
The USB screen appears.
6. Quit the connection to the computer.
4. Select “BACKUP” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
1) Drag the “BOSS_BR-900” icon into the trash.
press [ENTER].
7. Press the BR-900CD’s [EXIT].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.06-106d
The USB screen returns to the display.
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the USB screen to the display.
fig.06-106ad
8. When backup of the data is complete, press [EXIT] to
return to the Play screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
*
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
The “BOSS_BR-900” icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
5. Back up the data.
1) Double-click the “BOSS_BR-900” icon.
2) Drag the “ROLAND” folder to the computer’s
folder and drop it in the folder.
fig.06-109d
When you have finished backing up the data, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
fig.06-115d
Saving BR-900CD Track Data
in WAV/AIFF Format
(WAV/AIFF Export)
You can convert the BR-900CD’s track data into WAV or
AIFF files and save these on your computer. After converting
your mastered tracks to WAV or AIFF files, you can easily
use your computer to create audio CDs with the data, as well
as load the data into audio applications.
Resolving insufficient memory issues
When exporting WAV/AIFF
When exporting WAV or AIFF files, memory cards must
have enough free space to hold the files. If too little memory
is available and the “Card Full!” error message appears,
there are two approaches you can take to overcome the
problem.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the file format, then
press [ENTER].
WAV:
AIFF:
This is an audio format used primarily with
Windows.
This audio format is used primarily with
Macintosh.
Deleting unneeded data from the memory card
1. Back up the data on the card (see p. 175).
6. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the track/V-Track
2. Erase unneeded songs (see p. 77).
to be saved.
When saving in mono
fig.06-117d
want to export (see p. 73).
4. Export the data.
Step 5 “HINT” on p. 175).
Using a high-capacity memory card
For more on supported memory cards (CompactFlash) for
the BR-900CD, refer to the separate sheet “About Memory
Cards.”
When saving in stereo
Select the track combination 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
*
fig.06-116d
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
and press [ENTER].
The USB screen appears.
4. Select “EXPORT” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
7. Press [ENTER].
10.Press the BR-900CD’s [EXIT].
Conversion of the WAV or AIFF file begins.
Files names are converted as shown below.
The file format selection screen returns to the display.
The contents of the “USB” folder are automatically
deleted the instant the [EXIT] button is pressed.
(Mono)
(Stereo)
Track 1, V-Track 1
TR01_ _ _1.WAV or
TR01_ _ _1.AIF
Track 1/2, V-Track 1
TR0102 _1.WAV or
TR0102 _1.AIF
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the file format selection screen to the
display.
Track 1, V-Track 2
TR01_ _ _2.WAV or
TR01_ _ _2.AIF
:
Track 1/2, V-Track 2
TR0102 _2.WAV or
TR0102 _2.AIF
:
fig.06-106ad
Track 6, V-Track 7
TR06_ _ _7.WAV or
TR06_ _ _7.AIF
Track 7/8, V-Track 7
TR0708_7.WAV or
TR0708_7.AIF
Track 6, V-Track 8
TR06_ _ _8.WAV or
TR06_ _ _8.AIF
Track 7/8, V-Track 8
TR0708_8.WAV or
TR0708_8.AIF
*
Converting songs takes approximately the same amount of
time (twice as long in stereo) to complete as it does to play the
source song data.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
11.Repeat Steps 4–9 as needed.
When the conversion is complete, the “BOSS_BR-900”
icon is added to the computer.
12.When you have finished exporting the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play
screen.
fig.06-107
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
8. Export the WAV or AIFF file to the computer.
1) Double-click the “BOSS_BR-900” icon.
2) Drag the WAV or AIFF file in the “USB” folder in
the “ROLAND” folder to the computer’s folder
and drop it in the folder.
fig.06-119d
When you have finished exporting the data, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
9. Quit the connection to the computer.
1) Drag the “BOSS_BR-900” icon into the trash.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
fig.06-127d
Loading WAV/AIFF Files in
BR-900CD Tracks
(WAV/AIFF Import)
You can take WAV or AIFF files on your computer, such as
files created with audio software applications, and load them
to the BR-900CD’s tracks.
●
Wave data in the following formats can be imported.
You cannot import wave data in other formats.
• WAV or AIFF format
• Mono or Stereo
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
• 8-bit or 16-bit
select the track/V-Track to be loaded, then press [ENTER].
• Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz
When loading to the tracks in mono
●
Add the extension “WAV” to imported WAV files and
the extension “AIF” to imported AIFF files.
fig.06-129d
●
●
Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.
Extremely short waveform data (less than
approximately 1 sec) cannot be loaded.
●
●
The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
When loading to the tracks in stereo
Select the track combination 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
If the unit is in the Arrange mode at the time of the
import, it takes place in accord with the timing of the
Arrange mode. On the other hand, if the unit is in the
Pattern mode at the time of the import, it takes place in
accord with the timing of the Pattern mode.
*
fig.06-128d
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
6. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
[UTILITY].
the measure or position in the track from which
loading is to start, then press [ENTER].
fig.06-130d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
and press [ENTER].
The USB screen appears.
4. Select “IMPORT” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
The “BOSS_BR-900” icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
7. Copy the WAV or AIFF files you want to import.
Importing SMFs and Creating
Patterns
You can import SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) stored on
memory cards as song patterns. You can easily increase your
collection of song patterns by creating SMFs on your
computer or other device and copying them to memory cards.
1) Double-click the “BOSS_BR-900” icon.
2) Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the “USB”
folder in the “ROLAND” folder.
*
Only one file can be imported at a time in each import
operation. Do not drag and drop more than one file at a time.
fig.06-133d
●
You cannot import SMFs containing more than 999
measures.
●
●
Add the extension “MID” to SMFs you are importing.
Use file names containing eight alphanumeric characters.
When you have finished copying the data, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
8. Quit the connection to the computer.
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
1) Drag the “BOSS_BR-900” icon into the trash.
cable.
9. Press the BR-900CD’s [EXIT].
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
The WAV or AIFF file is imported.
[UTILITY].
The contents of the “USB” folder are automatically
deleted at the time the import is finished.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
and press [ENTER].
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] imports the WAV or AIFF file.
The USB screen appears.
4. Select “BACKUP” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
fig.06-106ad
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.03-434d
Once the import is complete, you are returned to the
screen for specifying the import-source track/V-Track.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
10.Repeat Steps 4–8 as needed.
11.When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play
screen.
*
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
The “BOSS_BR-900” icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
5. Import the SMF.
10.Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “SMF,” and
press [ENTER].
1) Double-click the “BOSS_BR-900” icon.
2) Drag the imported SMF to the “SMF” folder in the
The names of the SMFs on the memory card are
displayed.
fig.03-438d
“ROLAND” folder.
fig.03-435d
When you have finished importing the SMF, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
6. Quit the connection to the computer.
1) Drag the “BOSS_BR-900” icon into the trash.
7. Press BR-900CD’s [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the
Play screen.
11.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the SMF to be
imported, then press [ENTER].
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] and then [EXIT] returns the Play screen to the
display.
When importing GM/GS/XG-compatible SMFs, MIDI
Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for
rhythm performances. Thus, only the data on MIDI Channel
10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR-900CD.
Note that the data on other channels is disregarded.
fig.06-106ad
12.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the import-
destination song pattern, then press [ENTER].
fig.03-439d
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
8. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-436d
The import is executed.
*
*
With some SMF files, a considerable amount of time may be
required to finish importing the file.
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
9. Press [EDIT].
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
4. Select “BACKUP” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
Loading Drum Sounds from
WAV/AIFF Files (Tone Load)
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.03-513d
You can import WAV and AIFF files on your computer and
load these as drum sounds (TONE LOAD).
●
●
when tracks are bounced directly to a CD (p. 59).
Wave data in the following formats can be imported.
You cannot import wave data in other formats.
• WAV or AIFF format
• Mono or Stereo
• 8-bit or 16-bit
• Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz
*
You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
●
Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.
●
●
●
●
Extremely short waveform data (less than
approximately 100 msec) cannot be loaded.
The “BOSS_BR-900” icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107
The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
(Ex.)
Add the extension “WAV” to imported WAV files and
the extension “AIF” to imported AIFF files.
BOSS_BR-900
You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a
single drum kit.
5. Import the WAV or AIFF file.
1) Click the “BOSS_BR-900” icon.
2) Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the
(Example)
Kick: 3 seconds, snare: 3 seconds,
crash cymbal: 7 seconds → Total 13 seconds
“TONELOAD” folder in the “ROLAND” folder.
fig.03-514d
●
Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as “mono”
sounds with the left and right sides mixed.
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF
files, the Idling screen returns to the display.
[UTILITY].
6. Quit the connection to the computer.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
1) Drag the “BOSS_BR-900” icon into the trash.
and press [ENTER].
The USB screen appears.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
7. Press BR-900CD’s [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the
Play screen.
You can preview the sound of the WAV or AIFF file to be
loaded by moving the cursor to “PVW” and pressing
[ENTER].
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] and then [EXIT] returns the Play screen to the
display.
12.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the load-
destination song drum kit.
fig.06-106ad
S1–5:
Song Drum Kit 1–5
fig.03-517d
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
13.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the load-
destination song drum sound, then press [ENTER].
8. Press [UTILITY].
The load is executed.
9. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“TONE,” and press [ENTER].
fig.03-515d
To cancel, press [EXIT].
fig.03-518d
*
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
WAV and AIFF files in the TONELOAD folder are retained
without being deleted even after this procedure is completed. If
these files are no longer needed, connect the BR-900CD to
your computer via USB and use the computer to delete the
files. Any files that are retained will use the required amount
of memory on the memory card.
10.Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“CARD,” and press [ENTER].
The names of the WAV and AIFF files on the memory
card are displayed.
*
WAV files are indicated by the symbol “.W”; “.A” indicates
AIFF files.
fig.03-516d
11.Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the WAV or AIFF
file with the drum sound to be loaded.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Macintosh
fig.06-110bd
Using the BR-864 / BR-532’s
Data
You can use the BR-900CD to play BR-864 / BR-532 data.
*
First be sure to back up the BR-864 / BR-532’s “ROLAND”
folder to the computer.
1. Initializing the memory card on the BR-900CD (p. 196).
When you have finished backing up the data, the Idling
screen returns to the display.
2. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
8. Quit the connection to the computer.
3. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
1) Drag the “BOSS_BR-900” icon into the trash.
[UTILITY].
9. Press the BR-900CD’s [EXIT].
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “USB,”
The USB screen returns to the display.
and press [ENTER].
*
If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the USB screen to the display.
The USB screen appears.
5. Select “BACKUP” with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
fig.06-106ad
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.06-110ad
10.When backup of the data is complete, press [EXIT] to
return to the Play screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
*
You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
The “BOSS_BR-900” icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107
(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
6. Delete the BR-900CD “ROLAND” folder.
1) Double-click the “BOSS_BR-900” icon, and delete
the “ROLAND” folder.
7. Drag the previously backed up BR-864 / BR-532
“ROLAND” folder to the “BOSS_BR-900” icon and
drop it there.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Display Contrast
Depending on where the BR-900CD is situated, the display
contents may be difficult to read. If this is the case, perform
If you press and hold [UTILITY] while turning the TIME/
the procedure given below to adjust the contrast (1 to 21).
fig.00-309
VALUE dial, you will be able to change the contrast in real
time. Choose the method that best suits the BR-900CD’s
setup.
1,4 4
3
2
2,3
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.00-310d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “LCD Contrast,” and
adjust the contrast with the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.00-311d
4. After completing the adjustment, press [UTILITY] (or
press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Foot Switch or Expression Pedal
fig.05-102d
You can connect an optional foot switch (such as the BOSS
FS-5U or Roland DP-2) or expression pedal (such as the
Roland EV-5 or BOSS FV-300L) to the FOOT SW/EXP
PEDAL jack on the rear panel, allowing you to use your foot
to control a number of functions.
fig.05-101
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and select “Foot SW.”
fig.05-103d
Set the polarity switch
as shown in the following.
Foot Switch
(FS-5U etc.)
Expression Pedal
(Roland EV-5 etc.)
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial and select the foot switch
function.
PLAY:
PUNCH:
FX:
The song will alternate between play and
stop each time you press the foot switch.
*
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5, FV-300L;
optional). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
Switches punch in and out alternately each
time you press the foot switch.
*
*
With the EV-5 and FV-300L, set the MIN volume to 0.
The insert effect will alternate between on
and off each time you press the foot switch.
You can also use an FS-6 (optional) for the foot switch. If
using an FS-6, connect to only one of the FS-6's jacks, either
the A or B jack. Additionally, set the polarity switch to “FS-
5U.” The A&B jack cannot be used.
*
Not operational while Pitch Correction is in use.
5. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
When Using a Foot Switch
Use the following procedure to set the foot switch function.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
When Using an Expression Pedal
and press [ENTER].
The expression pedal functions according to the effect
settings, as shown below.
●
●
101) is set to “PEDAL.”
Functions as a volume pedal when Foot Volume (p. 96)
is set to “ON.”
The expression pedal functions as a pitch shifter pedal
when Type for the Pitch Shifter (p. 98) is set to “PEDAL.”
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuning an Instrument (Tuner)
The BR-900CD has a built-in “chromatic tuner function” that
Changing to the Tuner
allows you to tune your instrument quickly.
1. Press [TUNER] to access the Tuner screen.
fig.05-201d
The built-in tuner supports both guitar and bass guitar.
As an example here, we will explain how to use the tuner to
tune your guitar.
*
It is not possible to play back or record while using the tuner.
Check the following points before you begin.
• That your guitar is connected to the GUITAR/BASS jack.
• That [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] indicator on the INPUT
SELECT button is lit.
2. To exit the tuner, press [TUNER] once again (or press
[EXIT]) to return to the Play screen.
(p. 35).
If you do not want to output the tuning sounds, either turn
down the MASTER fader.
If [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] indicator is off, press [GUITAR/
BASS/MIC2] to turn it on.
*
You cannot switch from the Tuner screen to other screens
(except the Play screen).
Explanation of the indications
that appear while tuning
When the built-in tuner of the BR-900CD is used, the
reference pitch is shown in the upper left of the display, and
the note name in the right. The lower part will display a
tuning guide to indicate the difference between the input
sound and the displayed note.
fig.05-202d
Reference Pitch Note Name
Tuning Guide
If the difference between the input pitch and the correct pitch
is less than +/-50 cents, the tuning guide will indicate the
amount of the difference.
Watch the tuning guide, Watch the tuning guide as you tune
the instrument so that the vertical line is shown at the ▼
mark.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuning an Instrument (Tuner)
Tuning
1. Play a note using the string you are tuning.
Setting the Reference Pitch of
the Tuner
The screen will indicate the note name that is closest to
the pitch of the string you played.
The reference pitch refers to the frequency of the A4 key (i.e.,
the “A” key at the center of a piano keyboard) from the
instrument that serves as the reference pitch during
performances (e.g., piano). On the BR-900CD, you can set the
reference pitch of the tuner to any value between 435 and 445
Hz.
*
Cleanly play a single note only on the string you wish to tune.
2. Continue tuning until the pitch name of the string you
are tuning appears in the display.
Normal tuning
*
This was set to 440 Hz when the unit was shipped from the
factory.
7th
6th
5th
4th
3rd
2nd
1st
string string string string string string string
Guitar
Bass
B
E
A
B
D
E
G
A
B
E
1. Press [TUNER] to access the Tuner screen.
fig.05-206d
D
G
3. Watch the tuning guide as you tune the instrument so
that the vertical line is shown at the ▼ mark.
If the pitch of the string is within +/-50 cents of the
correct pitch, the tuning guide will indicate the
discrepancy between the actual and the correct pitches.
2. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change the reference
Your instrument is tuned above the displayed note (#)
fig.05-203d
pitch.
Calib (Calibrate): 435–445 Hz
3. To exit the tuner, press [TUNER] once again (or press
[EXIT]) to return to the Play screen.
The reference pitch set here is used as the reference pitch for
Pitch Correction (p. 116).
Your instrument is tuned the displayed note
fig.05-204d
Your instrument is tuned below the displayed note (
b)
fig.05-205d
4. Repeat steps 1–3 to tune each of the strings.
*
If you are tuning a guitar that has a vibrato arm, tuning one
string may cause other strings to drift. In this case, you should
first tune the strings approximately so that the correct note
name is displayed, and then re-tune each string.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixing the Output from an External MIDI Device with
the Output from Your BR-900CD (Audio Sub Mix)
The Audio Sub Mix function allows you to mix the signal
Using the Audio Sub Mix function
1. Press [UTILITY].
input from LINE IN with the signal output to LINE OUT.
When performing synchronized playback using the BR-
900CD and an external MIDI device, you can use the Audio
Sub Mix function to mix the output from the external MIDI
device with that of the BR-900CD internally, within the BR-
900CD so you won’t need an external mixer.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.05-503d
Also, since you can output the signal from the MIDI device
without having to first record it to a track on the BR-900CD,
you can use the BR-900CD tracks more effectively.
fig.05-501
Sub Mixer : OFF
External Mixer
LINE
OUT
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
OUTPUT
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “Sub Mixer,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to turn the setting “ON.”
fig.05-504d
fig.05-502
Sub Mixer : ON
4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
5. Turn the LINE SENS knob to adjust the sensitivity to
the input from the external MIDI device.
LINE
IN
LINE
OUT
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
OUTPUT
Even when the Sub Mixer is turned on, if you press INPUT
SELECT [LINE], illuminating its indicator, the signal from
LINE IN that passes through the recorder/mixer block is
given priority, and the Sub Mixer will not work.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Condenser Microphones (Phantom Power)
Most condenser microphones need a supply of power known
as phantom power in order to operate.
1. Before proceeding, turn INPUT SENS GUITAR/BASS/
MIC2 and MIC knobs fully counter-clockwise in order
to reduce the input volumes, and then move the
MASTER fader and INPUT LEVEL knobs all the way
down.
Accordingly, the BR-900CD can supply phantom power at
+48 V to condenser microphones connected to any of the
XLR-type connectors for MIC 1 and MIC 2.
If any of these volumes is not reduced, a loud click may
be output when the phantom power is turned on or off.
2. Press [UTILITY].
Phantom power
The Utility screen will appear.
Condenser microphones generally contain a pair of thin
opposing electrodes. When a voltage is applied across
these electrodes, any vibration resulting from incoming
audio will be output as electrical waves. However, since
these waves are very weak, they must be boosted using
amplification circuitry within the microphone itself.
Phantom power is used to drive this amplification
circuitry.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “Phantom SW,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to turn the setting “ON.”
fig.05-504d
Certain types of condenser microphone use internal
batteries as a source of power; accordingly, there will be
no need to supply phantom power in such a case.
ON:
Phantom power will be supplied.
Note that when turned on, phantom power
will be supplied to all XLR connectors for MIC
1 and 2.
Notes when using the Phantom power
• Phantom power should always be turned off when
audio sources other than condenser microphones are
being connected to the BR-900CD’s. In fact, dynamic
microphones, audio players, and the like can be
damaged by this power supply. Always refer to the
user’s manual for the microphone to be used in
order to confirm its phantom-power specifications.
OFF:
Phantom power will not be supplied.
5. Slowly raise the INPUT SENS knobs, the MASTER
fader and INPUT LEVEL knobs, and confirm that an
audio signal is being received from the condenser
microphone(s).
6. To turn off the phantom power, repeat Steps 1 through
3, and then set “Phantom SW” to “OFF” in Step 4.
• A supply of phantom power is not needed for
certain types of condenser microphone (i.e.,
microphones featuring internal batteries, electric
condenser microphones, etc.). Ensure that phantom
power is set to “OFF” whenever one of these
microphones is connected.
• Phantom power cannot be turned on or off individually
for MIC 1 and 2.
• Phantom power is not supplied to the 1/4” phone jack
for MIC 1 or to the GUITAR/BASS jack.
• The BR-900CD’s MASTER fader, INPUT SENS
GUITAR/BASS/MIC2 and MIC knobs, and INPUT
LEVEL knobs must be moved all the way down
when phantom power is being turned on or off. If
this precaution is not observed, there is a possibility
that amplifiers, speakers, and the like may be
damaged by loud noises generated upon switching.
• The phantom power setting reverts to “OFF” whenever
the BR-900CD is turned on. Remember, therefore, to turn
on this power supply whenever it is needed.
• No supply of phantom power will be needed from the
BR-900CD when using an external microphone pre-amp
or a dedicated, external phantom power supply. Ensure
that phantom power is set to “OFF” in all such cases.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Difficult Songs (Phrase Trainer)
Your BR-900CD features a built-in “Phrase Trainer.” The
Phrase Trainer records from the device connected to the
input jacks (e.g., CD players or MD player) and then allows
Slowing Down the Speed
(Time Stretch)
you to play back a part of that recording repeatedly to allow
The Time Stretch function allows you to slow down the
you to practice that portion again and again. You can also
speed of playback to a half of the normal speed without
slow down the playback to aid in copying fast phrases or
remove the guitar solo sound to play along with only the
changing the pitch.
backing instruments as a practice aid.
1. Press [PHRASE TRAINER].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “TimeStrtch,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set “ON.”
fig.05-310d
The Phrase Trainer can also be used with tracks 5 and 6.
*
You cannot perform recording while you are using the Phrase
Trainer (Time Stretch or Center Cancel).
*
The following buttons are disabled while the Phrase Trainer is
in use.
[PAN/EQ], [LOOP EFFECTS], [RHYTHM PAD]
*
The Rhythm does not sound when Phrase Trainer is on.
ON:
Slows down playback to one-half without
changing the pitch.
1. Record the song you want to copy onto tracks 5 and 6.
OFF:
Pitch and playback speed are not changed.
Recording” (p. 39).
2. Repeat the portion of the song that you want to copy.
Canceling the Center Sound
(Center Cancel)
The Center Cancel function allows you to remove the central
sound of the playback (e.g., vocals or guitar solos).
This is helpful if you want to practice playing along with the
backing instruments.
This will help you practice and copy a difficult phrase or
guitar solo as you can select any portion of the song and
have it repeated.
“Repeating Playback (Repeat)” (p. 51).
3. When using the Time Stretch and Center Cancel
Function, press [PHRASE TRAINER] to make the
indicator light.
*
Depending on how the song was recorded, it may not be
possible to completely remove the central sound.
*
Sounds are played back in mono.
Each time you press [PHRASE TRAINER], the Phrase
Trainer is on (the [PHRASE TRAINER] indicator lights)
and off (the indicator is off).
1. Press [PHRASE TRAINER].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “CentrCncel,” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set it to “ON.”
fig.05-302d
*
When you turn off both the Time Stretch Function and the
Center Cancel Function, it doesn’t light.
ON: Removes central sound (e.g., vocals or guitar solos).
OFF: Normal playback.
Perform the procedure below if the central sound is not
removed as you desire or if you want to emphasize the
bass sound.
*
When CentrCncel is set to “OFF,” subsequent operations are disabled.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Difficult Songs (Phrase Trainer)
3. To emphasize the bass sound, press CURSOR [
]
[
] to select “Low Boost,” and turn the TIME/VALUE
dial and adjust the value so that the bass sound is more
easily heard.
fig.05-303d
4. Press CURSOR [ ] to select “C.Adjust,” and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial and adjust the value of the sound
that you want to remove to decrease its volume.
*
Depending on how the song was recorded, these procedures
may not be able to remove the sounds completely.
fig.05-304d
5. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
You can turn on both the Time Stretch and Center Cancel
functions to use them together.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initializing the BR-900CD’s Settings
Initializing All the BR-900CD’s
Settings
Initializing the System Settings
Follow the procedure below to initialize the system
parameters.
The following settings are initialized together at one time.
• System Settings
“Parameter List” (p. 208).
• Effects (User Patches/Song Patches)
• Rhythm (Arrangements/Patterns/Drum Kits)
1. Press [UTILITY].
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “INI,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.05-603d
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “INI,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.05-601d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
3. Press PARAMETER CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the
The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears in
cursor to “ALL,” and press [ENTER].
the display.
fig.05-604d
The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears in
the display.
fig.05-602d
4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).
4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).
When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.
After the initialization has been completed, you are
returned to the Play screen.
When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.
After the initialization has been completed, you are
returned to the Play screen.
You can perform the same initialization with “INIT
ALL,” by holding down INPUT SELECT [GUITAR/
BASS/MIC2], [MIC], and [LINE] while turning the
POWER switch ON, then pressing [ENTER].
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initializing the BR-900CD’s Settings
Initializing the Effect Settings
Follow the procedure below to initialize the user effect
patches or song effect patches.
Initializing the Rhythm
Arrangements/Patterns/Drum Kits
This initializes the Rhythm Arrangements, Patterns, and
Drum Kits.
1. Press [UTILITY].
• In Song Arrangement, Step 1 is set to the metronome.
• In song patterns and song drum kits, the step is empty.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “INI,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.05-605d
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “INI,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.05-607d
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“U EFX” (user patch) or “S EFX” (song patch), and press
[ENTER].
The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears in
the display.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “RHY,”
and press [ENTER].
(Example) when you select “U EFX”
fig.05-606d
The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears in
the display.
fig.05-608d
4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).
4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).
When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.
After the initialization has been completed, you are
returned to the Play screen.
When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.
After the initialization has been completed, you are
returned to the Play screen.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initializing the BR-900CD’s Settings
4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).
Initializing the Memory Card
When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.
When the initializing has been completed, “Completed!”
appears in the display.
Be aware that when initialized, any existing data on the card
will be erased.
“Keep power on! Song creating...” then appears in the
display, and a new song is automatically created.
*
If you initialize the memory card supplied with the BR-
900CD, the demo songs on the card will be lost.
In this case, the data type selected is HiFi (MT2).
When creation of the song is finished, the play screen
returns to the display.
Before you insert or remove a memory card, always turn off
the BR-900CD first. If a memory card is inserted when the
power is turned on, the data in the memory card may be
destroyed, or the memory card may become unusable.
*
Depending on the capacity of the memory card, initializing
may take more than ten minutes to complete. This is not a
malfunction. The progress of the initializing is shown in the
display. Do not turn off the BR-900CD until the initializing
has been completed.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “INI,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.05-609d
Do not remove the memory card or turn off the BR-900CD
while the display shows “Keep power on!” Doing so can
destroy the data on the memory card and/or render the
memory card itself unusable.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“CARD,” and press [ENTER].
The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears in
the display.
fig.05-610d
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conserving Battery Power (Power Save)
Your BR-900CD is equipped with a power save function that
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select “PowerSave,” and
limits the current dissipation during use.
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the time until the
When the power save function is activated, if no button, or
TIME/VALUE dial on the BR-900CD is used for a certain
amount of time, the BR-900CD will enter the standby state
and turn off the display backlight and button indicators.
Power Save function is activated.
Valid Settings: OFF, 1min, 3min, 5min, 10min
fig.05-704d
Also, when in the standby state, the display will appear as
shown below.
fig.05-701d
4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
*
During updating, “Keep power on!” appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
*
The power save function is especially helpful when the BR-
900CD is running on battery power.
Perform the procedure given below to activate the power
save function.
Deactivating the power save function
Press any of the panel buttons to deactivate power save.
1. Press [UTILITY].
*
After the power save function is deactivated, the Play screen
appears.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
fig.05-703d
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utility Parameter List
Utilities include the following:
AB Quantize (AB Qtz)
Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)
• “System parameters” for setting functions affecting the
entire BR-900CD
This setting turns the “Quantize function” on and off.
• “Sync parameters” for setting synchronized
performance functions
“Quantize” is a function that enables you to set the start and
end points in measure units when making the settings for
repeat playback (the repeated portion).
• “Scrub parameters” for setting scrub functions
Remain Information (Remain Inf)
Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)
About the System Parameters
This section describes the System parameters.
This indicates the remaining amount of recording time
available in the display during recording standby or while
recording is in progress.
1. Press [UTILITY].
Power Save Mode (PowerSave)
Valid Settings: OFF, 1, 3, 5, 10 (min) (Initial value: OFF)
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SYS,”
and press [ENTER].
This setting turns the “Power Save function” on and off.
“Power Save” is a function that reduces power consumption
through such power-saving measures as switching off the
display’s illumination if no operation is performed for a set
period of time (for one, three, five, or ten minutes). This is
effective in preventing excess battery drain.
3. Using CURSOR [ ] [ ], select the System parameter,
then make the setting with the VALUE/TIME dial.
LCD Contrast
Valid Settings: 1–21 (Initial value: 13)
This sets the display contrast.
Foot Switch Assign (Foot SW)
Valid Settings: PLAY, PUNCH, FX (Initial value: PLAY)
About the Sync Parameters
This sets the function for the foot switch (an optional FS-5U
or DP-2) connected to the FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL jack.
This section describes the Sync parameters.
1. Press [UTILITY].
PLAY:
Controls the recorder’s PLAY and STOP
functions.
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
“SYNC,” and press [ENTER].
PUNCH:
FX:
Controls Punch In/Out.
Controls the insert effects On/Off.
3. Using CURSOR [ ] [ ], select the Sync parameter,
then make the setting with the VALUE/TIME dial.
Audio Sub Mix Switch (Sub Mixer)
Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)
Sync Generator (Sync Gen)
Valid Settings: OFF, MTC, MCK (Initial value: OFF)
This setting turns the Audio Sub Mix function (output mix of
the external inputs from LINE IN) on and off.
This sets the synchronization signals output from the MIDI
OUT connector.
Internal mic switch (Mic)
Valid Settings: EXTERNAL, ONBRD+EXT
(Initial value: EXTERNAL)
OFF:
No synchronization signal is output from
MIDI OUT.
Use this setting to input only the sound from the external mic
connected to MIC 1, or to switch on the internal mic and
input a mix of the sounds from the internal and external
mics.
MTC:
MCK:
MTC synchronization signals are output from
MIDI OUT.
MIDI CLOCK synchronization signals are
output from MIDI OUT.
Phantom power switch (Phantom SW)
Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)
MMC Master
Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)
This setting turns the phantom power on and off.
This setting determines whether or not the Master MMC
code is output from the MIDI OUT connector.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utility Parameter List
MTC Type
About the Scrub Parameters
Valid Settings: 30, 29N, 29D, 25, 24 (Initial value: 30)
This section describes the Scrub parameters.
This sets the type of MTC output from the MIDI OUT
connector.
1. Press [UTILITY].
30:
30 frames per second non-drop format. This is
used by audio devices such as analog tape
recorders, and for NTSC format black and
white video (used in Japan and the U.S.).
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to “SCR,”
and press [ENTER].
3. Using CURSOR [ ] [ ], select the Scrub parameter,
29N:
29D:
25:
29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This
is used for NTSC format color video (used in
Japan and the U.S.).
then make the setting with the TIME/VALUE dial.
Scrub Mode From/To
Valid Settings: FROM, TO (Initial value: FROM)
29.97 frames per second drop format. This is
used for NTSC format broadcast color video
(used in Japan and the U.S.).
This sets the “Scrub function” mode.
“Scrub” is a function for repeatedly playing back material of
an extremely short duration (approximately 45 msec).
25 frame per second frame rate. This is used
for SECAM or PAL format video, audio
equipment, and film (used in Europe and
elsewhere).
You can get scrub playback by holding down [STOP] and
pressing [PLAY].
FROM:
Provides about 45 milliseconds of scrub
playback starting from the current location.
24:
24 frame per second frame rate. This is used
for video, audio devices, and film in the US.
TO:
Provides about 45 milliseconds of scrub
playback ending up at the current location.
Rhythm MIDI Channel (RhyMIDI ch)
Valid Settings: 1–16, OFF (Initial value: 10)
Preview Switch (Preview SW)
Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)
This sets the MIDI channel for the Rhythm performance data
output from the MIDI OUT connector. No data is output
when this is set to OFF.
This setting turns the “Preview function” on and off.
When the Preview switch is set to ON, pressing [REW]
during scrub playback provides one second of playback time
starting from the current location, while pressing [FF]
provides one second of playback time ending up at the
current location.
Offset
Valid Settings: 00:00:00-00.0–23:59:59-29.9
(Initial value: 00:00:00-00.0)
Sets the time required to align the song playback and MTC
timing when synchronizing an external device using MTC
from the BR-900CD.
The offset is set as the difference between the “time to which
to align the MTC timing” and the “time to which to align the
song timing.” For example, you want to have the external
device play back with the MTC timing shown below when
the song timing reaches “01h00m00s00,” then set the offset as
follows.
Song Timing MTC for
External Device
Offset Setting
01h00m00s00
01h00m00s00
01h30m00s00
00h30m00s00
00h30m00s00
23h30m00s00
The Offset is stored to each song individually.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Patch List
■ GTR (GUITAR/BASS)
No.
Patch Name
Algorithm
No.
Patch Name
Algorithm
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
JC Clean
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Hard Drv
HyperMtl
Metal Ld
ResoLead
ARPEGGIO
SmallAmp
CleanLd
BluesyLd
Delayed
Wah Lead
FatClean
ClnTubes
Std MkII
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
ACOUSTIC SIM
ACOUSTIC SIM
ACOUSTIC SIM
ACOUSTIC SIM
ACOUSTIC SIM
BASS SIM
HiGainLd
Over Drv
Phased
Crunch
MS Strgt
St WACK
Ambient
Voxy!
St Metal
TREM'TWN COSM GTR AMP
StdAmp F COSM GTR AMP
StdAmp M COSM COMP GTR
St Flang
TEXAS
HiGainMS
StThrash
SWEET LD COSM GTR AMP
BIG COMP COSM GTR AMP
PowChord COSM GTR AMP
Uni-Wah
Gt Pad
D-CompLd COSM COMP GTR
DrivenLd
RockLead
RAGE!
ClearSky
60s UK
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
Crunchy
Aussie
DarfBlus
HeadinWM
BG Lead
FixedWah
BIG 3RDS
ACOUSTY
BrightAc
ACO w/PZ
AC4Slide
Dream Ac
TigtBass
LoosBass
B.SIM+Ch
UprtPhsd
G>FRTLES
Natural
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
BASS SIM
BASS SIM
BASS SIM
BASS SIM
ACOUSTIC GTR
ACOUSTIC GTR
ACOUSTIC GTR
ACOUSTIC GTR
ACOUSTIC GTR
BASS MULTI
TubeStck
StSustin
Country
ClapLead
AcstSolo
TURND211 COSM GTR AMP
MIC'D AC
NICE ACS
WIDE ACS
SLAPnPOP
PhasBass
FLIPTOP
SquezBas
StdoBass
BassTube
PunkBass
SUSTAIN
Big8-Stg
FRETLESS
STADIUM
OCTAVE
NO FRET
DRV BASS
80'sHard
90'sMetl
Bubbling
BIG FUNK COSM COMP GTR
Dirty
MatchDrv
St AltLd
PhatPhas
SocrFild
UK Gtr
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
BASS MULTI
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM BASS AMP
COSM COMP BSS
COSM COMP BSS
COSM BASS AMP
COSM BASS AMP
COSM COMP BSS
BASS MULTI
BASS MULTI
COSM COMP BSS
BASS MULTI
DOWN 2 D COSM GTR AMP
CmpBilly
JC Metal
LATE70's
EARY70's
American
Heavy
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
BASS MULTI
COSM BASS AMP
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Patch List
■ MIC
■ LIN (LINE)
No.
Patch Name
Algorithm
No.
Patch Name
Algorithm
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Vo Comp1
Vo Comp2
Kick Cmp
SnareCmp
BrassCmp
VocalFx1
VocalFx2
VocalFx3
VocalFx4
NARRATOR
VOX DOUB
VOX DETN
KARAOKE
UNISON
STUTTER
D.VADER
ALIEN
COSM COMP VCL
COSM COMP VCL
COSM COMP VCL
COSM COMP VCL
COSM COMP VCL
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOICE TRANS
VOICE TRANS
VOICE TRANS
VOICE TRANS
VOCAL MULTI
VOICE TRANS
VOICE TRANS
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CM+FatEQ
CM+ThnEQ
Tight EQ
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
LO-FI BOX
CM+BigEQ
SMALL EQ
T'WAH UP
T'WAH DW
R.MOD:LO
R.MOD:HI
TotalMod
DEEP FLG
LO&SLOW
LO&FAST
HI&SLOW
HI&FAST
StChorus
SlowChrs
FastChrs
PRE-DLY
VntgPhas
MdrnPhas
DeepPhas
PhatPhas
PS:DETUN
PS:-1OCT
PS:+1OCT
ST DOUBL
MONO>>ST
SLOW PAN
FAST PAN
CHRS+DLY
CHRS+TAP
PH+SLPBK
FLNG+TAP
LoCmbFlt
HiCmbFlt
120 RMOD
PAN+DLY
ST TREM
BullHorn
SEAGULLS
SO DEEP!
BrightCh
FatBrass
Dark EQ
Vocal EQ
BrightEQ
Enh+BCut
ST.PAN
SLOW FLG
FAST FLG
SLOW CHO
SLAPBACK
BigEQ+DL
BalladFx
PTCH-1/2
PTCH+1/2
CM+DS+EH
CM+EH+EQ
CM+DS+EQ
CM+EQ+DB
CM+EQ+DT
120 SLIC
20sRadio
40sRadio
60sRadio
PHONGRPH
Vntg45's
CLASC LP
VntgSmpl
1985Smpl
R-ModSmp
2-BIT DS
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Patch List
■ SML (SIMUL)
No.
Patch Name
Algorithm
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
EQ + JC
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
DELAY+JC
CMP+TWIN
EQ+twin
CMP+SMAL
EQ+CRNCH
EQ+MATCH
DL+match
EQ+VO
COMP+vo
CMP+BLUS
CMP+BG
DELAY+bg
DL+MS(1)
DL+ms(1)
DL+MS1+2
CM&EQ+ms
DLY+SLDN
CMP+METL
EQ+METAL
DI+H-STD
EQ+S-STD
CM+H-JUM
CM+S-JUM
DL+H-ENH
CM+S-ENH
EQ+H-PZO
DL+S-PZO
CMP+PZO1
DL+PZO2
DIR+SIM1
CMP+SIM2
EQ+SIM3
DL+SIM4
CMP+SIM5
COMP+AC
COMP+CLS
COMP+DIS
COMP+FAR
COMP+DYN
COMP+MIC
COMP+DIR
NS+VNTG
CMP+CMP1
DI+COMP2
CMP+CMP3
NS+COMP4
CMP+CMP5
COMP+SML
COMP+LRG
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mastering Tool Kit Patch List
■ MTK (MASTERING TOOL KIT)
No.
Patch Name
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Mix Down
PreMastr
Live Mix
Pop Mix
DanceMix
JinglMix
HardComp
SoftComp
CleanCmp
DanceCmp
OrchComp
VocalCmp
Acoustic
RockBand
Orchestr
LowBoost
Brighten
DJsVoice
PhoneVox
Pitch Correction Patch List
■ PCR (PITCH CORRECTION)
No.
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
Patch Name
Alto
Soprano
Tenor
Baritone
Machine
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arrangement / Pattern List
Preset Arrangement List
Each of the preset Arrangement (except Metro4/4) is set so that a three-measure BREAK, followed by V1 (verse) comes after the E (ending).
No.
Arrangement
Name
Initial
Tempo
Beat
Starting measure
BREAK
V1
Drum
Kit
IN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V1
2
3
3
5
5
2
5
3
5
4
2
5
3
3
3
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
2
2
5
3
5
5
3
5
5
5
3
5
5
5
2
2
3
2
3
3
2
2
5
2
-
F1
4
V2
6
F2
8
V2
10
11
11
13
13
18
13
19
13
12
10
21
19
19
19
13
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
17
13
10
10
21
19
13
13
11
13
21
13
11
13
21
21
10
18
19
10
11
11
10
18
13
10
-
END
12
13
15
15
15
22
15
23
15
15
12
25
21
21
21
15
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
21
15
12
13
25
23
15
15
13
15
25
15
13
15
25
25
12
22
23
12
13
13
12
22
15
12
-
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P28
P29
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P38
P39
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
P48
P49
P50
ROCK1
ROCK2
ROCK3
ROCK4
ROCK5
ROCK6
HdRck1
HdRck2
HdRck3
HdRck4
HdRck5
HEAVY1
HEAVY2
HEAVY3
HEAVY4
HEAVY5
POP1
POP2
POP3
POP4
POP5
POP6
POP7
POP8
BALLAD1
BALLAD2
BLUES1
BLUES2
BLUES3
BLUES4
R&B1
R&B2
R&B3
R&B4
R&B5
130
130
118
118
104
86
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
16
17
17
19
17
24
18
25
20
18
13
29
23
24
24
16
17
15
15
17
15
15
16
24
18
14
16
29
26
17
18
18
18
26
19
15
17
30
29
15
23
25
13
15
14
14
24
19
14
-
19
20
20
22
20
27
21
28
23
21
16
32
26
27
27
19
20
18
18
20
18
18
19
27
21
17
19
32
29
20
21
21
21
29
22
18
20
33
32
18
26
28
16
18
17
17
27
22
17
-
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
STD 2
ROOM
HARD
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
HARD
HARD
HARD
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
STD1
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
STD 1
STD 2
STD 1
ROOM
STD 2
STD 2
STD 1
STD 2
STD 1
STD 1
STD 1
STD 2
STD 1
STD 1
JAZZ
5
7
9
6
8
8
9
8
10
8
7
5
7
9
9
10
9
11
9
8
10
12
12
17
12
18
12
11
9
130
98
126
120
118
210
120
120
162
109
118
118
118
118
140
96
6
11
9
9
9
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
8
8
5
13
11
11
11
9
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
9
9
6
19
17
17
17
12
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
16
12
9
66
151
70
89
124
192
124
148
110
154
108
96
5
6
9
12
10
8
8
6
8
12
8
13
11
9
9
7
9
13
9
20
18
12
12
10
12
20
12
9
94
JAZZ1
JAZZ2
JAZZ3
140
140
140
120
118
93
102
110
114
118
118
96
5
7
7
9
11
20
20
9
JAZZ
JAZZ
STD2
ROOM
HIP-HOP
808
HIP-HOP
HOUSE
JAZZ
12
12
5
13
13
6
FUSION1
FUSION2
HipHop1
HipHop2
FUNK
HOUSE
Cntry1
Cntry2
Other1
Other2
Other3
Metro4/4
9
10
4
10
11
6
17
18
8
6
6
5
7
7
6
10
10
9
JAZZ
9
7
5
10
9
6
17
11
9
REGGAE
STD 2
ROOM
STD 1
118
125
120
-
-
-
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arrangement / Pattern List
Preset Pattern List
Measure
F1 V2
Initial
Tempo
Pattern Name
(Abbreviation shown in display)
Beat
IN
1
2
2
4
4
1
4
2
4
3
1
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
1
1
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
4
1
-
V1
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
4
2
2
1
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
-
F2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
-
E
4
4
2
4
2
2
3
2
5
3
1
4
2
3
3
1
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
3
2
3
5
3
1
4
2
2
5
4
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
4
2
-
ROCK1
ROCK2
ROCK3
ROCK4
ROCK5
ROCK6
Hard Rock 1(HdRc1)
Hard Rock 1(HdRc2)
Hard Rock 1(HdRc3)
Hard Rock 1(HdRc4)
Hard Rock 1(HdRc5)
HEAVY1 (HEVY1)
HEAVY2 (HEVY2)
HEAVY3 (HEVY3)
HEAVY4 (HEVY4)
HEAVY5 (HEVY5)
POP1
POP2
POP3
POP4
POP5
POP6
POP7
POP8
BALLAD1 (BALD1)
BALLAD2 (BALD2)
BLUES1 (BLUS1)
BLUES2 (BLUS2)
BLUES3 (BLUS3)
BLUES4 (BLUS4)
R&B1
R&B2
R&B3
R&B4
R&B5
130
130
118
118
104
86
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
-
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
-
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
4
2
2
1
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
-
130
98
126
120
118
210
120
120
162
109
118
118
118
118
140
96
66
151
70
89
124
192
124
148
110
154
108
96
94
JAZZ1
JAZZ2
JAZZ3
FUSION1 (FUSN1)
FUSION2 (FUSN2)
HipHop1 (H.Hp1)
HipHop2 (H.Hp2)
FUNK
140
140
140
120
118
93
102
110
114
118
118
96
HOUSE
Cntry1 (Cnty1)
Cntry2 (Cnty2)
OTHER1 (Othr1)
OTHER2 (Othr1)
OTHER3 (Othr1)
Metro
118
125
-
BREAK
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter List
(*1) If you want to save the settings as the currently selected song data, hold down [STOP] and press [REC].
(*2) Stored in the BR-900CD.
(*3) Not Stored.
Mixer Parameter (*1)
Parameter Name
Input Select
Display
-
Initial Value
GUITAR/BASS
INPUT
Valid Settings
GUITAR/BASS, MIC, LINE, SIMUL (*3)
INPUT, BOUNCE, MASTERING (*3)
L50–C00–R50
Recording Mode
PAN
REC MODE
PAN
C00
Chorus / Delay / Doubling
Parameter Name
Display
Initial Value
Valid Settings
Effect Type
FX Type
CHORUS
CHORUS, DELAY, DBLN
Chorus
Chorus Send Level
Send
In,Tr1–Tr6, Tr78: 0, Rhy: 0
0–100
Rate
Rate
10
0–100
Depth
Depth
Pre Dly
E.Level
10
0–100
Pre Delay
Effect level
10.0 ms
100
0.5–50.0 ms
0–100
Delay
Delay Send Level
Send
In,Tr1–Tr6, Tr78: 0, Rhy: 0
0–100
Delay Time
Feedback
Dly Tme
Feedback
E.Level
Rev Send
370 ms
30
10–1000 ms
0–100
Effect Level
Reverb Send
30
0–100
50
0–100
Doubling
Doubling Send Level
Send
In,Tr1–Tr6, Tr78: 0, Rhy: 0
0–100
Delay Time
Effect level
Dly Tme
E.Level
20.0 ms
100
0.5–50.0 ms
0–100
Reverb
Parameter Name
Reverb Send level
Reverb Type
Reverb Time
Tone
Display
Send
Initial Value
Valid Settings
0–100
In,Tr1–Tr6, Tr78: 0, Rhy: 0
Type
HALL
2.0 s
0
HALL, ROOM
0.1–10.0 s
Rev Time
Tone
-12–0–+12
0–100
Effect Level
E.Level
50
Track EQ
Parameter Name
Display
EQ
Initial Value
Valid Settings
OFF, ON
Equalizer On/Off
Tr1–6, 7/8: OFF
Tr1–6, 7/8: 0 dB
Tr1–6, 7/8: 100 Hz
Tr1–6, 7/8: 0 dB
Tr1–6, 7/8: 1.0 kHz
Equalizer Low Gain
Equalizer Low Frequency
Equalizer High Gain
Equalizer High Frequency
Lo G
Lo F
-12–0–+12 dB
40 Hz–1.5 kHz
-12–0–+12 dB
500 Hz–18 kHz
Hi G
Hi F
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter List
Recorder Parameter (*1)
Parameter Name
Recording Track
V-Track
Display
Initial Value
Valid Settings
-
-
Track 1–6, Track 1/2–7/8
1–8
V-TRACK
1
Auto Punch On/Off
Auto Punch In/Out
Locator
-
-
-
-
OFF
OFF, ON
-
-
-
Any time
Any time
Repeat
Any time
*
The settable range for Auto Punch In/Out, Locator and Repeat will change slightly depending on the MTC Type (sync parameter).
Song Parameter (*1)
Parameter Name
Display
Initial Value
SONG0000
HiFi (MT2)
OFF
Valid Settings
8 characters
Song Name
SONG NAME
Type
Data Type
HiFi (MT2), STD (LV1), LONG (LV2)
OFF, ON
Song Protect
Protect SW
Copy Prtct
Digital Copy Protect
OFF
OFF, ON
Phrase Trainer
Time Stretch
Time Strtch
CentrCncel
Low Boost
C.Adjust
OFF
OFF
0
OFF, ON (*3)
OFF, ON (*3)
0–12 (*3)
Center Cancel
Center cancel Low Boost
Center cancel Adjust
C00
L10–C00–R10 (*3)
System Parameter (*2)
Parameter Name
Display
LCD Contrast
Foot SW
Initial Value
13
Valid Settings
1–21
LCD Contrast
Foot Switch Assign
Audio Sub Mix Switch
Internal Mic On/Off Switch
Phantom Power Switch
AB Quantize
PLAY
OFF
PLAY, PUNCH, FX
OFF, ON
Sub Mixer
Mic
EXTERNAL
OFF
EXTERNAL, ONBRD+EXT
OFF, ON (*3)
OFF, ON
Phantom SW
AB Qtz
OFF
Remain Information
Power Save Mode
Calibrate (Tuner)
Remain Inf
PowerSave
Calib
OFF
OFF, ON
OFF
OFF, 1, 3, 5, 10 (min)
435–445 (Hz)
440
Sync Parameter (*2)
Parameter Name
Sync Generator
MMC Master
Display
Initial Value
Valid Settings
OFF, MTC, MCK
OFF, ON
Sync Gen
MMC Master
MTC Type
RhyMIDI Ch
Offset
OFF
OFF
MTC Type
30
24, 25, 29D, 29N, 30
1–16, OFF
Rhythm MIDI Channel
Offset
10
00:00:00-00.0
Any time
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter List
CD Parameter
Parameter Name
Pre Gap
Display
Initial Value
Valid Settings
Pre Gap
2.0 sec
0.0–3.4 sec (*3)
Scrub Parameter (*3)
Parameter Name
Scrub From/To Mode
Preview Switch
Display
Initial Value
FROM
Valid Settings
FROM, TO
From/To
Preview SW
OFF
OFF, ON
Rhythm Parameter (*1)
Parameter Name
Arrangement / Pattern / Off
Arrangement
Display
Initial Value
OFF
Valid Settings
-
OFF, ARRANGE, PATTERN
P01–50, S01–05
Arrangement Name
P01
Pattern
Pattern Name
-
P001
P001–327, S001–100
UPPER, LOWER, OFF
Rhythm Pad (*3)
OFF
Arrangement Parameter (*1)
Parameter Name
Display
Initial Value
Valid Settings
1–50
Step
current setting
current setting
current setting
current setting
Drum Kit
1
Tempo
-
25.0–250.0
Starting Measure
Pattern
001
001–999
-
-
P001–327, S001–100
Drum Kit
STD1, STD2, ROOM, HARD, JAZZ,
HIP-HOP, HOUSE, REGGAE, 808,
SongKit1–5
Pattern Parameter
Parameter Name
Display
Initial Value
Valid Settings
Measure (*1)
current setting
current setting
current setting
current setting
1
1–999
Time Signature (*1)
Tempo (*3)
4/4
1/1–8/1, 1/2–8/2,1/4–8/4, 1/8–8/8
25.0–250.0
-
Quantize (*3)
ꢁ
ꢂ, ꢂ 3, ꢀ, ꢀ 3, ꢁ, ꢁ 3, ꢃ, ꢃ 3, HI
Click (*3)
Click
3
0–3
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If the BR-900CD does not function as you expect, please
check the following points before assuming that a
malfunction has occurred.
Cannot record
❍
❍
❍
Is a song protected?
Is a memory card inserted?
If this does not resolve the problem, contact a nearby Roland
service center or your dealer.
Does the memory card have insufficient remaining
capacity?
❍
❍
Has the recording mode (REC MODE) been selected
correctly?
Problems with the Sound
Has the Phrase Trainer or Scrub Playback function
been turned on?
No sound
The recorded sound contains noise or
distortion
❍
Is the power of the BR-900CD and of the connected
equipment turned on?
❍
❍
❍
Are the audio cables connected correctly?
Are any audio cables broken?
❍
Is the input sensitivity set appropriately?
If the input sensitivity is too high, the recorded sound
will be distorted. If it is too low, the input sound will be
buried in noise. Adjust the SENS knob so that the level
meter moves as much as possible without causing the
PEAK indicator to light.
Has the volume of the connected amp or mixer been
lowered?
❍
Has the MASTER fader or headphone volume of the
BR-900CD been lowered?
❍
❍
Is a memory card inserted?
*
Set it so the “0” is not indicated in the level meter.
Has the wrong card been inserted?
❍
Are the track output levels appropriate?
You can use commercially available CompactFlash cards
as memory cards for the BR-900CD; The 3.3 V type with
the capacities of 32 MB to 1 GB can be used.
If you hear noise or distortion after bouncing tracks, the
output level of the tracks was too high.
❍
Is a mic with high output impedance connected
directly to the BR-900CD?
❍
Are you attempting to play back a short phrase of less
than 1.0 seconds?
The BR-900CD is designed with a wide margin of
headroom. Also, since the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks are low
impedance inputs, the recording level may be too low,
depending on the response of some mics. In such cases,
connect the mic via a mic preamp to the LINE IN jacks
on the BR-900CD before recording.
Phrases of 1.0 seconds or less cannot be played.
The volume level of the instrument
connected to GUITAR/BASS jack or
LINE IN jacks is too low
❍
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a
Cannot digitally record to an external
device
resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
❍
Does the sampling rate of the BR-900CD match that of
the digital audio device?
A specific track cannot be heard
Set the digital audio device to a sampling rate of 44.1
kHz.
❍
❍
❍
Has the track volume been lowered?
Is the V-Track setting for a different V-Track?
Has the track been muted?
❍
Does the digital signal format match?
Your digital audio device may use a non-standard digital
signal format. Connect the BR-900CD to a digital audio
device that supports CP-1201 or S/P DIF.
The input source cannot be heard
❍
Did you adjust the SENS knob?
❍
Has INPUT SELECT been muted? (The INPUT
SELECT indicator will be dark.)
❍
❍
Has the INPUT LEVEL knob been set to “MIN”?
If you are using the internal microphone, is “Mic”
under UTILITY set to “ONBRD+EXT”?
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Problems with the Memory Card
Synchronization Problems
“Unsupported Card!” is displayed
Cannot Synchronize
❍
Do you have a compatible (CompactFlash) memory
When using MTC to synchronize the BR-900CD with a MIDI
card inserted in the BR-900CD?
sequencer, the BR-900CD must be the master device.
❍
Is the memory card fully and securely inserted?
❍
❍
❍
Is the MIDI cable connected correctly?
Is the MIDI cable broken?
Memory card data was damaged
Has the sync generator been set to the desired
(p. 158)
are possible. Please initialize the card once again (p. 196).
❍
device been set to the same MTC type? (p. 158)
❍
❍
❍
❍
Was the power turned off while the recorder was
operating?
❍
❍
❍
Has the MIDI sequencer been set correctly?
Is the MIDI sequencer ready to play back?
Was a strong physical shock applied to the memory
card?
Could the power have been turned off while the
memory card was being accessed?
Does the other device support the MMC commands of
the BR-900CD?
Was the card initialized on a PC or digital camera?
Synchronization with the rhythm
machine is lost
Problems with the CD-R/RW Drive
❍
Is the connected rhythm machine receiving Song
Position Pointer?
Certain rhythm machines are unable to receive Song
Position Pointer while in Pattern mode.
Cannot remove the CD-R/RW disc
❍
Is the power turned on?
Check the MIDI implementation for the rhythm machine
you are using.
The CD-R/RW disc cannot be removed unless the power
is turned on.
❍
Is a screen for reading from, or writing to CD-R/RW
discs showing in the display?
It is not possible to eject the disc when you’re in a screen
for reading/writing CD-R/RW discs. Press [EXIT]
several times to return to the Play screen, then press the
EJECT button again.
Problems with USB
Idling screen not displayed
❍
Is the USB cable properly connected?
Cannot read from/write to CD-R/RW discs
❍
Is your computer's operating system compatible with
the BR-900CD?
❍
Is the BR-900CD in a level position?
Windows: Windows Me/2000/XP
Macintosh: Mac OS 9.1.x / 9.2.x or OS X
❍
Was a strong physical shock applied to the CD-R/RW
drive?
❍
❍
❍
Is the disc correctly placed in the CD-R/RW drive?
Are you using the right type of CD-R/RW disc?
Are you using a CD-R disc that has already been
written to, or a CD-RW disc that may be too old?
❍
Is the CD-R/RW drive being “force ejected?”
Pressing a straightened paper clip or similar object into
the emergency eject hole in the CD-R/RW drive’s front
side forces ejection of the CD-R/RW disc. However, the
CD-R/RW drive may not operate correctly after this is
done. Should this be the case, turn off the power, then
turn it back on again.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
If you attempt an incorrect operation or if an operation could
not be executed, the display will indicate an error message.
Card Read Error!
Cause:
Memory card data cannot be loaded correctly.
Refer to this list and take the appropriate action.
Solution 1: Turn off the BR-900CD, properly insert the
Battery Low!
Solution 2: Initialize the card (p. 196).
Cause:
The batteries are depleted (6 x AA dry-cell
batteries).
*
If the same message appears after you have taken the above
steps, it is possible that the memory card is malfunctioning.
Solution:
Replace the batteries as soon as possible (p. 23).
Card Write Error!
Cause:
An error occurred while writing data to the
Blank Disc!
Cause:
memory card.
Disc in the CD-R/RW drive contains no data.
Solution:
The memory card must be initialized (p. 196).
Also, the song data you had been attempting to
save will be lost.
Solution:
Load a CD-R/RW disc that has data written on it.
Cannot Edit! Quantize is Low!
Cause:
CD Full!
During Step Recording of a pattern, the Quantize
setting is too coarse, so multiple entries are
appearing at the same point in the matrix.
Cause 1:
The CD-R/RW disc is full, and no more data
can be written to it.
Cause 2:
When creating an audio CD, the total time of the
tracks exceeds the capacity of the CD-R/RW disc.
Solution:
Fine the Quantize setting (p. 130).
Cannot Edit! This is a Preset
Solution:
Either reduce the amount of data to be written,
or place a new CD-R/RW disc in the drive and
start the procedure over again.
Cause:
Preset data is selected; you cannot edit this data.
Solution:
Copy the song data and then edit that.
CD Medium Error!
Cannot Erase!
Cause:
There is a problem with the CD-R/RW disc.
Cause:
No further steps can be erased.
Alternatively, the disc on the CD-R/RW drive
is unreadable.
Solution:
The Pitch Correction Map must contain a
minimum of one step.
Solution 1: Confirm that the correct type of disc is placed in
the CD-R/RW drive.
Cannot Insert!
Solution 2: Use a new CD-R/RW disc.
Cause:
No further steps can be inserted.
CD Read Error!
Solution:
The Pitch Correction Map can contain a
maximum of 99 steps.
Cause:
An error occurred while reading data from the
CD-R/RW disc.
Solution:
This may be due to a low-quality or dated disc.
Try using a new CD-R/RW disc.
Cannot Program! Rhythm Off.
Cause:
The Rhythm is switched off, so you cannot
program it.
CD Write Error!
Cause:
An error occurred while writing data to the
CD-R/RW disc.
Solution:
Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] to select
Arrange mode or Pattern mode.
Solution:
This may be due to a low-quality or dated disc.
Try using a new CD-R/RW disc.
Cannot Punch In for CD-R/RW!
Cause:
You cannot punch in when a CD is specified as
the bounce destination.
Data Too Short!
Cause:
You have attempted to import a WAV/AIFF
Solution:
If using the punch-in function, specify a track as
the bounce destination.
file shorter than one second or to load a WAV/
AIFF file shorter than 0.1 seconds using the
Tone Load function.
Card Full!
Cause:
Solution:
Make sure the WAV/AIFF file to be loaded is at
least one second in length, or if using the Tone
Load function, select a WAV/AIFF file that is at
least 0.1 seconds in length.
It is not possible to record or copy due to small
memory capacity.
164, p. 175), and delete unneeded data.
Cause:
You attempted to write an audio CD with a
track that is less than four seconds in length.
Solution2: Perform the Song Optimize operation (p. 78).
Solution:
Prepare tracks being written to audio CDs so
that they are at least four seconds long.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Disc Not Ready!
Turn Off Pitch Correction!
Cause:
There is no CD-R/RW disc in the drive.
Cause:
You cannot use the loop effects or phrase
trainer while Pitch Correction is on.
Solution:
Place a CD-R/RW disc in the drive.
Solution:
Press [PITCH CORRECTION] to turn it off, and
try the operation once again.
Drive Busy!
Cause:
If this message appears after you have been
Memory Full!
using the memory card with the BR-900CD, the
data on the card has become fragmented,
causing delays in reading and writing data.
Cause:
The total time of the drum sounds for one
drum kit that can be loaded with tone load has
exceeded 13 seconds.
Or, you could be using memory card with a
slow processing speed.
Solution:
Cause:
Make sure the drum sounds being loaded by
seconds (p. 135, p. 171, p. 181).
*
In cases of unfavorable disc access conditions, such as when
track editing, punch-in/out recording, etc. is used to connect
phrases (musical data) of several seconds.
No rhythm pattern memory remaining.
Solution 1: Delete any unneeded rhythm patterns (p. 133).
Solution 1: Reduce the number of tracks that are played
back simultaneously. Use track bouncing etc. to
combine tracks, or erase data from tracks which
you do not need to playback, and then try the
playback again.
rhythm patterns (p. 129, p. 132).
Cause:
You have attempted to import an SMF that
exceeds the available memory for imported files.
Solution:
Delete any unneeded rhythm patterns (p. 133).
Solution 2: Reduce the number of tracks that are being
recorded simultaneously.
MIDI Buffer Full!
Solution 3: Reduce the Data Type (STD (LV1) or LONG
(LV2)), and then try creating the song again.
Cause:
Excessive number of MIDI messages being
output.
Cause:
There is a problem with the CD-R/RW disc,
preventing audio playback.
Solution:
If the disc is dirty, wipe the disc to clean it, then
try playing the disc again.
Solution 2: Set the RhyMIDI ch to “OFF” (p. 157).
Event Full!
No Card!
Cause:
Cause:
The BR-900CD has used up all the events that
You have tried to operate the recorder, or
access the memory while the memory card
(CompactFlash) is not inserted, or is not
inserted properly.
can be handled by one song.
Solution:
Perform the Song Optimize operation (p. 78).
What is an event?
Cause:
The memory card has been removed after
selection of data on that memory card.
The smallest unit of memory used by the BR-900CD to store
recorded results on a memory card is the event. A newly
created song provides approximately 2,000 events per song.
For each track, one recording pass uses two events. Operations
such as punch-in/out or track copy also use up events.
The number of events that are used up will fluctuate in a
complex way.
Solution:
Turn off the BR-900CD, properly insert the
memory card, then turn the BR-900CD back on.
No File!
Cause:
The file you are trying to import with WAV/
AIFF/SMF import or Tone Load was not found.
Even if there is capacity remaining on the memory card, further
recording or track editing will not be possible if all of the events
are used up. In such cases, an error message such as “Event
Full” will appear.
Solution:
Have the file you want to import ready.
No Song!
Cause:
There are no songs on the memory card.
Solution:
Cause:
Create a new song (p. 32).
Finalized Disc!
Incorrect data is in the song folder, or the
necessary data is not present.
Cause:
Data has already been written to the CD-R/RW
disc, and the data has been finalized.
Solution:
Restore the data backed up on the computer to the
folder to the BR-900CD (p. 164, p. 175).
Solution:
Place a CD-R/RW disc that has not been
finalized in the drive.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Not Available in Mastering Mode!
Stop P.Trainer!
Cause:
You cannot carry out this operation with
Cause:
while the Phrase Trainer (p. 192) is operating.
“MASTERING” selected as the recording mode.
Solution:
First press the [REC MODE] button to switch
the recording mode to “INPUT” or “BOUNCE,”
then proceed with the operation.
Solution:
Press [PHRASE TRAINER] to turn off the
Phrase Trainer.
Stop Recorder!
Not Blank Disc!
Cause:
The operation you attempted cannot be done
Cause:
The CD-R/RW disc already has data written to it.
while the recorder is running (playing or
recording).
Solution:
Place a CD-R/RW disc with no data written to it
(a blank disc) in the CD-R/RW drive.
Solution:
Press [STOP] to stop playback or recording.
the disc in order to create a blank disc (p. 153).
Too Many Songs!
Cause:
You are attempting to create more that 100 songs.
Not CD-RW Disc!
Solution:
Erase unneeded songs (p. 77).
Cause:
The disc is not a CD-R/RW disc, so the data
cannot be erased.
Unformatted!
Solution:
Use a CD-RW disc.
Cause:
The Memory card is not formatted by DOS.
Solution 1: Turn off the BR-900CD, properly insert the
Not Finalized Disc!
Cause:
The disc cannot be played back properly
Solution 2:
Initialize the card (p. 196).
because it has not been finalized.
Solution:
Finalize the disc (p. 143).
Unsupported Card!
Cause:
The memory card (CompactFlash) or
Power Down!
Cause:
MicroDrive inserted is not compatible with the
BR-900CD.
Internal power source voltage is below than
guaranteed workable range.
Solution:
Use a memory card compatible with the BR-
900CD (32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash with a
power-source voltage of 3.3 V).
Solution:
In case of using PSC adaptor:
Cable might be broken or adaptor itself might
be malfunctioning. Please contact Roland
Service or Roland authorized dealers.
Unsupported Format!
In case of using batteries:
Please replace with new batteries (p. 23).
Cause 1:
The BR-900CD cannot recognize or use the
format of the inserted memory card.
BR-900CD (p. 196).
Protected!
Cause:
You are attempting to write data to a song that
Cause 2:
You have attempted to load an incompatible
WAV or AIFF file or SMF to the BR-900CD.
has protection switched on.
Solution:
(p. 79).
Solution 2: Check the format of the WAV or AIFF file or SMF.
Use AC Adaptor!
Set Bounce Target to Track!
Cause:
You have attempted to use the CD-R/RW drive
while running on battery power.
Cause:
You cannot use the Rhythm-related functions
(switching Arrangement/Pattern/Off, editing,
switching Rhythm pads, Tone Load) when a
CD is specified as the bounce destination.
Solution:
You cannot use the CD-R/RW drive while the
BR-900CD is powered by the batteries. If you
want to use the CD-R/RW drive, first save the
song, turn off the power to the BR-900CD,
connect the AC adaptor, then turn the power
back on.
Solution:
When using Rhythms, specify a track as the
bounce destination.
Set the Repeat!
Cause:
Repeat A (Starting Point) and B (Ending Point)
Wrong Disc!
is not set.
Cause:
A disc other than the required CD-R/RW disc
Solution:
Set the Repeat A and B (p. 51).
is placed in the drive.
Solution:
Place a CD-R/RW disc in the drive.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIGITAL RECORDING STUDIO
Model BR-900CD
Date: Jan. 11, 2005
Version: 1.00
MIDI Implementation
Frame Count
Seconds Count
Minutes Count
Hours Count
xxxyyyyy
1. TRANSMITTED DATA
xxx
Reserved (000)
*
This message is transmitted according to a SMF data regardless of the followings when
the data is played.
yyyyy
Frame No. (0-29)
xxyyyyyy
xx
■Channel Voice Message
●Note On
If the MIDI parameter “RhyMIDI ch” is set to “1–16,” note numbers/velocities
corresponding to the Rhythm pattern will be transmitted on the MIDI channel that is
specified for the Rhythm.
Reserved (00)
Seconds (0-59)
yyyyyy
xxyyyyyy
xx
Reserved (00)
Minutes (0-59)
yyyyyy
Status
9nH
Second
mmH
Third
llH
xyyzzzzz
x
Reserved (0)
yy
Time Code type
n = MIDI Channel No.:
mm = Note No.:
ll = Velocity:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
01H - 7FH (1 - 127)
*
The time code types defined by the MIDI specification correspond to the BR-900CD Sync
parameter “MTC Type” as follows.
MIDI specification setting
“MTC Type” setting
●Note Off
0 = 24 Frames/Sec
1 = 25 Frames/Sec
24
If the MIDI parameter “RhyMIDI ch” is set to “1–16,” note numbers corresponding to the
25
Rhythm pattern will be transmitted on the MIDI channel specified for the Rhythm.
2 = 30 Frames/Sec (Drop Frame)
3 = 30 Frames/Sec (Non Drop Frame)
zzzzz Hours (0–23)
29D
29N or 30
Status
8nH
Second
mmH
Third
llH
●Song Position Pointer
The current position is transmitted by the Song Position Pointer Message when the BR-
900CD is stopped, or the locate operation has been performed, if the SYNC parameter “Sync
Gen” is set to “MCK.”
n = MIDI Channel No.:
mm = Note No.:
ll = Velocity:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
40H (64)
❍Notes sounded by the Rhythm correspond to note numbers as follows.
Status
F2H
Second
mmH
Third
nnH
Rhythm Tone
Cross Stick
Metronome (click)
Metronome (bell)
Kick
Note Number
G 1 (31)
A 1 (33)
A#1 (34)
C 2 (36)
D 2 (38)
F 2 (41)
F#2 (42)
A 2 (45)
A#2 (46)
C 3 (48)
C#3 (49)
D 3 (50)
D#3 (51)
G#3 (56)
mm (LSB), nn (MSB) = Song Position Point: 00H 00H - 7FH 7FH
■System Realtime Message
Transmitted when “Sync Gen” is “MCK” in the SYNC parameter.
Snare
Tom 4
Closed hi-hat
Tom 3
●Timing Clock
Status
Open hi-hat
Tom 2
F8H
Crash cymbal
Tom 1
●Active Sensing
Status
Ride cymbal
Cowbell
FEH
*
This is transmitted at intervals of approximately 200 msec.
■System Common Messages
●MIDI Time Code Quarter Frame Messages
●Start
If the Sync parameter “Sync Gen” is set to “MTC,” quarter frame messages of the time code
type specified by “MTC Type” will be transmitted when the BR-900CD is running
(recording or playing). The transmitted time counts are summed to “SMPTE (MTC) Offset
Time” as the song top is “00:00:00:00”.
Status
FAH
●Continue
Status
Status
F1H
Second
FBH
mmH (= 0nnndddd)
●Stop
nnn = Message type:
0 = Frame count LS nibble
Status
1 = Frame count MS nibble
2 = Seconds count LS nibble
3 = Seconds count MS nibble
4 = Minutes count LS nibble
5 = Minutes count MS nibble
6 = Hours count LS nibble
7 = Hours count MS nibble
0h - FH (0 - 15)
FCH
dddd = 4 bit nibble data:
Bit Field is assigned as follows.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation
2. MIDI Machine Control
■System Exclusive Message
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
iiH,ddH,..., eeH
■MIDI Machine Control Command Reference
Byte
F0H
iiH
Description
●STOP (MCS)
Status of Exclusive Message
ID Number
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
7EH Universal Non Realtime Message
7FH Universal Realtime Message
Data: 00H - 7FH (0-127)
:
7FH, Dev, 06H, 01H
ddH
:
Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
01H
F7H
Description
Status of Exclusive Message
eeH
F7H
Data
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
MMC Command Message
STOP (MCS)
*
The BR-900CD can transmit and receive Universal System Exclusive messages.
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
*
If the transport switch [STOP] was pressed, the BR-900CD transmits this message.
●Universal System Exclusive Message
●DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
❍MIDI Machine Control Commands
Status
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
F0H
7FH, Dev, 06H, 03H
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
7FH, Dev, 06H, aaH,..., bbH
Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
03H
F7H
Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
aaH
:
Description
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
MMC Command Message
Device ID (7FH)
DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
MMC Command Message
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
Command
:
*
If the transport switch [PLAY] was pressed, the BR-900CD transmits this message.
bbH
F7H
Command
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
●RECORD STROBE
*
see ‘2. MIDI Machine Control’ section
Status
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
F0H
7FH, Dev, 06H, 06H
Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
06H
F7H
Description
●MIDI Time Code Commands
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
❍Full Message
Basic operation of quarter frame messages will be handled.
MMC Command Message
RECORD STROBE
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
7FH,Dev,01H, 01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH F7H
*
Transmitted when recording to the audio tracks begins.
Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
01H
01H
hrH
Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
●RECORD EXIT
Status
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
sub-ID #1 (MIDI Time Code)
sub-ID #2 (MIDI Full Message)
Hours and Type 0 yy zzzzz
yy type
F0H
7FH, Dev, 06H, 07H
Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
07H
F7H
Description
Status of Exclusive Message
00 = 24 Frames/sec
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
01 = 25 Frames/sec
10 = 30 Frames/sec (Drop Format)
11 = 30 Frames/sec (Non Drop Format)
zzzzz hours (00–23)
MMC Command Message
RECORD EXIT
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
mnH
mnH
frH
Minutes (00–59)
Seconds (00–59)
*
Transmitted when recording to the audio tracks ends.
Frames (00–29)
F7H
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
●MMC RESET
Status
Data Bytes
Status
F7H
*
When you change the song position, the device ID will be transmitted as 7FH.
F0H
7FH, Dev, 06H, 0DH
Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
0DH
F7H
Description
-------------------------------------------------------------------
About Device ID
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
Exclusive messages are not assigned to any particular MIDI channel. Instead, they have
their own special control parameter called device ID. The Roland exclusive messages use
device IDs to specify various devices.
MMC Command Message
MMC RESET
BR-900CD transmits 7FH as the device ID.
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
-------------------------------------------------------------------
*
When powered on the BR-900CD transmits this message.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation
<Example 1>
●LOCATE (MCP)
What is the decimal equivalent of 5AH?
❍Format 2 - LOCATE [TARGET]
From the above table, 5AH = 90.
Status
F0H
Data Bytes
Status
7FH, Dev, 06H, 44H, 06H, 01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH F7H
<Example 2>
What is the decimal equivalent of the 7-bit hexadecimal values 12 34H?
Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
44H
06H
01H
Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
From the above table, 12H = 18 and 34H = 52
Thus, 18 x 128 + 52 = 2356
MMC Command Message
LOCATE(MCP)
<Example 3>
What is the decimal equivalent of the nibbled expression 0A 03 09 0DH?
Number of Bytes
“TARGET” sub command
hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH
Standard Time with Sub Frame
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)
From the above table, 0AH = 10, 03H = 3, 09H = 9, 0DH = 13
Thus, the result is ((10 x 16 + 3) x 16 + 9) x 16 + 13 = 41885
F7H
<Example 4>
What is the nibbled equivalent of the decimal number 1258?
*
This message is transmitted when the song position moves.
16 ) 1258
16 ) 78
16 )
...10
...14
... 4
4
0
3. Supplementary material
From the above table, 0=00H, 4=04H, 14=0EH, 10=0AH
Thus the result is 00 04 0E 0AH
●Decimal/Hexadecimal table
(hexadecimal values are indicated by a following “H”)
■MIDI Machine Control (MMC) Command,
Information Field / Response Reference
MIDI uses 7-bit hexadecimal values to indicate data values and the address and size of
exclusive messages. The following table shows the correspondence between decimal and
hexadecimal numbers.
●Commands Transmitted
Command
Action
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+
| D
| H
|| D
| H
|| D
| H
|| D
| H
|
01H STOP
STOP
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+
03H DEFERRED PLAY
06H RECORD STROBE
07H RECORD EXIT
0DH MMC RESET
44H 01H LOCATE TARGET
PLAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 | 00H ||
1 | 01H ||
2 | 02H ||
3 | 03H ||
4 | 04H ||
5 | 05H ||
6 | 06H ||
7 | 07H ||
8 | 08H ||
9 | 09H ||
10 | 0AH ||
11 | 0BH ||
12 | 0CH ||
13 | 0DH ||
14 | 0EH ||
15 | 0FH ||
16 | 10H ||
17 | 11H ||
18 | 12H ||
19 | 13H ||
20 | 14H ||
21 | 15H ||
22 | 16H ||
23 | 17H ||
24 | 18H ||
25 | 19H ||
26 | 1AH ||
27 | 1BH ||
28 | 1CH ||
29 | 1DH ||
30 | 1EH ||
31 | 1FH ||
32 | 20H ||
33 | 21H ||
34 | 22H ||
35 | 23H ||
36 | 24H ||
37 | 25H ||
38 | 26H ||
39 | 27H ||
40 | 28H ||
41 | 29H ||
42 | 2AH ||
43 | 2BH ||
44 | 2CH ||
45 | 2DH ||
46 | 2EH ||
47 | 2FH ||
48 | 30H ||
49 | 31H ||
50 | 32H ||
51 | 33H ||
52 | 34H ||
53 | 35H ||
54 | 36H ||
55 | 37H ||
56 | 38H ||
57 | 39H ||
58 | 3AH ||
59 | 3BH ||
60 | 3CH ||
61 | 3DH ||
62 | 3EH ||
63 | 3FH ||
64 | 40H ||
65 | 41H ||
66 | 42H ||
67 | 43H ||
96 | 60H |
97 | 61H |
98 | 62H |
99 | 63H |
REC / PUNCH IN
PUNCH OUT
RESET
68 | 44H || 100 | 64H |
69 | 45H || 101 | 65H |
70 | 46H || 102 | 66H |
71 | 47H || 103 | 67H |
72 | 48H || 104 | 68H |
73 | 49H || 105 | 69H |
74 | 4AH || 106 | 6AH |
75 | 4BH || 107 | 6BH |
76 | 4CH || 108 | 6CH |
77 | 4DH || 109 | 6DH |
78 | 4EH || 110 | 6EH |
79 | 4FH || 111 | 6FH |
80 | 50H || 112 | 70H |
81 | 51H || 113 | 71H |
82 | 52H || 114 | 72H |
83 | 53H || 115 | 73H |
84 | 54H || 116 | 74H |
85 | 55H || 117 | 75H |
86 | 56H || 118 | 76H |
87 | 57H || 119 | 77H |
88 | 58H || 120 | 78H |
89 | 59H || 121 | 79H |
90 | 5AH || 122 | 7AH |
91 | 5BH || 123 | 7BH |
92 | 5CH || 124 | 7CH |
93 | 5DH || 125 | 7DH |
94 | 5EH || 126 | 7EH |
95 | 5FH || 127 | 7FH |
LOCATE
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+
D: decimal
H: hexadecimal
*
*
Decimal expressions such as used for MIDI channel, Bank Select, and Program Change
will be the value 1 greater than the decimal value given in the above table.
Since each MIDI byte carries 7 significant data bits, each byte can express a maximum of
128 different values. Data for which higher resolution is required must be transmitted
using two or more bytes. For example a value indicated as a two-byte value of aa bbH
would have a value of aa x 128 + bb.
*
*
For a signed number (+/-), 00H = -64, 40H = +/-0, and 7FH = +63. I.e., the decimal
equivalent will be 64 less than the decimal value given in the above table. For a two-byte
signed number, 00 00H = -8192, 40 00H = +/-0, and 7F 7FH = +8191. For example the
decimal expression of aa bbH would be aa bbH - 40 00H = (aa x 128 + bb - 64 x 128.
Hexadecimal notation in two 4-bit units is used for data indicated as 'nibbled'. The
nibbled two-byte value of 0a 0b H would be a x 16 + b.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Implementation Chart
M
I
DIGITAL RECORDING STUDIO
Model BR-900CD
Date : Jan. 11, 2005
D
I
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version : 1.00
I
m
p
l
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
e
m
e
n
t
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1–16
1–16
X
* 1
* 1
**************
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
X
**************
X
X
X
a
t
Mode
i
31, 33, 34, 36, 38, 41, 42,
45, 46, 48–51, 56
o
n
* 1
Note
Number :
X
True Voice
**************
C
h
a
r
Note ON
Note OFF
O 9n V=1–127
O 8n V=64
V=1–127
* 1
* 1
* 4
X
X
Velocity
t
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
O
O
X
X
* 4
* 4
Pitch Bend
O
O
* 4
* 4
X
X
Control
Change
Prog
Change
O
X
* 4
: True #
**************
**************
System Exclusive
O
X
: Quarter Frame
O
O
X
X
* 2
* 3
X
X
X
X
System
Common
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
System
Real Time
: Clock
: Command
O
O
* 3
* 3
X
X
: All sound off
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
:
Reset all controllers
: Local ON/OFF
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: System Reset
Aux
Message
* 1 Rhythm only.
* 2 “SYNC parameter: Sync Gen = MTC” only.
Notes
* 3 “SYNC parameter: Sync Gen = MCK” only.
* 4 Transmitted according to SMF data when the data is played back.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
BR-900CD: Digital Recording Studio
● Tracks
Track: 8
● Nominal Input Level (Variable)
GUITAR/BASS jack:
-20 dBu
V-Track: 64 (8 V-Tracks per each Track)
MIC (TRS balanced/XLR) jack: -40 dBu
*
Up to 2 tracks can be recorded simultaneously, and up to 8
tracks can be played back simultaneously.
LINE IN jack:
-10 dBu
● Input Impedance
GUITAR/BASS jack:
1 M Ω
● Useful Capacity
CompactFlash: 32 M–1 G bytes
MIC 1/2 jack
:
1.5 k Ω (HOT-COLD)
1.0 k Ω (HOT-GND, COLD-GND)
10 k Ω
(TRS balanced/XLR)
LINE IN jack:
● Data Type
HiFi (MT2)
STANDARD (LV1)
LONG (LV2)
● Nominal Output Level
LINE OUT jack:
-10 dBu
● Signal Processing
AD Conversion: 24 bit, ∆∑ Modulation + AF-AD (Guitar/Bass)
● Output Impedance
LINE OUT jack:
2 k Ω
24 bit, ∆∑ Modulation + AF-AD (Mic 1/2)
24 bit, ∆∑ Modulation (Line)
Headphone jack:
140 Ω
● Recommended Load Impedance
LINE OUT jack:
24 bit, ∆∑ Modulation (Simul)
20 k Ω or greater
DA Conversion: 24 bit, ∆∑ Modulation
Internal Processing: 24 bit (digital mixer section)
Headphone jack:
32–100 Ω
● Residual Noise Level
* AF method (Adaptive Focus method)
Adaptive Focus is a unique Roland/BOSS technology that
allows the signal noise (S/N) ratios of AD and DA converters
to be vastly improved.
LINE OUT jack:
-85 dBu or less
(INPUT SELECT: GUITAR/BASS/MIC2, input terminated with
1 k Ω, INPUT SENS: CENTER, IHF-A, typ., EFFECT: OFF)
*
0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms
● Sample Rate
44.1 kHz
● Interface
USB Connector
● Frequency Response
20 Hz to 20 kHz (+1/-3 dBu)
DIGITAL OUT: S/PDIF 16–24 bit (Optical type)
● Display
● Recording Time (conversion in one track)
16 Characters x 2 Lines + Approx. 100 icons (Backlit LCD)
Data type
● Connectors
GUITAR/BASS jack (1/4 inch phone type)
Capacity
HiFi (MT2) STD (LV1) LONG (LV2)
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
16 min.
32 min.
65 min.
130 min.
260 min.
520 min.
19 min.
39 min.
78 min.
156 min.
312 min.
624 min.
24 min.
49 min.
98 min.
196 min.
392 min.
784 min.
MIC 1 jacks (XLR balanced type, TRS balanced 1/4 inch
phone type)
MIC 2 jacks (XLR balanced type)
LINE IN jack (RCA Phono type)
LINE OUT jack (RCA Phono type)
DIGITAL OUT connector (Optical type)
FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL jack (1/4 inch phone type)
PHONES jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type)
MIDI OUT connector
*
The above-listed recording times are approximate. Times may
be slightly shorter depending on the number of songs that were
created.
*
The above number is the total for all the tracks that are used. If
each of the eight tracks contain an equal amount of data, the
length of the resulting song will be approximately 1/8 of the
above.
USB connector
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
● Power Supply
DC 9 V; Supply AC Adaptor (PSC series), Dry battery x 6
● Current Draw
900 mA (Average using AC adapter and CD-R/RW)
300 mA (When powered by batteries; CD-R/RW drive not used)
*
Expected battery life under continuous use:
Alkaline: 4 hours
These figures will vary depending on the actual conditions of use.
● Dimensions
351 (W) x 225 (D) x 69 (H) mm
13-7/8 (W) x 8-7/8 (D) x 2-3/4 (H) inches
● Weight
2.2 kg/4 lbs 14 oz (excluding batteries)
● Accessories
AC Adaptor (PSC-series)
Demo Card (Already inserted when the BR-900CD is shipped)
Owner’s Manual
Separate sheet (“About Memory Cards” etc.)
Roland Service (information sheet)
● Options
Foot Switch:
FS-5U
Pedal Switch:
Expression Pedal
DP-2 (Roland)
EV-5 (Roland), FV-300L
:
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications
and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without
prior notice.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
BANK
+ ...................................................................................... 69, 72, 75
Bass ............................................................................................. 99
Bit ................................................................................................ 97
Body ............................................................................................ 93
BPF .............................................................................................. 97
Bright .......................................................................................... 99
30 ...................................................................................... 158, 199
A
AC ............................................................................................... 99
Audio CD menu screen ............................................................. 140
Auto Punching In/Out ............................................................... 54
C
Calib .......................................................................................... 189
Charct ......................................................................................... 93
B
Backup ...................................................................... 145, 164, 175
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
CHO/DLY ............................................................ 43–44, 108–109
CHORUS ..................................................................... 44, 108, 111
Chorus ................................................................................ 94, 108
Chromatic Tuner ....................................................................... 188
CLEAN ....................................................................................... 98
Click .......................................................................................... 129
CompactFlash ............................................................. 5, 16, 27, 31
Compatible OS .......................................................................... 162
Compressor ......................................................................... 94, 107
Condenser mic .............................................................................. 7
Condenser microphone ............................................................. 191
Connecting .................................................................... 26, 33, 163
Converting ........................................................................ 165, 176
COPY ........................................................................ 125, 133, 137
De-esser ...................................................................................... 95
Defretter ...................................................................................... 95
DELAY ........................................................................ 44, 108, 111
Delay ................................................................................... 95, 108
[DELETE/MUTE] ....................................................... 41, 129, 132
Deleting
Locator .................................................................................. 64
Demo Song .................................................................................. 29
Depth .................................................................... 94–97, 100, 111
DETUNE ..................................................................................... 98
DIGITAL ..................................................................................... 96
Digital Copy ................................................................................ 80
Digital Copy Protect .................................................................... 80
DIGITAL OUT connector ............................................................ 22
Dir Level ....................................................................... 97, 99–100
Direct CD Bounce ........................................................................ 59
Disc tray ...................................................................................... 21
Display ........................................................................................ 21
Display Contrast ....................................................................... 186
Dither ........................................................................................ 107
Dly Time ................................................................................... 106
Dly Tme .............................................................................. 95, 111
Doubling ............................................................... 44, 95, 108, 111
DOWN ...................................................................................... 101
Driver ........................................................................................ 162
Drum Kit ................................................................................... 134
Drum sounds ............................................................................ 149
Dynamic microphone ................................................................ 191
Copy Prtct ................................................................................... 81
Copying
Waveform data ................................................................... 148
Copyright .................................................................................. 154
Cord Hook .................................................................................. 22
Correction Event Map ............................................................... 116
Correction Event Map screen .................................................... 116
COSM ......................................................................................... 15
COSM BASS AMP ....................................................................... 90
COSM COMP BSS ....................................................................... 90
COSM COMP GTR ..................................................................... 89
COSM COMP VCL ..................................................................... 91
COSM Comp/Limiter ................................................................. 94
COSM GTR AMP ........................................................................ 88
E ................................................................................................ 120
E.Level .......................................................................... 94–95, 111
[EDIT] ............................................................... 123, 126, 130, 134
EDIT ............................................................................ 85, 103, 115
CPY ................................................................................. 67–68, 77
Creating
Pattern ........................................................................ 126, 130
Edit Effect screen ......................................................................... 85
Editing
Track ..................................................................................... 67
CRUNCH .................................................................................... 98
Cutoff F ....................................................................................... 97
EDT ............................................................................................. 78
Effect Patch ............................................................. 35, 84–85, 202
Effect screen ................................................................................ 85
[EFFECTS] ....................................................................... 35, 85, 87
Effects ......................................................................................... 35
EJECT button .......................................................................... 7, 21
Emergency eject hole ............................................................... 7, 21
Ending ...................................................................................... 120
ENHANCE ................................................................................. 93
Enhancer ............................................................................. 95, 106
D
DATA ............................................................................... 145, 148
Data CD menu screen ............................................................... 145
Data type ..................................................................................... 32
DBLN .......................................................................... 44, 108, 111
DC IN jack .................................................................................. 22
D-Comp ...................................................................................... 94
D:E ........................................................................................ 96, 98
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
EQ ....................................................................................... 43, 110
Equalizer ....................................................................... 43, 96, 105
G
Gain .............................................................................. 97, 99, 106
GAP .......................................................................................... 140
Ground terminal ......................................................................... 23
GTR ............................................................................... 36, 85, 202
GUITAR/BASS ........................................................................... 33
GUITAR/BASS jack .................................................................... 22
[GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] ............................................ 34, 39, 48, 84
ERASE ....................................................... 124–125, 133, 138, 153
Erasing
Track ............................................................................... 74–75
H
ERS ....................................................................................... 73, 77
HALL .......................................................................... 44, 108, 111
Headphones jack ......................................................................... 20
HI ...................................................................................... 127, 130
Hi Attack ........................................................................... 106–107
Hi F ........................................................................................... 112
Hi G .......................................................................................... 112
Hi Gain ....................................................................................... 96
Hi Level .................................................................................... 107
Hi Ratio ............................................................................. 106–107
Hi Release ......................................................................... 106–107
Hi Thres ............................................................................ 106–107
HI.FEML ................................................................................... 115
HI.MALE .................................................................................. 115
HiFi (MT2) ............................................................................ 32, 62
High Freq .................................................................................. 105
High Gain ................................................................................. 105
High Mid Freq .......................................................................... 105
High Mid Gain .......................................................................... 105
High Mid Q ............................................................................... 105
High Q ...................................................................................... 105
High Type ................................................................................. 105
Hi-M F ......................................................................................... 96
Hi-M Gin ..................................................................................... 96
Hi-M Q ........................................................................................ 96
HPF ............................................................................................. 97
HUMBUCK ................................................................................. 93
Track ..................................................................................... 76
Expander ................................................................................... 106
EXPORT .................................................................... 150, 165, 176
Expression Pedal ................................................................. 27, 187
EXTERNAL ................................................................................. 34
External MIDI Device ................................................................ 190
F ................................................................................................ 120
Feedback ............................................................................. 95, 111
[FF] ........................................................................................ 29, 66
Fill ............................................................................................. 120
Filter ............................................................................................ 96
FINAL ....................................................................................... 144
Finalize ............................................................................. 141, 143
Flanger ........................................................................................ 96
Foot SW ....................................................................... 54, 187, 198
FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL ............................................................ 187
FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL jack ....................................................... 22
Foot Switch ................................................................... 27, 54, 187
Foot Volume ............................................................................... 96
Formant1 ................................................................................... 100
Formant2 ................................................................................... 100
Formatting
Memory card ........................................................................ 31
FRAME ....................................................................................... 21
Freq ..................................................................................... 95, 106
Frequency ........................................................................... 99, 101
FROM ....................................................................................... 199
From/To ................................................................................... 199
FS-6 ........................................................................................... 187
FX .............................................................................................. 187
Fx Level ................................................................................. 97, 99
FX Type ....................................................................... 43, 108, 111
FX1 Level .................................................................................. 100
FX2 Level .................................................................................. 100
I
Idling screen ...................................................................... 164, 175
IMP ........................................................................................... 154
IMPORT ............................................................ 148, 153, 167, 178
SMF ............................................................................ 169, 179
IN .................................................................................. 35, 49, 120
In Send ...................................................................................... 109
INF ................................................................................ 62, 94, 106
INI ............................................................................... 31, 194–196
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Loading
System setting ..................................................................... 194
INPUT .............................................................................. 40, 50, 87
Input ................................................................................... 94, 106
Input Gain ................................................................................. 105
INPUT LEVEL knob .................................................................... 35
INPUT SELECT ..................................................................... 39, 48
INPUT SELECT button ............................................................... 34
Input sensitivity .......................................................................... 35
INSERT ..................................................................................... 124
WAV/AIFF file ........................................................... 167, 178
LOCAT ............................................................................... 87, 114
[LOCATOR] ................................................................................ 64
Locator ........................................................................................ 64
Locator Point ............................................................................... 64
LO-FI BOX .................................................................................. 91
Lo-Fi Box ..................................................................................... 96
Lo-M F ........................................................................................ 96
Lo-M Gin ..................................................................................... 96
Lo-M Q ........................................................................................ 96
LONG (LV2) ......................................................................... 32, 62
Loop Effect .................................................................. 43, 108, 111
[LOOP EFFECTS] ................................................................ 43, 108
Loop Recording ........................................................................... 56
Low Boost ................................................................................. 193
Low Freq ................................................................................... 105
Low Gain ............................................................................ 96, 105
Low Mid Freq ........................................................................... 105
Low Mid Gain ........................................................................... 105
Low Mid Q ................................................................................ 105
Low Q ....................................................................................... 105
Low Type .................................................................................. 105
LPF .............................................................................................. 97
LR ............................................................................................... 35
Insert Effect ............................................................... 35–36, 84, 88
Step ..................................................................................... 124
Internal microphone .................................................................... 34
Intro .......................................................................................... 120
ISO9660 ..................................................................................... 151
J
JC-120 .......................................................................................... 98
JUMBO ........................................................................................ 93
K
KIT ............................................................................................ 134
L
LCD Contrast .................................................................... 186, 198
Level ............................................................... 93–96, 99, 101, 107
Level Meter ........................................................................... 21, 35
Limiter ...................................................................................... 107
LIN ...................................................................................... 36, 203
[LINE] ............................................................................. 34, 39, 84
LINE ..................................................................................... 33, 48
LINE IN jacks .............................................................................. 22
LINE OUT jacks .......................................................................... 22
Lo Attack .......................................................................... 106–107
Lo F ........................................................................................... 112
Lo G .......................................................................................... 112
Lo Level .................................................................................... 107
Lo Mix Lvl ................................................................................... 95
Lo Ratio ............................................................................. 106–107
Lo Release ......................................................................... 106–107
Lo Thres ............................................................................ 106–107
LO.FEML .................................................................................. 115
LO.MALE .................................................................................. 115
LOAD ....................................................................................... 136
M
Mac OS 9.1.x .............................................................................. 162
Mac OS 9.2.x .............................................................................. 162
Mac OS X .................................................................................. 162
Macintosh ......................................................................... 162, 175
MANUAL ................................................................................... 98
Manual .................................................................................. 96–97
Manually Punching In/Out ........................................................ 53
MASTER ..................................................................................... 87
Master ................................................................................. 99, 158
MASTER fader ...................................................................... 28, 35
Master Tape/Disc ....................................................................... 80
MASTERING ...................................................................... 40, 102
Mastering .................................................................................. 102
Mastering screen ....................................................................... 102
Mastering Tool Kit ...................................................... 40, 102–105
Mastering Tool Kit Patch ........................................................... 205
MATCH ...................................................................................... 98
Matrix ............................................................................... 127, 131
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
MCK ......................................................................................... 158
MEAS .......................................................................................... 21
Measure ............................................................................ 127, 130
MEMORY CARD ........................................................................ 20
Saving memory ..................................................................... 78
METAL ....................................................................................... 98
METAL D .................................................................................... 98
Metronome ............................................................................... 129
[MIC] .................................................................................... 34, 39
MIC ................................................................... 20, 36, 48, 85, 203
Mic ........................................................................................ 7, 198
Mic Dist ....................................................................................... 93
Mic Level .................................................................................. 100
Mic Select screen ......................................................................... 34
Mic Set ...................................................................................... 100
MIC1 ........................................................................................... 33
MIC1 jacks .................................................................................. 22
MIC2 ........................................................................................... 33
MIC2 jack .................................................................................... 22
Microphone pre-amp ................................................................ 191
Mid Attack ........................................................................ 106–107
Mid Level .................................................................................. 107
Mid Ratio .......................................................................... 106–107
Mid Release ....................................................................... 106–107
Mid Thres .......................................................................... 106–107
Middle ........................................................................................ 99
MIDI ................................................................................. 156–157
MIDI channel ............................................................................ 156
MIDI connector ......................................................................... 156
MIDI Implementation Chart ..................................................... 156
MIDI IN .................................................................................... 156
MIDI OUT ................................................................................. 156
MIDI OUT connector .................................................................. 22
MIDI Sequencer ........................................................................ 158
MIDI Sound Module ................................................................. 157
MIDI THRU .............................................................................. 156
Mix Level .................................................................................... 95
Mix Lvl ...................................................................................... 106
Mixer ......................................................................................... 107
MMC ......................................................................................... 160
MMC Master ..................................................................... 160, 198
Mode ......................................................................................... 100
Modify Fil ................................................................................... 97
Mono recording .............................................................. 39, 48, 59
MOV ..................................................................................... 71–72
Track ............................................................................... 70–72
MS ............................................................................................... 98
MTC .................................................................................. 158–159
MTC Type ......................................................................... 158, 199
MTK .......................................................................................... 205
Mute ............................................................................................ 41
N
NAM ........................................................................................... 78
NAME ......................................................... 86, 104, 115, 124, 132
Naming
Song ...................................................................................... 78
NEW ........................................................................................... 33
Noise ........................................................................................... 96
Noise Suppressor ........................................................................ 97
Note .......................................................................................... 116
O
Oct Level ..................................................................................... 97
Octave ......................................................................................... 97
OFF ............................................................................................. 37
Offset ................................................................................ 159, 199
On/Off ........................................................ 93–101, 105–107, 112
ONBRD+EXT .............................................................................. 34
OPT ............................................................................................. 78
OS ............................................................................................. 162
Output ...................................................................................... 107
Output Gain .............................................................................. 105
Overdubbing ............................................................................... 41
P
P.MAP ....................................................................................... 116
PAN .............................................................................. 42, 49, 138
Drum sounds ...................................................................... 138
[PAN/EQ] ............................................................... 42–43, 49, 110
PAN-SQR .................................................................................. 100
PAN-TRI ................................................................................... 100
Patch ........................................................................................... 35
Patch Name ................................................................. 86, 104, 115
PATTERN ................................................................................... 37
Pattern ................................................ 37, 120, 122, 126, 169, 179
Pattern Mode ...................................................................... 37, 120
Pattern Name ............................................................................ 132
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Pattern Number ........................................................................ 123
PCR ........................................................................................... 205
PEAK ........................................................................................ 105
Peak .......................................................................................... 101
PEAK indicator ........................................................................... 35
PEDAL ................................................................................ 98, 101
Phantom power .................................................................... 7, 191
Phantom SW ..................................................................... 191, 198
Phaser ......................................................................................... 97
[PHRASE TRAINER] ................................................................ 192
Phrase Trainer ........................................................................... 192
PickUp ........................................................................................ 93
PIEZO ......................................................................................... 93
Pitch ............................................................................................ 98
[PITCH CORRECTION] ............................................................ 114
Pitch Correction ................................................................ 113–114
Pitch Correction Edit ................................................................. 115
Pitch Correction Patch ............................................................... 205
Pitch Shifter ................................................................................. 98
[PLAY] ........................................................................ 29, 143, 152
PLAY ........................................................................................ 187
Play Screen .................................................................................. 28
PUNCH ............................................................................... 54, 187
Punch-in/out .............................................................................. 53
Punching In ................................................................................. 53
Punching Out .............................................................................. 53
PVW .......................................................... 136, 148–149, 172, 182
Q
Quantize ..................................................................... 52, 127, 130
R
Rack160 ....................................................................................... 94
RADIO ........................................................................................ 96
Rate ................................................................. 94, 96–97, 100, 111
Ratio ............................................................................................ 94
REAL ........................................................................................ 126
Realtime Recording ................................................................... 126
[REC] .................................................................................... 50, 53
[REC MODE] .................................................................. 40, 45, 50
REC MODE ............................................................. 21, 39, 58, 102
REC TRACK .................................................................... 39, 41, 48
REC TRACK buttons ................................................. 127, 131, 134
Track ..................................................................................... 39
Recording Standby screen ................................................. 123, 126
Recording Time ........................................................................... 32
RECOVER ................................................................................. 147
Recover ..................................................................... 147, 164, 175
Recover menu screen ................................................................ 147
Redo ............................................................................................ 57
Reference Pitch .................................................................. 188–189
Rehearse .................................................................................... 128
Release ................................................................................ 97, 107
Release Time ............................................................................... 94
REMAIN ................................................................................... 142
Remain Inf .......................................................................... 62, 198
Remaining available recording time ............................................ 62
Remaining time for recording on Audio CDs ............................ 142
[REPEAT] .................................................................................... 51
Repeat ................................................................................... 51–52
Resonance ............................................................................. 96–97
REV ....................................................................... 43–44, 108–109
Rev Send ................................................................................... 111
Rev Time ................................................................................... 111
REVERB .................................................................................... 111
Reverb ....................................................................................... 108
[REW] ................................................................................... 29, 66
RHR .......................................................................................... 128
RHY .......................................................................................... 195
PLAY/IMP ........................................................................ 142, 154
Playback
Repeat ................................................................................... 51
PLAYER ...................................................................................... 96
Playing
SMF .................................................................................... 151
Polarity ..................................................................................... 101
Post Fltr ....................................................................................... 97
Power .......................................................................................... 28
Power Save ............................................................................... 197
POWER switch ...................................................................... 22, 28
PowerSave ........................................................................ 197–198
Pre Dly ................................................................................ 94, 111
Pre Filter ..................................................................................... 97
Preamp ........................................................................................ 98
Pre-gap ...................................................................................... 140
Presence ...................................................................................... 99
Preset Arrangement .................................................... 38, 120, 206
Preset Drum Kit ........................................................................ 134
Preset Patch ................................................................... 36, 84, 113
Preset Pattern .............................................................. 38, 120, 207
Preview ............................................... 65, 136, 148–149, 172, 182
Preview SW ............................................................................... 199
Song ...................................................................................... 79
PRT ............................................................................................. 79
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Rhy Send ................................................................................... 109
RhyMIDI ch ...................................................................... 157, 199
RHYTHM .............................................................................. 35, 87
Rhythm ....................................................................... 37, 120, 157
RHYTHM fader ........................................................... 37, 121–122
Rhythm Mode ........................................................................... 121
[RHYTHM PAD] ....................................................... 127, 131, 134
Ring Modulator ........................................................................... 99
RiseTme ...................................................................................... 99
ROLAND Folder ....................................................................... 162
ROOM ......................................................................... 44, 108, 111
Song Backup ............................................................................. 145
Song Copy ................................................................................... 77
Song Drum Kit .......................................................................... 134
Song Erase ................................................................................... 77
Song Information ........................................................................ 62
Song Name .................................................................................. 78
Song New .................................................................................... 32
Song Optimize ...................................................................... 57, 78
Song Patch .................................................................... 36, 84, 113
Song Pattern ........................................................................ 38, 120
Song Protect ................................................................................ 79
Song Recover ............................................................................ 147
Song Select .................................................................................. 29
Song Select screen ....................................................................... 29
Speaker Simulator ..................................................................... 100
SplitH ........................................................................................ 106
SplitL ......................................................................................... 106
Starting Measure ....................................................................... 123
STD ............................................................................................. 93
STD (LV1) ............................................................................. 32, 62
STEP .................................................................................. 123, 130
Step ........................................................................................... 123
Step Recording .................................................................. 126, 130
STEREO MULTI .......................................................................... 91
Stereo recording .................................................................... 39, 48
Sub Mixer .......................................................................... 190, 198
Sustain ........................................................................................ 94
SYNC ........................................................................ 157–160, 198
Sync Gen ................................................................... 158, 160, 198
Sync Parameter ......................................................................... 198
Synchronizing ........................................................................... 157
SYS .................................................................................... 194, 198
System Parameter ..................................................................... 198
S
S EFX ......................................................................................... 195
Track data in WAV/AIFF format ............................... 165, 176
SCMS ........................................................................................ 154
SCR ........................................................................................... 199
Scrub ........................................................................................... 65
SCRUB FROM ............................................................................. 65
Scrub Parameter ........................................................................ 199
Scrub Point .................................................................................. 65
SCRUB TO .................................................................................. 65
SEL .............................................................................................. 29
Send Level ........................................................................... 44, 109
Sens ............................................................................. 95, 101, 106
SENS knob .................................................................................. 35
Separation ....................................................................... 95–96, 98
SHELVG ................................................................................... 105
Sibilant ........................................................................................ 95
[SIMUL] .......................................................................... 34, 39, 48
SIMUL ........................................................................................ 85
SINGLE ................................................................................. 93, 95
SLDN .......................................................................................... 98
Slow Attack ................................................................................. 99
SMF ........................................................... 151–153, 169–170, 179
SMF Folder ................................................................................ 162
SMF import ............................................................................... 152
SMF player ................................................................................ 151
SML .................................................................................... 36, 204
Smooth ...................................................................................... 115
Smpl Rate .................................................................................... 97
Smth .......................................................................................... 117
Soft Clip .................................................................................... 107
SONG ................................................................................ 145, 147
Song Arrangement ...................................................... 38, 120, 123
T
[TAP] .................................................................................. 38, 122
TAP ............................................................................................. 95
TEMPO ....................................................................................... 21
Tempo ......................................................... 38, 122–123, 127, 130
Thres ......................................................................................... 107
Threshold .............................................................................. 94, 97
TIME ........................................................................................... 21
Time between songs (Pre Gap) .................................................. 140
Time Signature .......................................................... 123, 127, 130
Time Stretch .............................................................................. 192
TimeStrtch ................................................................................. 192
TME/MES ....................................................................... 68, 71, 74
TMP ............................................................................................ 85
TO ............................................................................................. 199
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
TONE ........................................................................................ 149
Tone .................................................................................... 94, 111
Tone Load ......................................................... 135, 149, 171, 181
TONELOAD Folder .................................................................. 162
Top-Hi ........................................................................................ 93
Top-Mid ...................................................................................... 93
TOUCH ..................................................................................... 101
TRACK ............................................................................... 87, 135
Track ............................................................................... 39, 41, 48
Track At Once ........................................................................... 140
Track Copy ................................................................................. 67
Track Editing .............................................................................. 67
Track EQ ..................................................................... 43, 110, 112
Track Erase ................................................................................. 73
Track Exchange ........................................................................... 76
TRACK fader ......................................................................... 18, 29
TRACK MIXER ........................................................................... 18
Track Move ................................................................................. 70
Track Mute .................................................................................. 41
Treble .......................................................................................... 99
Tremolo/Pan ............................................................................ 100
TRK ..................................................................... 67, 70, 73, 75–76
TRM-SQR .................................................................................. 100
TRM-TRI ................................................................................... 100
[TUNER] ................................................................................... 188
Tuner ........................................................................................ 188
Tuning ........................................................................ 96, 188–189
Tuning guide ............................................................................ 188
Type .................................. 43, 94–96, 98, 100–101, 108, 111, 115
VO+GT AMP .............................................................................. 92
VOCAL MULTI ........................................................................... 90
VOICE TRANS ............................................................................ 90
Voice Transformer .................................................................... 100
Volume ....................................................................................... 99
VtgRack ...................................................................................... 94
[V-TRACK] ................................................................................. 49
V-Track ................................................................................. 14, 49
V-Track Selection screen ............................................................. 49
W
Wah ........................................................................................... 101
WAV ................................................................. 148, 150, 165, 176
WAV/AIFF Export ................................................... 150, 165, 176
WAV/AIFF File ................................................................ 171, 181
WAV/AIFF Import ................................................... 148, 167, 178
WAV/AIFF menu screen .......................................................... 148
Windows ........................................................................... 162, 164
Windows 2000 ........................................................................... 162
Windows Me ............................................................................. 162
Windows XP ............................................................................. 162
Wow Flt ...................................................................................... 96
WRITE ................................................................ 86, 104, 115, 141
Writing
Waveform data ................................................................... 148
X
U
XCG ............................................................................................ 76
U EFX ........................................................................................ 195
Undo ........................................................................................... 57
[UNDO/REDO] .......................................................................... 57
UP ............................................................................................. 101
USB ........................................................................... 162, 164, 175
USB connector ............................................................................. 22
USB Folder ................................................................................ 163
USB screen ................................................................................ 164
User Patch ............................................................................. 36, 84
[UTILITY] ......................................................................... 198–199
Z
[ZERO] ........................................................................................ 30
V ............................................................................................... 120
Velocity ..................................................................... 127, 131–132
Verse ......................................................................................... 120
VO DRV ...................................................................................... 98
VO+AC.SIM ................................................................................ 92
VO+ACOUSTIC .......................................................................... 92
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the U.K.
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE:
NEUTRAL
BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name : BR-900CD
Type of Equipment : Digital Recording Studio
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S.Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938
(323) 890-3700
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
**********
2SX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
